Pastries Like a Pro

  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Valentine's Day
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Valentine's Day
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • subscribe
    search icon
    Homepage link
    • Home
    • Recipes
    • About Helen
    • Valentine's Day
    • Subscribe
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • ×
    Home

    Valentine’s Desserts Everyone Is Baking

    Modified: Feb 10, 2025 · Published: Feb 10, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A close-up of a stack of salted macadamia rum toffee.

    Valentine’s Day brings out the craving for something a little sweeter—and these desserts deliver without overcomplicating things. This Valentine’s roundup pulls together tried-and-true favorites that feel festive, comforting, and completely achievable at home. They’re the kind of recipes people bookmark now and bake year after year even when it's not Valentine's Day. There are cookies, cakes, tarts, candy and more. One is sure to be your favorite!

    A close-up of a stack of salted macadamia rum toffee.

    Cookies

    Tropical Shortbread Cookies
    These heart shaped Tropical Shortbread Cookies are the perfect way to say "I Love You" on Valentines day. While cut out cookies can be a challenge, my post on Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique makes is so much easier.  
    No flour all over, no trying to scrape the cookie off the counter, just perfect cut out cookies every time without the drama. The cookies don't spread and they cut out cleanly with sharp edges.
    Check out this recipe
    Tropical Shortbreads half dipped in chocolate on a lattice platter in front of a purple background.
    Multi colored Painted Cookies on a lace plate
    Painted Cookies
    An easy way to finish a cookie with an explosion of color that is easy to make. The cookie recipe is included and is a joy as it doesn't spread when baked and keeps it's sharpe edges and shape.
    Check out this recipe
    French Macarons with Chocolate Raspberry Filling
    Just in time for Valentine's day comes these special French Macarons with the same chocolate raspberry truffle filling we sold at the bakery. This deeply chocolate, deeply raspberry filling is sandwiched between two pink macaroons.
    Check out this recipe
    A plate of pink French macarons filled with chocolate and raspberry sit on a white plate.
    Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.
    Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies
    These Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies are a European cookie that are a cinch to make using the food processor. They are a delightfully chewy cookie equally fantastic plain or glazed. A few ingredients, a quick turn in the processor and the dough is ready to be rolled and cut into shapes. These are a natural for Valentines Day, although they could be cut into any shape. Naturally gluten free, the cookies use almond flour.
    Check out this recipe
    Strawberry Brownies
    Looking for a Valentine's a brownie? These Strawberry Brownies deliver in every way. If you love brownies that are a bit different and unexpected, you've come to the right place. They’re chewy in the middle, lightly crisp on the edges, and packed with real strawberry flavor- thanks to the strawberry buttercream and chocolate glaze - making them ideal for this special day.
    Check out this recipe
    Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.

    Cakes

    A slice of theUltimate Chocolate Fudge Cake sits in a pool of creme anglaise.
    Updated GF Ultimate Chocolate Fudge Cake
    This Ultimate Chocolate Fudge Cake is ultra-smooth and has a deep, intense chocolate taste without being bitter or overwhelming. Serve it alone, with a caramel sauce or for a special treat serve it with the strawberry sauce for the Lemon Strawberry Cake. Nothing could say Valentine's day better or easier.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte
    This Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte is a showy torte that is actually reallly easy to accomplish. It's like the best chocolate covered strawberry you ever ate!  A simple French cake, the Reine de Saba, is filled with fresh strawberries and topped with a chocolate mousse and glaze.
    Check out this recipe
    The Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte sits on a gold platter.
    A slice of the Raspberry MascarponeTarte Tropezienne sits on a lace edged white plate with a teal napkin behind it and a gold rimed saucer.
    Raspberry Mascarpone Tarte Tropezienne
    This is a great dessert anytime, but especially for Valentine's Day. It features my super easy 60 second Brioche as its base and if filled with an exquisite light, creamy mascarpone filling enclosing fresh raspberries with a special crunch from pearl sugar.  Also called Swedish Pearl Sugar, these snow-white nuggets don't melt when baked and are a must-have for this dessert.
    Check out this recipe
    Amaretto Truffle Torte
    This Amaretto Truffle Torte is one of the most intense, decadent tortes you will find. Intensely chocolate and deeply flavored with amaretto and hazelnuts (almonds are fine also), this should be served in small pieces to be savored.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate cake base covered with caramel and hazelnuts topped with amaretto ganache.

    Individual Desserts

    Decadent Gluten Free Turtle Cake
    Gluten Free Turtle Cake with Salted Carame.
    While this is the least perfect cake I have ever made I love it, I kept it because it is so darn delicious. Topped with the caramel no one knows. And boy did people ask for seconds.
    Check out this recipe
    Strawberry Verrines
    A verrine is a layered dessert or appetizer that is served in a small glass.  The glass allows for a beautiful vertical presentation.  Verrines originally came to us from France, but as with all foods we make them ours by the ingredients used.
    Check out this recipe
    A small glass hold the Strawberry Verrine which is a combination of a chocolate mousse and pastry cream filled with strawberries.
    A heart shaped individual chocolate truffle tart filled with fresh raspberries sits on a white plate with blue dots.
    No Bake Chocolate Raspberry Truffle Tarts
    If you're looking for an easy, mouthwatering dessert, these individual No Bake Chocolate Raspberry Truffle Tarts are perfect with a sophistication that will make everyone think you stopped by the best bakery in town. (Shhh! Don't tell anyone these can be made ahead!)
    Check out this recipe
    Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse
    Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse is an amazing combination of three nutted meringue discs filled with a raspberry mousse that is enhanced with mascarpone. Made into individual desserts (who doesn't like their own dessert?) these stunning offerings are easy to make and easier to eat.
    Check out this recipe
    An individual Hazelnut Meringue with a Rasperry filling sits on two plates,

    Pies and Tarts

    Chocolate Strawberry Pie
    Looking for something really fast and really tasty? This is it. A pie crust if filled with fresh strawberries and covered with a decadent chocolate ganache. 30 minutes top. Bake the crust while you hull the strawberries.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart
    This  elegant Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart is actually really easy to make.  While it’s true there is no baking, the raspberry curd does have to be made at least a day or two ahead. But is is a no bake tart after that.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart

    Candy

    A close-up of a stack of salted macadamia rum toffee.
    Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee
    This Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee is simply a matter of adding a few ingredients at a time and taking the mixture to a stated temperature.  Stir in a couple of more ingredients and pour it into a prepared pan. In a matter of minutes, it’s cool and ready to finish.
    Check out this recipe
    Nutella Fudge Hearts
    Nutella Fudge can be made in a flash and is perfect for cutting into cute little hearts for Valentine's day. Not interested in hearts? Cut it into squares. With a little supervision this would be perfect to make with kids. It takes literally minutes to put together.
    Check out this recipe
    Nutella Hazelnut Fudge Hearts on a white plate with yellow rose petals below.
    Macadamia Brittle|Candy|Pastries Like a Pro
    Sweet and Hot Macadamia Brittle
    An easy brittle that doesn't require a candy thermometer, this brittle comes together easily and quickly. Any nut can be used and a touch of heat makes it memorable.
    Check out this recipe
    Better than Reese's Peanut Butter Cups
    And not only better, but really, really easy. Four ingredients for the peanut butter and two for the chocolate. So there's no excuse for not making these Peanut Butter Cups.
    Check out this recipe
    Reese's Peanut Butter Cups

    Thanks for looking and have a great Valentine's day!

    Nutella Fudge Hearts

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Feb 10, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    Nutella Hazelnut Fudge Hearts on a white plate with yellow rose petals below.

    Nutella Fudge can be made in a flash and is perfect for cutting into cute little hearts for Valentine's day. Not interested in hearts? Cut it into squares. With a little supervision this would be perfect to make with kids. It takes literally minutes to put together.

    Nutella Hazelnut Fudge Hearts on a white plate with yellow rose petals below.

    Since Nutella is made with hazelnuts, I added them to the fudge. If you're not into hazelnuts, use almonds or cashews. The nuts not only add flavor but texture as well.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why you'll want to make this recipe

    • It's really quick and is smooth as silk on your tongue.
    • It tastes amazing.
    • Any shape can be cut out or just cut it into squares.
    • It's kid friendly, so invite them into the kitchen
    • The fudge is a shortcut version of traditional fudge which can be tricky

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Nutella Fudge are Nutella, semisweet chocolate, condensed milk, unsalted butter, hazelnuts, vanilla, and sea salt.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla, sea salt

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, toasted hazelnuts

    BACK ROW: Nutella, semisweet chocolate, condensed milk

    The vanilla I use is McCormicks imitation for this recipe because the nutella, chocolate and condensed milk are so strong it is a waste to use pure vanilla. While I know there are people who are surprised that I do not automatically pure vanilla in every recipe, there is a great discussion of my reasoning in Flavorings as Used in Baking and Pastry.

    Toasting the hazelnuts is important to bring out the depth of flavor. Chopping nuts can be a pain, so I show you a better way in Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way. Removing the hazelnut skins can be challenging but there is an easier way in the Hazelnut Gianduja Cake.

    The chocolate I use is Callebaut #811 Dark Chocolate Callets. They look like chocolate chips but are 100% chocolate made into chips for faster melting. They can be found on Amazon from various dealers with various prices.

    Condensed Milk is specified. It is a thick sweetened milk. Do not use evaporated milk as it is not sweetened, nor as thick. Although they both have 60% of their water evaporated, they cannot be substituted for one another.

    Sea Salt is optional but a great way to add additional flavor and cut the sweetness of the fudge. If using it, I suggest a fine sea salt.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage shows a square pan lined with foil, whole hazelnuts in a rimmed pan covered with film, the nuts are  chopped, and the ingredients in a large glass bowl.

    Step 1. Line a square pan with foil. Make sure the sides extend over the top making handles. Spray the foil. Set aside. Step 2. After toasting and skinning the hazelnuts, (see above), place them in a rimmed baking sheet. Cover them with film. Step 3. Then simply whack them with a meat pounder or heavy pan and they will chopped in minutes. Step 4. Place all of the ingredients except the sea salt in a large, microwaveable bowl. Microwave about 2 minutes depending upon your microwave until the butter and chocolate are melty. Some of the chocolate may look unmelted but the heat from the condensed milk and butter will finish the job. If not, microwave a bit longer.

    The second collage shows the fudge mixed, poured into the pan, the foil turned down and the fudge cut into hearts.

    Step 5. Stir together until completely combined. Step 6. Pour the Nutella Fudge into the prepared pan. Sprinkle with sea salt if using. Chill until set, usually a couple of hours. Step 7. Using the foil handles, remove the fudge from the pan. Turn the foil sides down so they are completely flat on the table. Step 8. Cut the fudge into hearts or whatever shape desired.

    Recipe FAQ's

    What is the meaning of Nutella

    It comes from the from the English word “Nut” and the Latin word “Ella” meaning sweet. The word means "sweet nut".

    Who makes Nutella?

    Nutella is produced by the Italian company Ferrero which started as a small café and bakery in a small town called Alba in the northern part of Italy.

    Where was Nutella originally marketed?

    1964, was the birth of Nutella as we know it today when it was introduced to the UK market.

    Expert tips

    • If using an 8x8 inch square pan, the fudge will be about 1" thick.
    • Make sure your cutter is a bit taller than that.
    • If you have a shorter cutter, use a 9x9 inch square pan to make the finished fudge less thick.
    • The number of hearts or other cutters depends upon their size. A 1 ½ inch cutter will yield about 25 hearts.
    Four chocolate hearts sit on a silver plate in front of a floral setting.

    More Sweets to Tempt You

    • Two chocolate truffles on a silver serving dish.
      Chocolate Chocolate Truffles
    • Sweet and Hot Macadamia Brittle
    • Peanut Butter Cups
      Better Than Reese's Peanut Butter Cups
    • Praline Square candy
      Praline Squares or Pecan Candy

    If you make these Nutella Fudge Hearts, I would very much appreciate it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

    Nutella Hazelnut Fudge Hearts on a white plate with yellow rose petals below.

    Nutella Fudge Hearts

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Nutella Fudge can be made in a flash and is perfect for cutting into cute little hearts for Valentine's day. This super easy recipe goes together in minutes and is kid friendly.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Chilling time 2 hours hrs
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
    Course Candy
    Cuisine American
    Servings 25 pieces
    Calories 196 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup hazelnuts (60 grams)
    • 14 ounce can condensed milk
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla
    • 8 ounces semisweet chocolate (225 grams)
    • 1 cup Nutella
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter (45 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon sea salt, or to taste

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line an 8x8 inch or 9x9 inch square pan with foil, making sure the foil over hangs the sides of the pan. Spray the pan with a non-stick baking release.
    • Place the hazelnuts on a rimmed baking sheet and toast them for 7 to 10 minutes until golden brown and fragrant. To remove the skins easily, see my post Hazelnut Gianduja Cake.
    • Place all of the ingredients except the salt in a large microwave bowl. Microwave about 3 minutes on half power to melt the butter, chocolate, Nutella and condensed milk.
    • Alternatively, place the bowl over a pan of simmering water, stirring after a few minutes to melt everything.
    • Stir the ingredients together until completely mixed. Pour into the prepared pan. and smooth out. Sprinkle with sea salt if using.
    • Refrigerate several hours to set and become firm.
    • Lift the fudge out of the pan, using the overhanging foil. Turn the foil down so it is flat on the table.
    • Cut the hearts out, pushing them out of the cutter from the top.
    • Store in an airtight container.
    • The baker's reward is the scraps around the cutter!

    Notes

    Any shape cutter can be used or just cut it into squares.
    It's kid friendly, so invite them into the kitchen
    The vanilla I use is McCormicks imitation for this recipe because the nutella, chocolate and condensed milk are so strong it is a waste to use pure vanilla. While I know there are people who are surprised that I do not automatically pure vanilla in every recipe, there is a great discussion of my reasoning in Flavorings as Used in Baking and Pastry.
    Toasting the hazelnuts is important to bring out the depth of flavor. Chopping nuts can be a pain, so I show you a better way in Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way.  Removing the hazelnut skins can be challenging but there is an easier way in the Hazelnut Gianduja Cake.
    The chocolate I use is Callebaut #811 Dark Chocolate Callets. They look like chocolate chips but are 100% chocolate made into chips for faster melting. They can be found on Amazon from various dealers with various prices.
    Condensed Milk is specified. It is a thick sweetened milk. Do not use evaporated milk as it is not sweetened, nor as thick. Although they both have 60% of their water evaporated, they cannot be substituted for one another. 
    Sea Salt is optional but a great way to add additional flavor and cut the sweetness of the fudge. If using it, I suggest a fine sea salt.
    If using an 8x8 inch square pan, the fudge will be about 1" thick.
    Make sure your cutter is a bit taller than that.
    If you have a shorter cutter, use a 9x9 inch square pan to make the finished fudge less thick.
    The number of hearts or other shapes depends upon their size. A 1 ½ inch cutter will yield about 25 hearts. 
    The Nutella Fudge stores well in an airtight tin at room temperature. 
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 25piecesCalories: 196kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 3gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 10mgSodium: 119mgPotassium: 176mgFiber: 2gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 90IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 67mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Homemade Pretzel Bites That Vanish Fast

    Modified: Feb 2, 2025 · Published: Feb 3, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    Pretzel bites surround a bowl of Hot Honey Mustard dip with napkins in the background on bottles of beer on the side.

    Fresh from the oven, these Homemade Pretzel Bites have that deep golden crust, a tender, chewy center, and a Hot Honey Mustard Dip that you won't believe - I can eat it by the spoonful. They're easy to make and look like a bakery treat but come together with simple pantry ingredients. Whether you’re making them for game day, snacking, or a cozy weekend bake, this is the kind of recipe that you'll want to make again and again. Better yet, these can be made ahead and baked off from the freezer.

    Pretzel bites surround a bowl of Hot Honey Mustard dip with napkins in the background on bottles of beer on the side.

    What makes these pretzel bites work so well is an unbelievably easy dough made with pantry ingredients and a quick baking-soda bath that creates that classic pretzel flavor and mahogany brown chewy crust. There’s no special equipment, and no complicated shaping, Below, I’ll walk you through each step so you know exactly what to look for, from start to finish.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why you'll love these Pretzel Bites

    • Yeast dough doesn't get any easier.
    • The dough rises in literally 1 hour.
    • The pretzel bites taste like those pretzels sold in the malls with a chewy outsides and soft, delicious inside.
    • The Hot Honey Mustard Dip is something you'll find many other uses for such as a salad dressing, as a binder for a chicken salad, as an accompaniment to pork, or eat by the spoonful when you need a pick me up.
    • I know a couple of teen-agers who pulled these off so you can too!

    What is Barley Malt Syrup?

    Barley malt syrup is a thick, dark, slightly sweet syrup similar in looks to molasses but not as sweet. It's made from sprouted barley.

    Barley malt syrup is used in bread baking to boost yeast activity, enhance the flavor and color, add moisture and texture and is essential for achieving a traditional, chewy texture and deep, glossy crust, particularly in the boiling water. 

    Lye or Baking Soda?

    Traditionally and commercially pretzels are dunked into boiling water with food grade lye. It's perfectly safe to eat and has been used forever. However, because of the enormous safety concerns I don't recommend it. If it gets on your skin it can cause burns so gloves, goggles and protective clothing are recommended.

    Baking soda is a safe alternative and serves the same purpose so there's no need to use lye. I have seen recipes where the water is not boiling when the bites are added. I have not tested this so really can't speak to it. I recommend a large pot and using the boiling water technique as described below.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pretzel Bites

    Ingredients for the pretzel bites are all-purpose flour, water, barley malt syrup or brown sugar, oil, salt, and yeast.

    FRONT ROW: Barley Malt Syrup, canola oil, salt, instant yeast

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, water

    Baking Soda Bath and Finishing

    The baking soda bath and finishing includes barley malt syrup, baking soda, water, a dutch oven or large pot and a slotted spoon for the bath.  To finish, an egg, water, coarse salt or pearl sugar.

    FRONT ROW: Barley Malt Syrup, baking soda, water

    MIDDLE ROW: Swedish Pearl Sugar, coarse salt, egg

    BACK ROW: Large Dutch oven or pot and a slotted spoon

    Hot Honey Mustard Dip

    Ingredients for the hot honey mustard dip include coarse ground mustard,  honey, mayonnaise, and cayenne pepper. A fifth ingredient was  not used in the finished dip,

    FRONT ROW: Vinegar (which was omitted in the finished dip), cayenne pepper

    BACK ROW: Coarse ground mustard, honey, mayonnaise

    Key Ingredients and Substitutions

    • Brown Sugar can be substituted for the Barley Malt Syrup in the yeast dough.
    • Vegetable oil can be substituted for the canola oil.
    • If not you using the Barley Malt Syrup in the baking soda bath, don't use anything.
    • Brushing the pretzel bites with the egg wash is not mandatory but gives a nice shine to them. I strongly suggest it and it only takes a few minutes. In addition it holds the salt or sugar in place better than water.
    • I like the extra bite the coarse ground mustard gives to the Hot Honey Mustard Dip but dijon or another mustard can be substituted. However, it will change the taste of the final dip.
    • I was originally going to add the vinegar to sharpen the taste but it was unnecessary and would also thin out the dip so I omitted it.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    It is best to bake these at once if possible. Set the bottom rack ⅓ of the way up and the top rack ⅓ from the top.

    The first collage shows the yeast sprinkled over the water, the oil and barley malt added and mixed in and the flour and salt in a bowl. ,

    Step1. Sprinkle the yeast over the water. I do this even with instant yeast since I once made a yeast dough where it wasn't fully dissolved. Stir it in. Step 2. After the yeast is a bit foamy, add the barley malt syrup or brown sugar and oil. Step 3. Stir everything together to make sure it is combined. Step 4. Add the salt to the all-purpose flour.

    This collage shows the liquid being added to the flour mixture in a mixing bowl, the dough mixed, shaped into  a ball in the bowl and then risen.

    Step 5. Place the flour mixture in a mixing bowl. Add the liquid to the flour. Step 6. Mix on low until it comes together. Beat for 3 minutes on the knead speed of your mixer until the is smooth and cleans the bowl as seen in the photo. Step 7. Shape the dough into a ball and place it in a bowl at least twice the size of the ball sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Step 8. Cover the bowl and let the dough rise. It will take about an hour. At this point it can be worked immediately, refrigerated overnight or frozen for a couple of months.

    This collage shows the dough divided into 10 pieces, covered with film, a ball of doug, a small container of water and a ruler, then a ruler and a rope of dough cut into 7 pieces.

    Step 9. Line two half sheet pans with parchment and spray them very well with a non-stick baking spray. Set them aside. Divide the dough into 10 pieces abut 85 grams each. Step 10. Cover them with plastic wrap while you shape one at a time. Step 11. To make it easier to roll the ball into a rope have a small bowl of water and a ruler ready. If the dough doesn't have enough tension on it when rolling it out to a 10" rope, dip a finger or two into the water, shake it off and rub the remainder into the palms of your hands. They should not be wet, but damp. Shape the ball into a rope and press down while rolling from the center out until it is about 11" long. Pick it up and allow it to shrink back to 10". Under no condition should you flour the surface. Step 12. With the ruler placed behind the rope cut it into 7 - 1 ½" pieces of dough with a bench scraper or knife.

    The last collage shows the water bath for the pretzels, the pretzels cut, dipped in the water path, and then baked.

    Step 13. As you start rolling and cutting the last 1 or 2 of the rolls, start heating the water for the baking soda dip. Bring the water to a boil in a large Dutch oven or stock pan. Add the baking soda slowly - no more than a tablespoon at a time. It will rise up tremendously. Stir it while it subsides, then add another tablespoon. At the end add the barley malt syrup if using. If you are still cutting the pretzels, reduce the heat and cover the pan so the water doesn't evaporate. Step 14. Cut all of the pretzels. Step 15. Bring the water back to a boil Lower as many as will fit without crowding into the water. Stir them around for 20 to 30 seconds but no longer. Remove them to the sprayed half sheet pans. Repeat until all of them are dunked. Arrange them about ½ to 1 inch apart on the baking sheets. Beat the egg to combine the yolk and white and add the water. Brush the pretzels and sprinkle with coarse salt or Swedish Pearl Sugar.

    Double Pan the two sheet pans and bake as directed switching the pans top to bottom and turning them so they brown evenly.

    To Make Ahead

    The bites can be rolled and cut then put through the water bath. Place them on a tray lined with parchment paper and sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Freeze for about an hour or until hard. Do not egg wash them. When hard, transfer to a freezer proof bag or container. To bake them, place them on a sprayed, parchment lined tray spacing them about an inch apart. Brush then with egg wash and sprinkle with salt or sugar. Add a few minutes more to the baking time.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Why do pretzel bites need a baking soda water bath?

    The baking soda bath gives pretzel bites their signature chewy texture and deep golden color. It changes the surface of the dough so it browns properly in the oven and develops that classic pretzel flavor.

    Can pretzel bites be made ahead?

    Absolutely. The dough can be made and frozen for several months, well wrapped. Thaw in the fridge and continue as directed in the recipe. They can also be made completely and frozen, then heated in a 350°F oven for 20 minutes or so to thaw and freshen.

    What is the best way to get the salt, cheese or sugar to stick on a pretzel?

    The surest way is to brush the pretzels just before baking with an egg wash made with one egg well beaten plus 1 tablespoon of water. Lightly brush the bites after they come from the water bath are have dried for a couple of minutes then sprinkle them with whatever you please.

    Expert Tips

    • The dough should not be too soft or too firm when mixed. Softer is easier to roll into ropes but is more bready tasting, but firmer tastes like a pretzel. Both should clean the sides and bottom of the mixing bowl.
    • While the baking soda water bath is not mandatory, the bites won't taste like pretzels if it isn't used. So I very much recommend it.
    • I have been asked if the egg wash is necessary. I use it to give a final beautiful sheen to the baked bites and equally important to keep the toppings in place. It's more reliable than water.
    • Softening the instant yeast in liquid ensures it is completely dissolved and also gives a head start to the rising process.
    • This dough is amazing in that it takes one rise for one hour.
    • Use a very large pot for the water bath even though there isn't a lot of water. The baking soda will really rise up in the boiling water. And add the baking soda very slowly to help control it. It will subside but get very bubbly when the bites are added.
    • Flour should not be used to roll out the ropes. See Step 11 if there is not enough tension to roll out the ropes.
    Pretzel bites surround a bowl of Hot Honey Mustard dip with napkins in the background on bottles of beer on the side.
    • Hot Peppered Pecans
      Hot Peppered Pecans
    • Zippy Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
      Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
    • Puff Pastry Crackers
      Puff Pastry Crackers
    • Hot Curried Party Mix in a bowl
      Hot Curried Party Mix

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Pretzel bites surround a bowl of Hot Honey Mustard dip with napkins in the background on bottles of beer on the side.

    Homemade Pretzel Bites That Vanish Fast

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Fresh from the oven, these Homemade Pretzel Bites have that deep golden crust, a tender, chewy center, and a Hot Honey Mustard Dip that you won't believe - I can eat it by the spoonful.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Rising Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
    Course Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 70 bites
    Calories 48 kcal

    Equipment

    • Stand Mixer
    • Large Dutch Oven or Stock Pot
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Pretzel Bite Dough

    • 2 ¼ teaspoons instant yeast
    • 1 ½ cups water
    • 1 tablespoon barley malt syrup or brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
    • 3 ⅔ to 3 ¾ cups all-purpose flour (515 to 540 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon salt

    Baking Soda Bath and Finishing

    • 6 cups water
    • ¼ cup baking soda
    • 1 tablespoon barley malt syrup, optional
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 tablespoon water
    • coarse salt, optional
    • Swedish Pearl Sugar, optional

    Hot Honey Mustard Dip

    • ½ cup coarse ground mustard
    • ½ cup mayonnaise
    • 3 tablespoons honey
    • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper

    Instructions
     

    Pretzel Bite Dough

    • Sprinkle the yeast over the warm water and stir it in.
    • Add the barley malt syrup or brown sugar and oil, stirring them in.
    • Combine the smallest amount of flour and salt in a mixing bowl. Pour the liquid over and beat on low to bring together. Beat on the Knead setting of the mixer for 3 minutes or until a smooth dough forms that cleans the side and bottom of the bowl. Add 1 tablespoon of the reserved flour at a time if the dough seems sticky. It should be tacky but it should not stick to your hands.
    • Place the dough in a container sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Place the dough in it and cover it with plastic wrap until doubled which should take about an hour. At this point it can be used immediately or it can be refrigerated overnight or frozen for a couple of months. If frozen, thaw it overnight in the fridge and continue.
    • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Line 2 half sheets with parchment paper and spray them very well with a non-stick baking release. Set them aside. Place the oven racks in the lower third and upper third of the oven.
    • To make it easier to roll the ball into a rope have a small bowl of water and a ruler ready. If the dough doesn't have enough tension on it when rolling it out to a 10" rope, dip a finger or two into the water, shake it off and rub the remainder into the palms of your hands. They should not be wet, but damp.
      Shape the ball into a rope and press down while rolling from the center out until it is about 11" long. Pick it up and allow it to shrink back to 10". Under no condition should you flour the surface. With the ruler placed behind the rope cut it into 7 - 1 ½" pieces of dough with a bench scraper or knife.
      Place them on a parchment lined baking sheet. Continue rolling and cutting the ropes.
    • When you get to the last one or two, put the 6 cups of water on to boil Put a lid on the pan so the water doesn't evaporate. Finish rolling and cutting the dough.

    Baking Soda Bath and Finishing

    • Using a large Dutch oven or stock pot, bring 6 cups of water to a boil. Very slowly add the baking soda. It will bubble up furiously. Stir it down. Continue until all of the baking soda is added. Last add the barley malt syrup. If not using the syrup don't add anything.
    • Using a slotted spoon or spider, add as many of the bites as the pan will hold without overly crowding the. Stir for 25 to 30 seconds and remove them to one of the prepared half sheets. Continue until all of them have been through the bath. They will have enlarged at this point.
    • Spread them out about ½ to 1 inch apart. They won't rise anymore.
    • Beat the egg in a small bowl until it is completely mixed. Add the 1 tablespoon of water. Brush each pretzel with the egg wash and sprinkle lightly with coarse salt for savory or Swedish Pearl Sugar for sweet.
    • It is best to double pan the bites to prevent them from getting overly browned on the bottom. Bake for 12 to 15 minutes until deeply browned. Switch the pans top to bottom halfway through and turn them so they brown evenly.
    • Remove the bites from the trays within 5 minutes as they will stick to the paper if they get cool.

    Hot Honey Mustard Dip

    • Stir all of the ingredients together. This can be made a day or two ahead.

    To Make Ahead

    • The bites can be rolled and cut then put through the water bath. Place them on a tray and freeze for about an hour or until hard. Do not egg wash them. When hard, transfer to a freezer proof bag or container. To bake them, place them on a sprayed, parchment lined tray spacing them about an inch apart. Brush then with egg wash and sprinkle with salt or sugar. Add a few minutes more to the baking time.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    __________________________________________________
    Brown Sugar can be substituted for the Barley Malt Syrup in the yeast dough.
    Vegetable oil can be substituted for the canola oil. 
    If not you using the Barley Malt Syrup in the baking soda bath, don't use anything.
    Brushing the pretzel bites with the egg wash is not mandatory but gives a nice shine to them. I strongly suggest it and it only takes a few minutes. In addition, it holds the salt or sugar in place better than water.
    I like the extra bite the coarse ground mustard gives to the Hot Honey Mustard Dip but dijon or another mustard can be substituted. However, it will change the taste of the final dip.
    I was originally going to add the vinegar  (as seen in the ingredients photo) to sharpen the taste but it was unnecessary and would also thin out the dip so I omitted it.
    The dough should not be too soft or too firm when mixed. Softer is easier to roll into ropes but is more bready tasting, but firmer tastes like a pretzel. Both should clean the sides and bottom of the mixing bowl.
    While the baking soda water bath is not mandatory, the bites won't taste like pretzels if it isn't used. So I very much recommend it.
    Softening the instant yeast in liquid ensures it is completely dissolved and also gives a head start to the rising process.
    Use a very large pot for the water bath even though there isn't a lot of water. The baking soda will really rise up in the boiling water. And add the baking soda very slowly to help control it. Sir it and it will subside but get very bubbly when the bites are added.
    Flour should not be used to roll out the ropes. See Step 11 if there is not enough tension to roll out the ropes.
    The Hot Honey Mustard Dip is something you will find many other uses for such as a salad dressing, as a binder for a chicken salad or eat by the spoonful when you need a pick me up. 
     
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 70bitesCalories: 48kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 1gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 0.3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.4gTrans Fat: 0.005gCholesterol: 3mgSodium: 183mgPotassium: 17mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 9IUVitamin C: 0.02mgCalcium: 4mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Strawberry Brownies

    Modified: Jan 26, 2025 · Published: Jan 27, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 12 Comments

    Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.

    Looking for something a bit different in a brownie? These Strawberry Brownies deliver in every way. If you love brownies that are a bit different and unexpected, you've come to the right place. They’re chewy in the middle, lightly crisp on the edges, and packed with real strawberry flavor- thanks to the strawberry buttercream and chocolate glaze - making them ideal for parties, baby showers, or just a fun weeknight bake.

    Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.

    They’re easy to make ahead, travel well, and slice cleanly—making them as practical as they are pretty.

    This recipe is intentionally simple, with clear steps and no fancy techniques, so you can have these strawberry brownies in the oven fast. Whether you’re baking for a party, a holiday, or just because you’re craving something sweet, the ingredients are easy to find and the results are consistently soft, chewy, and full of strawberry flavor. Let’s walk through exactly what you’ll need and how to make them turn out perfect every time.

    Other bars and brownies to satisfy your craving include: No Bake Peanut Butter Bars, Simple Samoa Cookie Bars, Updating Millionaire's Shortbread, and the ever popular Mocha Kahlua Brownies.

    About this Recipe:

    • ⏲️Ready In: Text
    • 👪Serves: Text
    • 🍽 Calories and Protein: Text
    • 📋 Main Ingredients: Text
    • 📖 Dietary Notes: Text
    • ⭐ Why You'll Love It: Text

    Summarize this Recipe:

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Perplexity
    Grok
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why you'll want to make these strawberry brownies

    • They're absolutely packed with flavor.
    • The strawberry buttercream uses freeze dried strawberries to intensify the taste.
    • They can be frozen fully baked and just thawed for a quick chocolate strawberry fix.
    • They are super easy to make.......and to eat!

    Recipe Ingredients

    Brownies

    Ingredients for the brownies are: natural cocoa, all-purpose flour, salt, baking powder, eggs, dark brown sugar, canola oil and vanilla estract.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, vanilla, baking soda

    MIDDLE ROW: Natural cocoa, eggs, all-purpose flour

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, dark brown sugar, canola oil

    Strawberry Buttercream

    Ingredients for the Strawberry buttercream include powdered sugar, freeze dried strawberries, unsalted butter, milk,and almond extract.

    FRONT ROW: Milk, almond extract

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, red food coloring (optional), freeze dried strawberries

    Cream Glaze

    The cream glaze is made with semisweet chocolate and heavy cream.

    Left to Right: Semisweet chocolate, heavy cream

    Important Ingredients

    • Natural Cocoa is lighter in color, acidic and more intense in flavor as it has not been altered as has Dutch Cocoa. Generally, natural cocoa takes baking soda to counter the acidity. Hershey's, Valrhona, and Ghirardelli all sell natural cocoa. For more information see my post Cocoa Fundamentals - Natural vs. Dutched.
    • Either canola or vegetable oil can be used.
    • Whole milk or 2% are interchangeable.
    • Dark brown sugar is recommended for increased flavor but light brown can be substituted.
    • McCormick vanilla is fine here.
    • It is important to use freeze dried strawberries for the buttercream.
    • Red food coloring is optional
    • Heavy whipping cream is essential to the outcome of the Cream Glaze.
    • Trader Joe's has the 1.2 ounce packages of freeze dried strawberries with the best price I can find.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Brownies

    This collage shows the pan prepared with a parchment paper overhang, the dry ingredients in a strainer, sifted and eggs, sugars and vanilla in a mixing bowl.

    Step 1. Prepare the 9x9x2 inch square baking pan with a parchment paper sling. Spray the paper and the sides of the pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside. Step 2. Place the flour, cocoa, salt and baking soda in a strainer to sift it as the cocoa especially usually has lumps that are hard to mix into the batter. Step 3.Sift the ingredients over waxed or parchment paper. Step 4. Place the eggs, brown and powdered sugar, and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer.

    This collage shows the egg mixture mixed, the flour mixture added and mixed and the batter in the pan.

    Step 5. Mix the ingredients to combine. Add the oil and mix again to completely incorporate it. Step 6. Add the dry ingredients and blend together just until incorporated. Step 8. Pour into the prepared pan and bake as directed.

    Strawberry Buttercream

    This collages shows the steps for the strawberry buttercream include the powdered sugar and freeze dried strawberries in a food processor, processed, transferred to the mixer and finished mixing.

    Step 9. Place half the powdered sugar and half the freeze dried strawberries in a processor. Step 10. Process until the strawberries are completely pulverized and part of the powdered sugar. Be sure to cover the feed tube as the powder will fly around. Repeat with the second half of the ingredients. Step 11. Transfer the mixture to a mixing bowl and add the rest of the ingredients. Step 12. Beat on low to bring together and then raise to medium or medium high and beat to increase the volume.

    Cream Glaze

    This is the same glaze we used on many of our chocolate covered cakes at the bakery. While it goes on liquid it sets up perfectly. After refrigerating, it stays firm to touch but is not hard at room temperature.

    This collages hows the cream glaze being made by  heating the cream, adding the chocolate, submerging it beneath the hot cream and stirring to combine it into a smooth chocolate glaze.

    Step 13. Heat the cream until very hot and steamy but not boiling. If the cream boils there is a risk of the glaze becoming dull. Step 14. Add the semisweet chocolate. Step 15. Submerge the chocolate under the hot cream and let it sit for about 4 to 5 minutes. Step 16. Stir or very gently whisk the mixture until smooth and completely combined. Be careful if using a whisk that you aren't too aggressive or air bubbles can form that are difficult to remove.

    Assembly of the Strawberry Brownies

    The last collage shows the strawberry butter cream on the brownie, spread out smoothly, the glaze poured over and the brownies cut.

    Step 17. The amount of buttercream depends upon how much air has been beaten in to lighten it. Step 17. As such, use it all or as much as you like. Turn the brownie out of the pan, remove the paper and frost it upside down. Spread the buttercream in an even layer. Step 19. The glaze should be cool but pourable. Pour it over the buttercream and spread it to the edges. I push mine over to make sure it will be uniformly covered. Step 20. Chill the brownies to set up the glaze and firm the buttercream. I cut them into 16 squares because they are so rich. Cut them as you like. Note: Be sure to serve these at room temperature for the best flavor.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    How do these Strawberry Brownies differ from others?

    Instead of using fresh strawberries or strawberry puree, this brownie is covered with an intense strawberry buttercream which yields a much stronger strawberry flavor.

    What are Strawberry Brownies

    These Strawberry brownies are soft, chewy bar cookies topped with strawberry buttercream and finished with a chocolate glaze, offering a fudgy texture similar to brownies with a bright, fruity taste.

    Can these brownies be frozen?

    Absolutely. Just cut them and freeze them until hard. To help protect the chocolate glaze, wrap them in plastic wrap, then in foil. Freeze for several months. To thaw, remove all of the wrapping and allow to thaw at room temperature.

    Expert Tips

    • Don't over beat the brownie batter after the flour is added.
    • Bake them until a few crumbs remain on the tester.
    • For the best flavor, use semisweet chocolate and not chocolate chips.
    • Heavy cream must be used for the glaze. The finished glaze should be cool but pourable.
    • If you use a whisk to stir the ganache make sure to just stir it and not whisk it or air bubbles can form and they are difficult to get out.
    • If there is strawberry buttercream left over use it to sandwich sugar cookies or top cupcakes.
    • Don't waste pure vanilla here. It won't be noticed in the dense chocolate brownie.
    Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.

    Bars and Brownies Abound

    • Spice bars ready to eat surrounded by spices.
      Spice Bars
    • Rugelach Bars are stacked on a decorative plate.
      Quick Easy Versatile Rugelach Bars
    • Multiple Mexican Chocolate Browines sit on a white lattice tray with more on a white cake stand with a glass of milk in an orange glass.
      Mexican Chocolate Brownies
    • A fudgy brownie on the bottom with a chocolate and butterscotch chip cookie on top.
      Brownie+Cookie=Easy Brookie Recipe

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.

    Strawberry Brownies

    Helen S. Fletcher
    If you love brownies that are a bit different and unexpected, these strawberry brownies deliver. They’re chewy in the middle, lightly crisp on the edges, and packed with real strawberry flavor- thanks to the strawberry buttercream and chocolate glaze
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Course Brownies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16 brownies
    Calories 390 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x9x2" square pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Brownies

    • ⅔ cup natural cocoa (55 grams)
    • ½ cup all-purpose flour (70 grams)
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
    • 3 large eggs
    • ⅔ cup dark brown sugar, packed (130 grams)
    • 1 ⅓ cups powdered sugar (170 grams)
    • ⅔ cup canola or vegetable oil
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Strawberry Buttercream

    • 1.2 ounce pkg. freeze dried strawberries
    • 1 ¾ cup powdered sugar (235 grams)
    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract
    • 3 to 4 tablespoons milk
    • Red food coloring, optional

    Cream Glaze

    • ⅔ cup heavy cream
    • 5 ounces semisweet chocolate (140 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Brownies

    • Preheat the oven to 325°F. Prepare the 9x9x2 inch square baking pan with a parchment paper sling. Spray the paper and the sides of the pan with a non-stick baking release.
    • Sift the cocoa, flour, salt and baking soda together. This is easily done using a strainer. The cocoa often has lumps that are hard to mix into the final batter.
    • Place the eggs, powdered and brown sugars, and the vanilla in a mixing bowl. Beat for about 3 minutes until fluffy and lighter in color.
    • Add the oil, mixing until completely combined.
    • Last, add the flour mixture and beat on low for about 1 minute scraping the sides and bottom of the bowl as needed until completely blended..
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and smooth the top. Bake for about 28 to 32 minutes or until a cake tester comes out with a few moist crumbs stuck to it. Do not over bake. If the side have risen above the middle of the brownie, use a spatula to press them down evenly when they come from the oven. Cool completely.

    Strawberry Buttercream

    • Place about half the freeze dried strawberries and powdered sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Make sure the feed tube has the plunger in place or it is covered. Process until the strawberries and powdered sugar are one with no pieces of strawberries remaining. Empty into a mixing bowl. Repeat with the remaining half of the strawberries and powdered sugar.
    • Place everything in the bowl of a mixer, using 3 tablespoons of milk to start with. Mix on low to bring together, then raise to medium high and beat to lighten it and increase the volume. Add additional milk to make a good spreading consistency. Add the red food coloring if using. Set aside.

    Cream Glaze

    • Heat the cream until steaming but not boiling. Boiling the cream can dull the glaze.
    • Add the chocolate and submerge it below the hot cream. Let it sit for 4 to 5 minutes. Using a spoon or a whisk gently stir the mixture until smooth. If using a whisk, just stir do not whisk aggressively or air bubbles can form and they are difficult to remove. Cool to room temperature. It should still be a heavy liquid and pourable.

    Assembly of the Strawberry Brownies

    • Turn the brownie out onto a baking pad or other flat object. Remove the parchment paper. Leave it upside down.
    • Depending upon how much the buttercream was beaten all of it may be used or just some of it. Use as much as desired. I use a generous amount since I want these to tase on strawberries. Spread the buttercream out in an even layer.
    • Pour the glaze in the center of the buttercream and with an offset spatula, push it out and over the edges of the cake as evenly as possible. Place it in the fridge to set the glaze.
    • When the glaze has set, cut about ¼" off the edges of the brownie so all of the brownies have clean edges with the buttercream showing. Cut the brownies 4 across and 4 down or as desired.
    • At this point, they may be kept at room temperature under a cover for 2 days, in the fridge for 4 or 5 days or frozen hard, wrapped in plastic wrap to help protect the glaze and then in foil. Freeze for about 2 month. To thaw, remove all the covering and thaw at room temperature.
    • Yields: 16 brownies.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________________
    Natural Cocoa is lighter in color, acidic and more intense in flavor as it has not been altered as has Dutch Cocoa. Generally, natural cocoa takes baking soda to counter the acidity. Hershey's, Valrhona, and Ghirardelli all sell natural cocoa.
    Either canola or vegetable oil can be used.
    Whole milk or 2% are interchangeable.
    Dark brown sugar is recommended for increased flavor but light brown can be substituted. 
    McCormick vanilla is fine here. 
    It is important to use freeze dried strawberries for the buttercream. 
    Red food coloring is optional
    Heavy whipping cream is essential to the outcome of the Cream Glaze.
    Don't over beat the brownie batter after the flour is added.
    Bake them until a few crumbs remain on the tester.
    For the best flavor, use semisweet chocolate and not chocolate chips.
    Heavy cream must be used for the glaze. It should be cool but pourable.
    If you use a whisk to stir the ganache make sure to just stir it and not whisk it or air bubbles can form and they are difficult to get out.
    If there is strawberry buttercream left over use it to sandwich sugar cookies or top cupcakes. 
    Don't waste pure vanilla here. It won't be noticed in the dense chocolate brownie.
    Trader Joe's has the 1.2 ounce packages of freeze dried strawberries with the best price I can find.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 16browniesCalories: 390kcalCarbohydrates: 44gProtein: 3gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 62mgSodium: 112mgPotassium: 179mgFiber: 2gSugar: 37gVitamin A: 383IUVitamin C: 26mgCalcium: 36mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Brazilian Cheese Bread Recipe

    Modified: Jan 19, 2025 · Published: Jan 19, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 11 Comments

    Balls of Brazilian Cheese Bread sit in a wicker basket in a white napkiin on a blue background.

    Warm from the oven, Brazilian cheese bread is one of those recipes that feels a little magical the first time you make it and you’ll make on repeat (crispy outside, chewy inside). I love that these small, golden rolls puff up with a crisp shell and a stretchy, cheesy center—no wheat flour required. Made with tapioca flour and real cheese, this Brazilian cheese bread recipe is naturally gluten-free, surprisingly simple, and guaranteed to disappear the moment it hits the table.

    Balls of Brazilian Cheese Bread sit in a wicker basket in a white napkiin on a blue background.

    Whether you know it as pão de queijo or you’re trying it for the first time, this is the kind of bake that turns a regular day into something special. The dough comes together quickly, the aroma is irresistible, and the payoff is that signature chew that makes Brazilian cheese bread unforgettable.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Naturally gluten free

    I like my gluten free recipes to be natural as far as possible and this one fits the bill. Tapioca flour replaces wheat flour in this recipe. Tapioca flour can be found in most grocery stores under the Bob's Red Mill label.

    Infinitely variable

    One of the best things about this recipe is how variable it is. Just changing out the cheese and adding some herbs and seasoning and you have a whole new roll.

    While this is a basic recipe, it can be made into whatever you desire at the moment. For instance for a Southwestern version, use pepper jack cheese, add about ⅛ teaspoon cayenne pepper and ¼ to ½ teaspoon ground cumin. Great with a steaming bowl of chili. For an Italian version, use parmesan and mozzerella cheese and ¼ teaspoon dried oregano, ¼ teaspoon dried basil and ⅛ to ¼ teaspoon garlic powder. These go with anything Italian.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Brazilian Cheese Bread are pepper jack cheese, milk, tapioca flour, salt, oil and egg,

    FRONT ROW: Salt. oil, egg

    BACK ROW: Pepper jack cheese, tapioca flour, milk

    Key Ingredients

    • Any cheese will work. I chose pepper jack to up the taste.
    • Tapioca flour can be found in most grocery stores in the baking aisle.
    • Canola oil, vegetable oil, olive oil are all good choices for the oil.
    • Whole or 2% milk may be used.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below or the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collage shows all but the cheese ingredients in the processor, processed, portioned into the pan and baked.

    Step 1. Place all but the cheese in a food processor, blender. Step 2. Process until smooth, scraping down as needed. Add the shredded cheese and pulse or process until the cheese is incorporated. To make the crispiest rolls, pulse just a few times to simply break up the cheese a little. To make a chewier, less crispy roll, process to incorporate the cheese completely but do not take it so far that the batter thickens. It should be very thin. Step 3. Spray mini muffin pans with a non-stick baking release. Fill the wells to within ⅛" from the top. Step 4. Bake as directed.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Can Brazilian Cheese Bread be Frozen?

    Yes. They can be frozen either unbaked in the pans by adding a few minutes to the baking time or baked, cooled and frozen then reheated in a 350°F oven for a few minutes until warmed.

    Is Brazilian Cheese Bread best warm or room temperature?

    It is good either way. Many people like it warmed, many also like it room temperature.

    Why didn't my cheese bread puff up?

    Like any recipe that depends upon steam to puff (think cream puffs or choux paste) high heat is essential to make that steam and lift that dough. Overmixing can also cause it not to puff,

    Expert Tips

    • Don't over mix the batter. It needs to be liquid when it goes into the wells of the muffin pan.
    • Make sure the oven is set at 400°F. If it is too low, the rolls won't puff up.
    • I prefer to bake off all the rolls at once and freeze what we don't eat. If holding excess batter in the fridge, warm it to bring it back to a liquid state before baking.
    • To make the crispiest rolls, pulse just a few times to simply break up the cheese a little. To make a chewier, less crispy roll, process to incorporate the cheese completely but do not take it so far that the batter thickens. It should be very thin.
    Balls of Brazilian Cheese Bread sit in a wicker basket in a white napkiin on a blue background.

    Looking for more easy rolls?

    • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
    • Different ways to shape the Outback Steakhouse Bread are shown.
      Outback Steakhouse Bread
    • A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.
      Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe
    • A basket lined wth a yellow napkin is filled with Cream Biscuits.
      Cream Biscuits

    Balls of Brazilian Cheese Bread sit in a wicker basket in a white napkiin on a blue background.

    Brazilian Cheese Bread Recipe You’ll Make on Repeat (Crispy Outside, Chewy Inside)

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Warm from the oven, Brazilian cheese bread is one of those recipes that feels a little magical the first time you make it. I love that these small, golden rolls puff up with a crisp shell and a stretchy, cheesy center—no wheat flour required.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 24 rolls
    Calories 60 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mini cupcake pans for 24 rolls
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups tapioca flour ((170 grams)
    • 1 large egg
    • ⅓ cup oil, vegetable, canola, or olive oil
    • ⅔ cup milk
    • ½ teaspoon table salt
    • ½ to 1 cup pepper jack cheese or cheese of choice

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Lightly spray the mini cupcake wells with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Place the tapioca flour, egg, oil, and milk in the bowl of a food processor or blender. Process or blend until smooth, scraping down as necessary
    • Add the shredded cheese and pulse or process until the cheese is incorporated. To make the crispiest rolls, pulse just a few times to simply break up the cheese a little. To make a chewier, less crispy roll, process to incorporate the cheese completely but do not take it so far that the batter thickens. It should be very thin.
    • Fill the wells to within ⅛" from the top. Bake for 15 to 18 minutes until puffed and slightly colored. Serve warm or room temperature.
    • They will keep in a closed tin for several days. They can be frozen either unbaked in the pans by adding a few minutes to the baking time or baked, cooled and frozen then reheated in a 350°F oven for a few minutes until warmed.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    __________________________________________________
    Any cheese will work. I chose pepper jack to up the taste. A couple of cheeses can also be used.  Mozzarella and parmesan are frequently mentioned,
    Tapioca flour can be found in most grocery stores in the baking aisle.
    Canola oil, vegetable oil, olive oil are all good choices for the oil.
    Whole or 2% milk may be used.
    Don't over mix the batter. It needs to be liquid when it goes into the wells of the muffin pan.
    Make sure the oven is set at 400°F. If it is too low, the rolls won't puff up.
    I prefer to bake off all the rolls at once and freeze what we don't eat. If holding excess batter in the fridge, warm it to bring it back to a liquid state before baking.
    To make the crispiest rolls, pulse just a few times to simply break up the cheese a little. To make a chewier, less crispy roll, process to incorporate the cheese completely but do not take it so far that the batter thickens. It should be very thin.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 24rollsCalories: 60kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 0.5gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 0.4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 9mgSodium: 54mgPotassium: 15mgSugar: 0.3gVitamin A: 22IUCalcium: 10mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    A Simple Basic Low-Fat Quiche Recipe

    Modified: Jan 11, 2025 · Published: Jan 12, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 10 Comments

    A slice of the Basic Low Fat Quiche Recipe sits on a white plate with a yellow napkin and fork in the background.

    This Simple Basic Low-Fat Quiche Recipe is the kind of easy, quick, reliable recipe you reach for when you want something flexible and lighter—without sacrificing taste and texture. Made with everyday ingredients and designed to adapt to whatever vegetables, cheese, or protein you have on hand, this simple base turns into a satisfying breakfast, brunch, or dinner with very little time or effort. Once you know the mix, quiche becomes less of a recipe and more of a go-to habit.

    A slice of the Basic Low Fat Quiche Recipe sits on a white plate with a yellow napkin and fork in the background.

    This is another basic recipe that will make meals easy and fast. I've included a Broccoli and Cheddar quiche recipe that is memorable for its tang and gentle heat. No one will ever know it's low fat and you may never use cream again.

    Other savory tarts that are also worth making include: the Goat Cheese Pesto Tart, Torta Rustica - A Savory Italian Pastry and the French Onion Tart.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why low fat is actually more tasty.

    Many years ago, when we made savory items as well as sweet at my bakery, I developed this quiche base as a low fat alternative to the cream. Interestingly, when we tested side-by-side versions of the original quiche filling with cream and this one, we were most surprised. The low fat version had much more taste to it.  It turns out the cream coats the taste buds so whatever cheese, vegetables or meat you have added to your quiche cannot be fully appreciated. With the low fat variety, there is no coating of the taste buds so, consequently, the other flavors are free to come through much stronger.

    To crust or not to crust

    The Broccoli and Cheddar Quiche is a crustless Quiche. In keeping with the low fat version it substitutes low fat cottage cheese and low fat yogurt for the heavy cream. The result is a fast, healthy entrée that just happens to be delicious.

    However, if you want to put it in a crust that is easily done by using the single crust version of my All American Pie Crust. Just make the crust and fully bake it before adding the filling to bake.

    Why you'll love this recipe

    • It's quick and easy to make. A whisk and a bowl will do it in less than 30 minutes minus the baking.
    • The low fat version is even tastier than the full fat cream version.
    • Any vegetable, cheese or protein can be used for the filling.
    • It can be made crustless or with a crust.
    • Making it a couple of days ahead and storing in the fridge or even freezing it makes lunch or dinner a snap.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Basic Low Fat Quiche Recipe and Broccoli Cheddar quiche are brocolli, cheddar cheese, low fat yogurt, cottage, cheese, eggs, cornstarch, salt, pepper, asiago cheese, cheddar cheese, dry mustard, and cayenne pepper,

    FRONT ROW: Canola oil, cornstarch, dry mustard, salt, cayenne pepper and black pepper (the canola oil is not used in this recipe)

    MIDDLE ROW: Eggs, red peppers, asiago cheese, low fat cottage cheese

    BACK ROW: Broccoli, cheddar cheese, low fat yogurt

    Important Ingredients

    • The low fat cottage cheese and low fat yogurt replace the traditional cream and reduce the fat in the original cream based quiche filling.
    • The amount of cheese in the broccoli cheddar quiche can be reduced or low fat cheese can be substituted.
    • Any vegetable, cheese or protein can be substituted for those in the Broccoli Cheddar low fat quiche.
    • While I used Greek yogurt for its tang, any plain low fat yogurt may be used.
    • If the quiche is to be frozen, sweet rice flour or potato starch can be be substituted for the cornstarch which breaks down when thawed.
    • The Sweet Rice flour, which can most easily and inexpensively be found in Asian grocery stores, is simply  ground from short-grain glutinous rice, known in Asian cuisine as  "sticky rice" will not.  The word glutinous refers to thickening power and has no relation to the gluten found in wheat products. Sweet Rice Flour  is gluten free.  
    • Steaming the broccoli instead of boiling it retains more of the vitamins and minerals and keeps it dry.

    Be sure to see the recipe carsd below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collage shows the broccoli steaming, the cottage cheese and yogurt in the bowl of a processor, processed, the remaining quiche ingredients added tot the processor.

    Step 1. Steam the cut up broccoli to retain the vitamins and minerals and keep it dry. Cool it before using. Step 2. Place the yogurt and cottage cheese in the bowl of a processor. Step 3. Process until smooth. Step 4. Add the eggs, cornstarch, dry mustard, cayenne, salt and pepper.

    The last collage shows the filling ingredients for the Broccoli Cheddar Quiche in a bowl, the low fat mixture added, the filling in a pie plate and baked.

    Step 5. Combine the broccoli, cheddar and asiago cheeses as well as the bottled roasted red peppers in a large bowl. Step 6. Pour with low fat quiche mixture over the veggies and stir to completely mix them. Step 7. Spray a pie plate with a non-stick baking release and pour the quiche into the pan. Smooth out if necessary. Bake as directed. Step 8. The baked quiche will puff up slightly and then fall. This is normal. Enjoy hot, room temperature or cold with a crusty bread.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Can this quiche mix be used for crustless quiche?

    Yes. This base works well for both traditional crusted quiche and crustless versions, making it suitable for lower-carb or gluten-free adaptation.

    How is the fat reduced in this basic recipe?

    While most recipes rely on milk, this lower fat, tastier version relies on low fat cottage cheese and low fat yogurt for a better taste experience

    Why is my quiche watery?

    A watery quiche is usually caused by too much moisture from vegetables or an unbalanced egg-to-liquid ratio. If veggies need to be precooked, I recommend steaming them as opposed to putting them in water. They can also be roasted but not charred. Those techniques along with the balanced ratio of eggs and cottage cheese and yogurt will prevent a watery quiche.

    Expert Tips

    • Both the cottage cheese and the yogurt should be plain and low fat.
    • Low fat cheese may be used or some of the cheese reduced to make it even lower fat.
    • Any vegetable, cheese or protein can be used.
    • A crust can be added for a more traditional quiche.
    • This is perfect for a picnic as there is nothing to spoil.
    • A minor change in the thickener and this can be frozen or it can be held in the fridge for 3 or 4 days.
    • This is a base recipe and can be altered. Fresh or dried herbs can be added to compliment any dish that is being made. For instance cumin can be added if making a Mexican or southwestern dish, basil, oregano and garlic for Italian, etc.
    A slice of the Basic Low Fat Quiche Recipe sits on a white plate with a yellow napkin and fork in the background.

    Have a look at these savory dishes

    • A slice of Tourte Milanese sits on a plate exposing its dramatic yellow, green, red and pink layers.
      Tourte Milanese
    • Chicken Pot Pe
      Easy, Elegant Chicken Pot Pie
    • Spanakopita
      Spanakopita - A Spinach Pie from Greece
    • This Mayfair Salad Dressing features, lettuce, swiss cheese and ham strips, croutons and Mayfair dressing.
      Mayfair Salad Dressing - Better than Caesar

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the Basic Low Fat Quiche Recipe sits on a white plate with a yellow napkin and fork in the background.

    A Simple Basic Low-Fat Quiche Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Simple Basic Low-Fat Quiche Recipe is the kind of easy, quick, reliable recipe you reach for when you want something flexible and lighter—without sacrificing taste and texture. Infinitely variable, It's sure to go into your rotation.
    4.67 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 232 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Basic Low Fat Quiche Mix

    • 1 cup low fat yogurt
    • ½ cup low fat cottage cheese
    • 3 large eggs
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch. sweet rice flour or potato starch
    • ½ to 1 teaspoon salt, depending upon other ingredients
    • ¼ to ½ teaspoon black pepper

    Additive Amounts To Make a Quiche

    • 2 to 4 cups vegetables, meat, poultry or seafood
    • 4 to 6 ounces any cheese
    • 1 to 3 tablespoons fresh herbs or mixture (half if using dries), optional

    Broccoli Cheddar Quiche

    • 4 cups broccoli, trimmed closely and cut
    • ½ cup roasted red peppers (jarred is fine)
    • 6 ounces sharp cheddar cheese, grated (170 grams)
    • ½ cup asiago or parmesan cheese, grated (58 grams)
    • Basic Low Fat Quiche Mix above plus
    • ½ teaspoon dry mustard
    • ⅛ teaspoon cayenne pepper

    Instructions
     

    Basic Low Fat Quiche Mix

    • Place the yogurt and cottage cheese in the bowl of a processor. Process until smooth, scraping down as necessary.
    • Add the remainder of the ingredients and process until smooth, scraping down as necessary. The mixture will be very liquid.
    • This is a base recipe and can be altered. Fresh or dried herbs can be added to compliment any dish that is being made. For instance cumin can be added if making a Mexican or southwestern dish, basil, oregano and garlic for Italian, etc.
    • Pour this over the vegetables, cheese and protein if using one that have been mixed in a large bow. Pour into a shallow (not deep dish) pie pan and bake as instructed.

    Broccoli Cheddar Quiche

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray a 9" pie pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Cut the broccoli very close and into small pieces. Steam until just tender but still has some crisp to it.
    • Cut the jarred roasted red peppers into strips or dice it,
    • Place all the ingredients for the broccoli cheddar quiche in a large bowl.
    • Make the Basic Low Fat Quiche Mix adding the dry mustard and cayenne pepper.
    • Pour it over the vegetables and cheese and mix well. Pour it into the prepared pie plate. Smooth it out if necessary
    • Bake for 35 to 40 minutes if using a glass pie pan. If using metal it will take a bit longer. It should be set in the center when done and lightly browned.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _____________________________________________________
    The low fat cottage cheese and low fat yogurt replace the traditional cream and reduce the fat in the original cream based quiche filling.
    The amount of cheese in the broccoli cheddar quiche can be reduced or low fat cheese can be substituted.
    Any vegetable, cheese or protein can be substituted for those in the Broccoli Cheddar low fat quiche.
    This is a base recipe and can be altered. Fresh or dried herbs can be added to compliment any dish that is being made. For instance cumin can be added if making a Mexican or southwestern dish, basil, oregano and garlic for Italian, etc.
    While I used Greek yogurt for its tang, any plain low fat yogurt may be used.
    If the quiche is to be frozen, sweet rice flour or potato starch can be substituted for the cornstarch which breaks down when thawed.
    The Sweet Rice flour, which can most easily and inexpensively be found in Asian grocery stores, is simply  ground from short-grain glutinous rice, known in Asian cuisine as  "sticky rice" will not. The word glutinous refers to thickening power and has no relation to the gluten found in wheat products. Sweet Rice Flour  is gluten free.  
    Steaming the broccoli instead of boiling it retains more of the vitamins and minerals and keeps it dry. 
    A crust can be added for a more traditional quiche.
    This is perfect for a picnic as there is nothing to spoil.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6servingsCalories: 232kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 17gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 127mgSodium: 752mgPotassium: 377mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 918IUVitamin C: 58mgCalcium: 373mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)

    Modified: Jan 5, 2025 · Published: Jan 5, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 29 Comments

    A whole coffee cake muffin sits on a wite plate with a colored mug on the plate and more muffins in the background.

    If you’re looking for soft, tender cinnamon coffee cake muffins, that taste like they came from a bakery case theres no need to look any further. These easy to make from-scratch muffins use only a bowl, a whisk and a few measuring utensils to get the job done with big flavors and a really simple, reliable technique.

    A whole coffee cake muffin sits on a wite plate with a colored mug on the plate and more muffins in the background.

    A streusel topping is mixed with a fork and set aside. Then the cinnamon coffee cake muffins start by mixing the wet ingredients and whisking  them into the dry ingredients.That's it! Portion them into the muffin cups, large or regular size, top them with a generous amount of streusel, patting it down slightly and into the oven they go.  20 to 25 minutes later, you have warm muffins with pockets of melted cinnamon chips that taste just like a coffee cake only easier. No fancy equipment and no complicated techniques that can be whipped up in no time are needed. 

    A few more easy muffins you're sure to enjoy are: Peanut Butter and Jam Muffins, Crunchy Topped Apple Muffins, Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins and Blueberry Crumb Muffins

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    How to get bakery style crowns on your muffins

    Have you ever baked muffins that came out rather flat than with that nicely rounded dome on top? Assuming the recipe is balanced, there is one more thing you can do to ensure that crown. Refrigerate them overnight.

    By portioning out the muffins in their paper liners and refrigerating overnight before baking, they take on a more professional look. The crowns are taller and they have that "just bought from a bakery" look. 

    Chilling the muffin batter overnight allows the starches in the flour to absorb more moisture from the eggs and liquids. This results in the starches swelling allowing more gluten to form, improving the consistency of the batter allowing for higher crowns, and a more moist tender, taller muffin. This will improve any muffin recipe, not just this one.

    Five Reasons to make these coffee cake muffins

    • They're super easy
    • There's no better tasting muffin
    • A bowl, a whisk and a few measuring utensils are all that are needed to make these
    • I'm going to tell you how to get those beautifully domed tops
    • Tender, moist and bakery style in a muffin that comes together quickly.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Cinnamon Streusel Topping

    The cinnamon streusel ingredients are unsalted butter, cinnamon, brown sugar and all-purpose flour.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, cinnamon

    BACK ROW: Brown Sugar, all-purpose flour

    Coffee Cake Muffins

    Ingredients for the Coffee Cake Muffins are brown sugar, canola oil, eggs, buttermilk, sour cream vanilla all-purpose flour, cinnamon, baking powder, baking soda and cinnamon chips.

    FRONT ROW: Baking powder, vanilla, sour cream, baking soda, cinnamon

    MIDDLE ROW: Cinnamon Chips, brown sugar, eggs

    BACK ROW: Canola oil, all-purpose flour, buttermilk

    Main Ingredients

    • While any cinnamon can be used for the most intense flavor my go to is Korintje Cinnamon. It's the one I used at the bakery.
    • Canola oil is my oil of choice but vegetable oil can also be used.
    • Buttermilk, sour cream and oil all contribute to the tenderness of the baked muffins. The cinnamon chips are my latest find. They melt in the muffins leaving extra brusts of flavor. They can be used anywhere cinnamon is used. Hershey's makes the cinnamon baking chips.
    • For maximum flavor dark brown sugar is used, but light brown will work also.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Cinnamon Streusel

    This  collage shows the dry ingredients for the streusel in a bowl, mixed with a fork, the butter added and the finished cinnamon streusel.

    Step 1. Combine the dry ingredients in a medium size bowl. Step 2. Mix with a fork until uniformly blended. Step 3. Add most of the butter but withhold a couple of tablespoons. Step 4. Toss with a fork until the dry ingredients are fully coated and crumbs form. Add more butter a bit at a time if needed. Refrigerate until needed.

    Coffee Cake Muffins

    This collage shows the dry ingredients for the muffins in a bowl and, whisked together, liquid ingredients are placed in a large bowl and whisked together.

    Step 5. Combine the flour, cinnamon, baking powder and baking soda in a bowl. Step 6. Whisk them together and set aside. Step 7. Place the eggs, buttermilk, sour cream, vanilla, and oil in a large bowl. Step 8. Whisk together until smooth.

    This collage shows the brown sugar being added to the liquid ingredients, whisked in, the flour being add and whisked in to make a thick batter.

    Step 9. Add the brown sugar to the liquid ingredients. Step 10. Whisk the brown sugar in. Step 11. Add the flour mixture and Step 12. Whisk it in to make a thick batter.

    The last collages shows the cinnamon chips being added to the batter, then stirred in, the muffins in paper lined muffin wells and finally baked.

    Step 13. Add the cinnamon chips to the batter. Step 14. Stir them in with a spoon. They'll be caught in the whisk. Step 15. Fill either the regular or jumbo size of paper lined muffin wells ¾ full. Top generously with the cinnamon streusel. Pat it down gently to make sure it sticks. Do not push it into the muffin, Step 16. The baked muffins.

    Recipe FAQ's

    What is the difference between coffee cakes and muffins

    Coffee cake is typically baked in a pan and served in slices, while muffins are individually portioned and baked in a muffin tin. Cinnamon coffee cake muffins often use the same tender, cinnamon-flavored batter and streusel topping as classic coffee cake, but bake faster and are easier to serve.

    How to keep the Streusel from sinking into the muffin

    To prevent the streusel from sinking, make sure the batter is thick enough to support the topping and add the streusel just before baking. Pressing it lightly onto the batter helps it stay on top as the muffins rise.

    Why did my coffee cake muffins turn out dry?

    It could be several things. If the recipe isn't balanced - too much flour to little liquid - they will be dry or they can be over baked. Another reason is the recipe is correct but the flour was measured in cups. The weight of flour measured by cups can be more or less than what is required depending upon how it got into the cup. The best way to measure ingredients for any baking is to use a scale. The weight will always be the same. Volume can differ. Next, always short time the baking by a few minutes in case the oven temperature isn't correct. Time can always be added but it can't be subtracted. Last, It can be difficult to see how the muffin is browning under brown crumbs so use a cake tester. It should be clean when it comes out.

    Storage and Freezing

    The muffins can and should be held, unbaked, in their paper cups in the fridge overnight which makes a perfect breakfast or brunch treat.

    The muffins can be baked and frozen then wrapped well for several months. They can be thawed at room temperature and then warmed in a 350°F oven for 10 15 minutes.

    These muffins will last several days at room temperature if covered.

    Expert Tips

    • The muffins can be and should be held, unbaked, in their muffin tins overnight which makes them perfect for warm, freshly baked treats for breakfast.
    • By using a whisk instead of a mixer, you ensure they muffins will not be over mixed which is crucial to a tender muffin.
    • Canola oil is recommended but vegetable oil can also be used.
    • Because there is brown sugar and buttermilk in the recipe baking soda needs to be present as well as baking powder. It will neutralize the acid in those ingredients.
    An open muffin on a white plate with muffins in the background.

    Other Quick Recipes You'll Love

    • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
    • Four finishes on the Carrot Cake Dougnuts are plain, pecan topped, sugared and filled with cream cheese.
      Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts
    • A basket lined wth a yellow napkin is filled with Cream Biscuits.
      Cream Biscuits
    • Breakfast Scone
      Breakfast Scones - An Easy Morning Treat

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A whole coffee cake muffin sits on a wite plate with a colored mug on the plate and more muffins in the background.

    Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)

    Helen S. Fletcher
    If you’re looking for soft, tender cinnamon coffee cake muffins, that taste like they came from a bakery case theres no need to look any further.  These easy to make from-scratch muffins use only a bowl, a whisk and a few measuring utensils to get the job done with big flavors and a really simple, reliable technique.
    4.86 from 7 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Muffins
    Cuisine American
    Servings 14 muffins
    Calories 302 kcal

    Equipment

    • 2 regular size muffin tin
    • OR
    • 2 Jumbo size muffin tins
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Cinnamon Streusel Topping

    • ¾ cup all-purpose flour (105 grams)
    • ⅓ cup dark brown sugar (65 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons cinnamon
    • 5 to 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (90 grams)

    Coffee Cake Muffin Batter

    • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ cup canola or vegetable oil
    • 2 large eggs
    • ½ cup buttermilk
    • ¼ cup sour cream (55 grams)
    • 1 cup dark brown sugar (200 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla
    • ½ cup cinnamon baking chips, optional

    Instructions
     

    Cinnamon Streusel

    • Place the flour, brown sugar and cinnamon in a bowl. Stir with a fork to combine.
    • Add all but 2 tablespoons of the melted butter and toss with a fork to form crumbs. If the mixture is dry and not forming good crumbs, add additional butter a little at a time until the form. Refrigerate until needed.

    Coffee Cake Batter

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F if baking immediately. Line the wells of 14 regular size muffin tins with paper cups or 7 Jumbo wells. If you only have one pan, hold the extra batter in the fridge and bake it after the first pan is finished and the muffins are removed to cool. Set aside.
    • Whisk the flour, cinnamon, banking powder, and baking soda together in a medium size bowl and set aside.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the oil, eggs, buttermilk, sour cream and vanilla.
    • Whisk in the brown sugar until smooth..
    • Mix in the flour mixture. The batter will be very thick. Stir in the cinnamon baking chips.
    • Fill either of the cups ¾ full and generously top with the cinnamon streusel. Pat the streusel down gently but do not push it into the muffin. Either bake immediately or for a better looking muffin, refrigerate overnight. Preheat the oven to 375°F.
    • Bake the smaller muffins for about 20 minutes. Bake the larger muffins about 25 minutes. A tester should come out clean when inserted. If the muffins went into the oven cold, they may need a few more minutes.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ____________________________________________
    The muffins can and should be held, unbaked, in their muffin tins overnight which makes them perfect for warm, freshly baked treats for breakfast.
    By using a whisk instead of a mixer, you ensure they muffins will not be over mixed which is crucial to a tender muffin. 
    Canola oil is recommended but vegetable oil can also be used.
    Because there is brown sugar and buttermilk in the recipe baking soda needs to be present as well as baking powder. It will neutralize the acid in those ingredients.
    Light brown sugar can be substitute for the dark. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 14muffinsCalories: 302kcalCarbohydrates: 41gProtein: 4gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 41mgSodium: 127mgPotassium: 85mgFiber: 1gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 205IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 78mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Easy Cheesy Sausage Balls Recipe

    Modified: Dec 28, 2024 · Published: Dec 28, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 3 Comments

    A white serving dish holds the Easy Cheesy Sausage Balls and dthe Apricot dipping sauce.

    Classic Southern Sausage Balls are a simple, make-ahead appetizer made with sausage, cheese, and a few pantry ingredients. This easy version comes together in minutes and bakes up soft and cheesy with a lightly crisp exterior. They’re ideal for parties, holidays, or breakfast because they reheat well and can be prepared ahead of time without losing flavor or texture. While most recipes call for Bisquick, I have modified this recipe so there's no need to buy it. This is perfect for a no stress New Years Eve appetizer.

    A white serving dish holds the Easy Cheesy Sausage Balls and dthe Apricot dipping sauce.

    These sausage balls can be mixed, shaped, and baked with flexibility in mind, making them ideal for busy days and full schedules. They reheat beautifully and taste just as good warm from the oven as they do later. The apricot dipping sauce is the perfect finish.

    Here are a few other recipes that are easy to make for the holidays: Puff Pastry Crackers, Hot Curried Party Mix, Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads, and the Hot Peppered Pecans.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You and your guests will love this

    • It's super easy.
    • The few ingredients are easy to find.
    • If it's tasty your after, this is it.
    • The sausage balls can be made ahead and reheated or frozen and baked.
    • New Year's Eve is coming up and you haven't figured out what to serve yet.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the sausage balls include, all-purpose flour, sausage, sharp cheddar cheese, milk, salt and baking powder.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, milk, baking powder

    MIDDLE ROW: Sharp cheddar cheese

    BACK ROW: All-Purpose Flour, sausage

    Apricot Dipping Sauce

    Ingredients for the apricot dipping sauce are apricot jam, dijon and red wine vinegar.

    FRONT ROW: Dijon mustard, red wine vinegar

    BACK ROW: Apricot Jam

    Key Ingredients

    • The sausage can be mild, medium or hot depending upon your taste.
    • Cheddar cheese is the most used cheese but others can be substituted if desired.
    • The flour, salt and baking powder are the key ingredients in Bisquick so they are used instead.
    • Milk add moisture to the sausage balls.
    • Red wine vinegar is used to sharpen the dipping sauce. White wine vinegar may be substituted.

    Be sure to see the recipe carf below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collages for the Sausage Balls shows the sausage broken up over the dry ingredients, then mixed, the cheese added and the whole mixed.

    Step 1. Combine the flour, salt and baking powder in the bowl of a mixer. Mix briefly to combine. Break up the sausage over the dry ingredients. Step 2. Mix the ingredients on low to start, then on medium until it comes together. Step 3. Add the shredded cheese. Step 4. Mix on medium until it is completely blended.

    This collage shows the rolled balls on a sheet pan, the apricot jam in a processor, the other ingredients added and processed and the baked sausage balls on on a sheet pan cooling.

    Step 5. Roll walnut size pieces of the mixture into smooth balls. Double pan bake as called for. Step 6. Add the apricot jam or preserved to the food processor. Add the dijon and red wine vinegar and process to until smooth, scraping down as necessary. Step 8. The baked balls are cooling on a rack.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Why is Bisquick used for sausage balls?

    Bisquick was the original binder for sausage balls. It helps hold the sausage and cheese together to form the balls.

    What can you use instead of Bisquick?

    1 cup all-purpose flour, 1 teaspoon baking powder and ½ teaspoon salt makes about a cup and replaces the Bisquick called for in sausage balls.

    What kind of dipping sauces are good with sausage balls?

    Sweet and sour sauces are especially good - think honey, maple syrup, jams or preserves, anything with mustard or something with a hot sauce like sriracha  in it.

    Freezer and Storage Instructions

    These balls can be baked and frozen or frozen unbaked. If baked and frozen, place them on a baking sheet and put them in a 350°F oven to thaw and heat them.

    If baking when they are unbaked, just add a few minutes to the time given to bake them.

    They should always be served warm to hot.

    Thjs photo is a close-up of the sausage balls and apricot dipping sauce.

    More delectable savory dishes to consider

    • Three Appetizers for an Instant Party
    • A slice of the French Onion Tart showing the tomatoes and olives in the yeasted crust with a sprig of basil.
      French Onion Tart
    • Brie and Bacon Tart
      Brie and Bacon Tart
    • Beef Strogonoff Soup
      Beef Stroganoff Soup with Wine and Cheese Bread

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A white serving dish holds the Easy Cheesy Sausage Balls and dthe Apricot dipping sauce.

    Easy Cheesy Sausage Balls Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Classic Southern Sausage Balls are a simple, make-ahead appetizer made with sausage, cheese, and a few pantry ingredients. This easy version comes together in minutes and bakes up soft and cheesy with a lightly crisp exterior. These are perfect for a no-stress New Years Eve appetizer.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 30 balls
    Calories 81 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Sausage Balls

    • 8 ounces sharp cheddar cheese
    • ¾ cup all-purpose flour (105 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ pound sausage
    • 3 tablespoons milk, whole or 2%

    Apricot Dipping Sauce

    • ¾ cup apricot preserves or jam
    • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
    • 3 tablespoons red wine vinegar

    Instructions
     

    Sausage Balls

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a sheet pan with parchment and set aside.
    • Shred the cheese and set aside.
    • Place the flour, baking powder and salt in the bowl of a mixer. Mix briefly to combine.
    • Tear the sausage into pieces and add to the dry mxi. Beat on low, then raise to medium to combine.
    • Add the cheese and mix completely.
    • Add the milk and mix until all is blended.
    • Tear off walnut size pieces and roll them into smooth balls. Place them on a sheet pan about an inch apart.
    • Double pan and bake for 20 to 25 minutes until golden brown and baked through. Drain on paper towels and place in a serving dish with apricot dip .
    • These balls can be baked and frozen or frozen unbaked. If baked and frozen, place them on a baking sheet and put them in a 350°F oven to thaw and heat them.
      If baking when they are unbaked, just add a few minutes to the time given to bake them.
      They should always be served warm to hot.
    • This makes about 30 sausage balls. They can be made smaller for one bite sausage balls. Be sure to reduce the time somewhat.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    __________________________________________________
    The sausage can be mild, medium or hot depending upon your taste.
    Cheddar cheese is the most used cheese but others can be substituted if desired. 
    The flour, salt and baking powder are the key ingredients in Bisquick so they are used instead.
    Milk adds moisture to the sausage balls.
    Red wine vinegar is used to sharpen the dipping sauce. White wine vinegar may be substituted.
    Be sure to double pan the sausage balls when baking so the bottoms won't burn. 
     
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 30ballsCalories: 81kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 3gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 13mgSodium: 159mgPotassium: 36mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 96IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 66mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Short on Time? 6 Easy Recipes Ready in 30 Minutes or Less for Sharing or Gifting

    Modified: Dec 21, 2024 · Published: Dec 22, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    Hot Curried Party Mix

    We’ve all been there—you suddenly need something to bring, share, or gift, and the clock is not on your side. The good news? A thoughtful, homemade recipe doesn’t have to take all afternoon. These five last-minute recipes are quick, dependable, and designed to look (and taste) like you planned ahead—even if you didn’t.

    Hot Curried Party Mix
    TJ's Cowboy Bark
    Nothing can be easier than melting chocolate and covering it with almost anything you wish that can be sprinkled on top. Chill it, break it into pieces and that's it!
    Check out this recipe
    TJ's Cowboy Bark for Holiday Food Gifts
    Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads for Holiday Food Gifts
    Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
    While shortbreads are usually thought of as sweet, these Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads are definitely on the savory, snacky side. But I must warn you, these are absolutely, positively addictive. There is no way to eat just one – hence the large number it makes!
    Check out this recipe
    Hot Curried Party Mix
    The greatest thing about these is how easy they are to prepare. Be sure to make this Hot Curried Party Mix a minimum of one day ahead – several days are better. Stored in an airtight container, this will last a month, if you can keep out of it.
    Check out this recipe
    Hot Curried Party Mix
    Hot Peppered Pecans
    Hot Peppered Pecans
    These pecans are a standout. Heat Alert -  they are hot!!  So if you don't favor a lot of heat, tone down all the pepper and the hot pepper sauce. Start with half and go from there. These Hot Peppered Pecans make great gifts to send home with your guests.  Choose little containers or put them cellophane bags and tie with decorative ribbons. They are also great on a cheese tray, crumbled in a salad or included in any recipe calling for pecans, including sweet ones.
    Check out this recipe
    Granola
    Granola!  What could be better first thing in the morning than oats, sunflower seeds, almonds, raisins, dates and sesame seed all bound together in a honey glaze? It’s ridiculously simple and, as an added bonus, it’s good for you!! 
    Check out this recipe
    A canister of Granola along with a bowl of granola and orange juice are featured in this photo.
    Puff Pastry Crackers
    Puff Pastry Crackers
    These Puff Pastry crackers will keep a few days in an airtight container. However, they are so easy to make ahead, there is no need. Just top them, cut and freeze. Bake from the frozen state in a matter of minutes, and you'll have everyone thinking you are a genie in the kitchen!
    Check out this recipe

    7 Stunning Last-Minute Christmas Desserts That Taste Like You Planned for Weeks

    Modified: Dec 18, 2024 · Published: Dec 19, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    An individual Italian Tiramasu sits on a beige and silver rimmed plate with anoher in the background.

    Forgot to plan a dessert for the big day? Don't panic! These elegant and decadent recipes are surprisingly simple, with many no-bake or make-ahead options that will fool everyone into thinking you've been planning for weeks. All of these can be made ahead.

    An individual Italian Tiramasu sits on a beige and silver rimmed plate with anoher in the background.
    Individual Italian Tiramasu
    This Individual Italian Tiramisu is not to be missed. It's the same one we serve at the restaurant and I have made thousands of these since I put them in the dessert line. This is the perfect dessert to finish out the holidays or the year. It's extravagant and beautiful but most importantly you'll savor every bite of the light as air filling and the intense coffee rum sponge.
    Check out this recipe
    An individual Italian Tiramasu sits on a beige and silver rimmed plate with anoher in the background.
    A slice of the White Chocolate Mocha Cheesecake sits on a beige and sliver rimmed plate with a cup and a napkin in the background.
    White Chocolate Mocha Cheesecake
    This indulgent White Chocolate Mocha Cheesecake is exceptional.  White chocolate, coffee and an ingredient no one will guess impart a creamy luxuriousness with a flavor that lingers after the last bite. 
    Check out this recipe
    No Bake Mini Chocoalte Caramel Tarts
    These easy, No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Truffle Tarts  consists of a chocolate press in crumb crust, homemade caramel and the same truffle filling used in our Chocolate Chocolate Truffles so popular at the bakery. These six tarts can also be made ahead.
    Check out this recipe
    A Mini Chocolate Caramel Truffle Tart is surrounded by red raspberries with more tarts in the background.
    Macadamia and Coconut Tart
    This amazing No Bake Macadamia and Coconut Tart came about as the result of the chocolate truffle craze in the late 1980's. They were everywhere and we couldn't get enough of them. My bakery fell right in step with everyone else. So much so that I was asked to create a line of chocolate truffles for a client. This white chocolate macadamia truffle was one of them. For the bakery, I simply turned it into a tart.
    Check out this recipe
    Amaretto Truffle Tart
    As sleek a dessert as you will it consists of a fudgey chocolate cake layer, spread with toasted hazelnuts or almonds, covered with a thick layer of caramel and toped with an Amaretto Truffle.
    Check out this recipe
    Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.
    Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse
    Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse is an amazing combination of three nutted meringue discs filled with a raspberry mousse that is enhanced with mascarpone. Made into individual desserts (who doesn't like their own dessert?) these stunning offerings are easy to make and easier to eat.
    Check out this recipe
    Non-Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding
    If you're looking for a low stress quickly made holiday dessert this Non Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding is not to be missed. While often thought of as overwhelmingly sweet, this one is not. The easily made individual sponge cakes are rich, moist, served warm with one of two sauces - traditional Toffee Sauce or a Lemon Rum sauce for a change.
    Check out this recipe
    An individual Sticky Toffee Pudding sits in a puddle of Lemon Sauce in a yellow and white bowl.

    Irresistible White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies

    Modified: Dec 16, 2024 · Published: Dec 17, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 1 Comment

    A tray of White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies finished 4 different wasys its on a gray plate rimmed in gold.

    There’s something quietly luxurious about these irresistible White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies. The creamy sweetness of white chocolate paired with buttery, toasted pistachios creates a cookie that feels special without being fussy. These cookies are just as welcome on a holiday cookie tray as they are with an afternoon cup of coffee.

    A tray of White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies finished 4 different wasys its on a gray plate rimmed in gold.

    Four different finishes are included from a simple dusting of powdered sugar to coating in white chocolate and leaving them plain or dipping them in toasted pistachios or finishing with a single whole pistachio. Your choice.

    Other cookies for your enjoyment include: Almond Macaroons, Chocolate Spice Olive Oil Biscotti, Chocolate Dipped Sweet and Salty Butter Cookies and the Neapolitan Butter Cookies.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why These Should Be on Your Cookie List

    • These are really fast and easy to make.
    • Dusting them with powdered sugar alone makes these just pistachio cookies.
    • Finishing them by dipping in white chocolate makes these truly irresistible.
    • While the dipping takes a little time, it is easy to do and adds so much to the cookie.
    • These aren't your usual Christmas cookie. They'll add a lot to your cookie tray or exchange.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies are cake flour, pistachios, powdered sugar, unsalted butter, vanilla and almond extracts.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla and almond extracts

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, pistachio nuts, powdered sugar

    Finishing the Cookies

    Finishes for the cookies inclue, istacho nuts, powdered sugar, white chocolate and shortening.

    FRONT ROW: Shortening, white chocolate

    BACK ROW: Whole pistachios, powdered sugar, chopped pistachios

    Key Ingredients

    • It is important to toast the pistachios to bring out the maximum flavor.
    • The nuts are chopped two different ways - more coarsely for the cookie and finer for the finish.
    • Cake flour will give the best texture to the cookie. It is a softer flour and provides a melt a melt in your mouth experience more so than all-purpose. If you have to use all-purpose flour, you will need to use 1 ¾ cup instead of 2 cups of cake flour but the weight remains the same.
    • Powdered sugar is often used in European cookies and also contributes to a cookie that melts in your mouth.
    • I know there are some who eschew using shortening (read Crisco) to solidify the chocolate at room temperature but there is very little and it is the only thing I know of that will make the chocolate solid at room temperature. Butter and oil will not harden. Coconut oil has been suggested but it can get crackling hard.

    Variations

    • Lemon or orange zest can be added to the cookie.
    • Other nuts can be used instead of the pistachios. But be sure to toast the nuts first.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collages shows the pistachios coarsely chopped, the butter, powdered sugar, vanilla and almond extracts in a mixing bowl, mixed and the flour added.

    Step 1. Coarsely chop the toasted pistachios into medium size pieces. See my post, Chopping Nuts A Quicker Way, for the easiest way to do this. Step 2. Place the softened butter, powdered sugar, vanilla and almond extracts in the bowl of a mixer. Step 3. Beat until almost white, scraping down as necessary. Step 4. Add the flour.

    This collage shows the dough about ¾ mixed, the pistachios added, the dough finished and the cookies dropped and then rolled into balls on a tray.

    Step 5. Beat on medium until the mixture is about ¾ combined. Step 6. Add the pistachios. By adding them now it is easier for them to get them evenly distributed. Step 7. Finish mixing everything until it is completely combined. Step 8. Using a #70 disher/scooper or a 1 tablespoon measure, drop the cookies. Finish them by rolling them into smooth balls.

    This collages shows the finely cut pistachios, the white chocolate and shortening in the top of a double boiler then melted together and a cookie dipped in the white chocolate.

    Step 9. For dipping the cookies into the nuts, the nuts have to be finely chopped. While I don't usually use the processor for chopping nuts, I do in this case. Pulse the toasted nuts until they are finely chopped. They will not be uniform, so when some are, I put all of the nuts through a sieve and then pick out the larger ones and return them to the processor for more pulsing. I always sieve them to make sure the dust of the nuts doesn't impede the sharp look of the dipped cookies. Place them in a small bowl but one that a cookie will comfortably fit in. If they are too spread out, the nuts won't be deep enough to coat the cookie well. Step 10. Place the white chocolate in the top of a double boiler. Here I have made one by placing a heatproof bowl over a pan. Step 11. Bring the water underneath to a simmer. Do not boil. Keep it at a simmer while the chocolate and shortening melt. Stir together. Do not whisk as you may get air bubbles. Step 12. Keep the double boiler intact and pick up a cookie. Dip it upside down in the chocolate right up to the bottom edge. Let the excess drip back and very lightly remove any extra by scraping it gently over the edge of the bowl. Place it on a parchment lined baking sheet right side up. By keeping the chocolate over the double boiler it doesn't get cold and thicken up as quickly.

    The last collages shows a chocolate dipped cookie in a bowl of finely cut pistachios, placed on parchment, another one dipped cookie with a whole nut on top and last the cookies sprinkled with powdered sugar.

    Step 13. Here the dipped cookie is immediately put into the bowl of finely chopped pistachios up to the bottom edge. Step 14. Place it on parchment paper right side up. Step 15. Another way to finish the cookie is to dip it, place it on parchment and immediately place a half or whole pistachio on top. Step 16. The last way is to sprinkle them heavily with powdered sugar but these will not have the white chocolate on them.

    All of the dipped cookies can be place in the fridge to firm up. They will remain firm at room temperature or in a tin.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Where do pistachio nuts originate?

    Central and Western Asia where they were considered a delicacy They came to the U.S in the 1900's and California now dominates American production with Arizona and New Mexico following. They thrive in arid, hot climates.

    What is another recipe that uses pistachios?

    A popular dessert in Turkey as well as Middle eastern and Mediterranean cuisines is Baklava made with pistachios instead of walnuts. It also uses a simple syrup or honey syrup to soak in.

    What is white chocolate made from:

    White chocolate contains cocoa butter, sugar, and milk solids, but no cocoa solids. It is made from the fat of the cocoa bean (cocoa butter) mixed with dairy and sweeteners, often with added vanilla and soy lecithin. According to the FDA, it must contain at least 20% cocoa butter and 14% milk solids. 

    Expert Tips

    • Always toast the pistachios to bring out more flavor. Since I toast all of my nuts, I often will toast a 1 or 2 pound package, cool them, repackage and freeze them so they are ready when I am. At the bakery we would toast 30 pounds at a time and freeze them. It makes baking much easier.
    • White chocolate can seize or burn quite quickly which is why I prefer to melt it over a double boiler and barely simmering water. I have burned too much melting it in the microwave.
    • Cake flour is used for its low gluten content leading to a cookie that melts in your mouth.
    • When coating cookies or candy as in the recipe, keep the double boiler intact as you dip. The hot water underneath delays the cooling of the chocolate making it easier to get them dipped. If it gets too thick, simply rewarm.
    A tray of the variously finished cookies on a gray plate rimmed in gold.

    A Few More European Cookies

    • White, star shaped cinnamon Zimtsterne cookies are flowing fro a container surounded by holiday ornaments.
      Zimtsterne - German Cinnamon Stars
    • Rugelach Bars are stacked on a decorative plate.
      Quick Easy Versatile Rugelach Bars
    • A bunch of French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, on a plate. They are rectangular cookies with holes throughout them and have browned edges
      French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre
    • Bajadera - No Bake Cookie Bars are layered hazelnut bars topped with chocolate.
      Bajadera - A No Bake Cookie Bar

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A tray of White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies finished 4 different wasys its on a gray plate rimmed in gold.

    Irresistible White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies From Scratch

    Helen S. Fletcher
    There’s something quietly luxurious about these irresistible White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies. The creamy sweetness of white chocolate paired with buttery, toasted pistachios creates a cookie that feels special without being fussy.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 50 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Cooies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 45 cookies
    Calories 141 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies

    • ¾ cup toasted pistachio nuts (85 grams)
    • 1 cup unsalted butter (225 grams or 2 sticks)
    • ½ cup powdered sugar (65 grams)
    • 2 cups cake flour* (250 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract
    • *if substituting all-purpose flour (which I don't recommend) use 1 ¾ cups but the weight remains the same.

    Finishing Ingredients - if dipping all of them or finishing all the same kind

    • 12 ounces white chocolate (340 grams)
    • 2 ½ tablespoons shortening such as Crisco
    • 6 ounces finely chopped toasted pistachios (170 grams)
    • 45 whole or half toasted pistachos

    Instructions
     

    White Chocolate Pistachio Cookie

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line several baking sheets with parchment paper. Set aside.
    • Place the pistachios on a rimmed baking sheet and toast all of them at once until they are fragrant and somewhat browned, about 7 to 9 minutes. Cool completely.
    • Coarsely chop ¾ cup or 85 grams for the cookies. To easily do this see my post, Chopping Nuts a Quicker Way. Set aside.
    • Combine the butter, powdered sugar, vanilla and almond extracts in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until the mixture is almost white, scraping down the sides of the bowl as needed.
    • Add the flour and mix to about ¾ done. Add the pistachios and finish mixing until everything is evenly combined. If the dough is too soft to scoop, chill it to firm it up. Don't leave it in the fridge too long or it will be too hard to scoop the cookies.
    • Using a #70 disher/scooper drop the cookies on the prepared baking sheets and then roll them into smooth balls. Place them 2" apart. A tablespoon of dough may also be used.
    • Bake for 7 minutes, turn the sheet and bake for 7 to 8 more minutes. Cool completely.

    Finishing the White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies

    • To coat all of the cookies in finely chopped nuts, place the toasted nuts in the bowl of a processor. Pulse to chop them finely. They will not all be chopped to the same degree, so pour them into a sieve and remove the nut dust. Pick out the larger nuts and re-pulse them. Repeat until they are uniformly finely chopped. Place them in a bowl that is large enough to coat one cookie at a time. You want to create depth so the cookie can be be coated right up the bottom when held upside down. Set aside.
    • Place the chopped up white chocolate and shortening in the top of a double boiler or fashion one out of a bowl that fits on top of a saucepan. A tapered bowl is perfect here because the chocolate should be as deep as possible and not spread out or it will be difficult to dip them properly.
    • Add water to the saucepan but do not let it touch the bottom of the bowl.
    • Bring the water to a bare simmer and keep it there. Heat the chocolate and shortening until it is melted, stirring often. Do not use a whisk as you risk air bubbles.
    • While the chocolate melts, line a couple of baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
    • Keeping the double boiler intact, turn a cookie upside down and dip it in the chocolate all the way to the bottom. Allow the excess to drip back into the bowl. Very lightly, scrape the remaining excess, on the side of the bowl without removing all of the chocolate.
    • If finishing with the finely chopped pistachios, dip the cookie immediately into the nuts right after dipping it into the chocolate and place it on the baking sheet.
    • If finishing with the pistachio half or whole, apply it immediately after dipping the cookie and placing it on the baking sheet.
    • To speed up the setting of the chocolate, refrigerate for 10 to 15 minutes. They will stay set up at room temperature or in a tin after they are set.
    • If using the powdered sugar finish, the cookies will not be dipped. Simply line them up on a baking sheet and sift powdered sugar heavily over the. They will not have white chocolate on them.
    • Kept in an airtight tin with paper between them, they will last for a week or so.
    • To make ahead, roll the balls of dough, freeze them and bake from the frozen stage, adding a couple of extra minutes. Finish as desired.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ____________________________________________________
    It is important to toast the pistachios to bring out the maximum flavor. Since I toast all of my nuts, I often will toast a 1 or 2 pound package, cool them, repackage and freeze them so they are ready when I am. At the bakery we would toast 30 pounds at a time and freeze them. It makes baking much easier.
    The nuts are chopped two different ways - more coarsely for the cookie and finer for the finish.
    Cake flour will give the best texture to the cookie. It is a softer flour and provides a melt a melt in your mouth experience more so than all purpose. If you have to use all-purpose flour, you will need to use 1 ¾ cup instead of 2 cups of cake flour but the weight remains the same. 
    Powdered sugar is often used in European cookies and also contributes to a cookie that melts in your mouth.
    I know there are some who eschew using shortening (read Crisco) to solidify the chocolate at room temperature but there is very little and it is the only thing I know of that will make the chocolate solid at room temperature. Butter and oil will not harden. Coconut oil has been suggested but it can get crackling hard.
    White chocolate can seize or burn quite quickly which is why I prefer to melt it over a double boiler and barely simmering water. I have burned too much melting it in the microwave.
    When coating cookies or candy as in the recipe, keep the double boiler intact as you dip. The hot water underneath delays the cooling of the chocolate making it easier to get them dipped. If it gets too thick, simply rewarm.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 45cookiesCalories: 141kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 2gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 12mgSodium: 8mgPotassium: 88mgFiber: 1gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 153IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 23mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Make Ahead Christmas Morning Bakes for a Stress-Free Holiday

    Modified: Dec 15, 2024 · Published: Dec 15, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A slice of Easier Danish Pastry sits on a silver server.

    Imagine waking up on Christmas morning to the smell of sweet rolls baking, without any of the stress. These recipes for breads, rolls, and coffee cakes can be prepped in advance, so you can spend less time in the kitchen and more time making memories.

    A slice of Easier Danish Pastry sits on a silver server.
    Easier Danish Pastry Recipe
    This Easier "Danish Pastry" Recipe replaces the traditional laminated Danish pastry with my really easy 60 Second Brioche coupling it with the Viennese Braid technique which is equally easy to make. It's packed with flavor, perfectly balanced and indulgent.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of Easier Danish Pastry sits on a silver server.
    A Swedish Cardamom Knot sits on a blue and white plate
    Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls
    These Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls have so much going for them.  Known as Kardemummabullar, the dough is easy to make in the processor or mixer and interestingly has no eggs.  It is wonderfully soft and really easy to roll out. 
    Check out this recipe
    Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe
    These really are the Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe. Why? Because I've added a Cinnamon Crunch topping (think Cinnamon Crunch Bagels) which takes this way over the top!
    Check out this recipe
    A Cinnamon Crunch rolls sits on an antique plate rimmed in pink and gray with more rolls in the background.
    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli
    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli - what's not to love about a fantastic, easy to make bread enclosing, scrambled eggs, bacon, hash browns, 2 cheeses and red peppers? I sure don't know. It bakes up perfectly and cuts into beautiful slices with the filling intact.
    Check out this recipe
    Cuccidati Coffeecake
    This coffecake came about because of my love of the Italian Cookie of the same name. The same filling that goes into that marvelous cookie is used as the filling here.
    Check out this recipe
    Cuccidati Coffeecake
    Four Hot Cross Buns sit on an Irish plate with a white background and decorated with little bees and flies.
    Hot Cross Buns Revisited
    I kmow Hot Cross Buns are a treat associated with Lent and Easter although I make them all year long because they are so good. These buns are packed with flavor from the cinnamon, cloves and nutmeg as well as currants and a bit of molasses that deepens the flavor of the already spectacular buns.
    Check out this recipe
    Lemon Sugar Buns
    These Lemon Sugar Buns are just the treat for a busy holiday morning. An enriched European type yeast dough is flavored with lemon zest and takes minutes to make.
    Check out this recipe
    A single Lemon Sugar Bun sits on a white laced edged plate with a platter of more buns in the background.

    Bake and Share Holiday Treats for Gifts

    Modified: Dec 12, 2024 · Published: Dec 12, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    Two chocolate truffles on a silver serving dish.

    There's no gift more heartfelt than a homemade one. My collection of cookies, candies, and truffles is perfect for packaging up and sharing with friends, family, and neighbors. They travel well and taste like pure holiday magic!

    Two chocolate truffles on a silver serving dish.
    Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee
    Candy has the bad rap of being difficult to make. It often requires a thermometer that registers 350°F but it isn't that difficult and no one will believe you made it. Think Heath bars or brickle.
    Check out this recipe
    Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee in a gold candy box with a star shaped pink ornament with Warm Holiday Wishes written on it and a snowman and gingerbread man on the ornament.
    Two Chocolate Trufles on a silver server.
    Chocolate Chocolate Truffles
    At the bakery we were known for our chocolate. These Chocolate Chocolate Truffles were the same ones we made - hundreds and hundreds that were hand dipped and I'm going to share the secret to perfectly coated truffles.
    Check out this recipe
    Apricot Pistachio Italian Biscotti Recipe
    These Apricot Pistachio Biscotti are festive looking with the green pistachio nuts and vibrant orange apricots.  An uncomplicated recipe with easy to obtain ingredients, these biscotti last a long time in an airtight container. They also ship well. I've made them in a large size as well as mini's which are perfect with a cup of coffee or tea on a cookie tray.
    Check out this recipe
    Two sizes of Apricot Pistachio Italian Biscotti arranged on a white doille on a tin server.
    Peppermint Ravioli Cookies tied in a stick with green ribbon and gift boxes around.
    Peppermint Ravioli Cookies
    I wait for the winter holidays for Ghirardelli to send out its peppermint squares again just to make these Peppermint Ravioli Cookies. This once a year treat is delicious on its own, but incorporated into a cookie can’t be beat.
    Check out this recipe
    Baci di Dama
    These fantastic looking Baci di Dama cookies consist of two hemispheres of buttery hazelnut cookies sandwiched with a rich gianduja filling - think Rochers and Nutella.  The recipe for this Italian cookie is as easy to remember as your name.  It is equal parts, by weight, of four ingredients for the cookie.  Forming the cookies is just as easy.
    Check out this recipe
    Seven cookies sit on an antique pate rimmed in gold.
    Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies
    These Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies are one of the easiest and simplest to make. Three ingredients plus the two flavorings are all that is needed and I'll bet they're in you pantry and fridge already. Now imagine these are sandwiched with a chocolate sour cream ganache.  This shortbread uses Chinese 5 Spice powder or cinnamon.
    Check out this recipe
    Serbian Walnut Cookies
    These melt-in-your-mouth Serbian Walnut Cookies are also known as Vanilice and were quite the surprise to me.  When I first saw the recipe, I thought it was just another butter cookie, but the toasted ground walnuts give these cookies quite a boost.  While in the West we use pecans because they are indigenous to the Americas, walnuts are used in the Balkans because they are plentiful. 
    Check out this recipe
    Macadamia Brittle|Candy|Pastries Like a Pro
    Sweet and Hot Macadamia Brittle
    Macadamia brittle is a treat anytime, but add a bit of heat and it becomes Sweet and Hot Macadamia brittle, a candy not to be forgotten.
    Check out this recipe

    Jaw-Dropping Holiday Desserts Guaranteed to Impress Your Guests

    Modified: Dec 10, 2024 · Published: Dec 9, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A slice of the Cranberry Linzer Tart sits on an antique cream and gold plate.

    Ready to bake a true showstopper? These elegant cakes, tortes, and tarts are perfect for any holiday gathering. With rich chocolate, festive fruits, and beautiful presentations, these desserts taste even more incredible than they look. Each one can be made in part or in whole to make managing your holidays easier.

    A slice of the Cranberry Linzer Tart sits on an antique cream and gold plate.
    Buche de Noel
    The Buche de Noel is a spectacular extravaganza from France and is one dessert, among many, of their gifts to the world of food. And what a gift it is! While it looks complicated, it can be done over several weeks.  I have posted a schedule that makes this doable.  
    Check out this recipe
    Buche de Noel for Holiday Baking
    The 27 Layer Tuille Torte sits on a beige and silver plate.
    27 Layer Tuille Torte
    A variation of this magnificently layered Tuile Torte appeared in my first book, "The New Pastry Cook".  It is actually easy to make, but it is time consuming. The fact that most of it can be done ahead makes it very possible.  Fourteen layers of tuile and 13 layers of mousse are a show stopper anyway you look at it.
    Check out this recipe
    Exceptional Tuxedo Cake
    Named after the black suit with a white vest, shirt and tie, a tuxedo exudes luxury on sight as does this cake. An easily made decadent chocolate cake it's layered with both a chocolate and Bailey's white chocolate mousse. This cake recipe is the perfect celebration cake for any occasion.
    Check out this recipe
    Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.
    Dobos Torte - An Hungarian Speciality
    Dobos Torte is one of Hungary's best known desserts. The butter sponge layers are filled sparingly  with a light, delicate but intense chocolate buttercream.  You won't believe the ease of the buttercream made quickly and easily in a food processor .
    Check out this recipe
    Orange Cranberry Cake - A Holiday Speciality
    What could possibly say it's a holiday celebration more than an orange chiffon cake, cranberry filling, dark chocolate ganache filling all ensconced in whipped cream? To make it more doable, all of the components can be made ahead.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of the Orange Cranberry Cake sits on a pearl plate with greenery in the background.
    Riene de Saba Cake with Candied Cranberries
    This frozen Reine de Saba is the perfect dessert for a busy schedule as the entire cake can be done a month ahead. A deeply chocolate base with a frozen chocolate mousse is served with sweet/tart candied cranberries.
    Check out this recipe
    This Reine de Saba cake consists of two layers of Reine de Saba with a chocolate mousse and candied cranberries. The cake is a frozen delight.
    The Marjolaine consists of meringue layers, pastry cream with praline, and chocolate ganache in this gluten free classic.
    Marjolaine - A Classic Flourless Pastry
    This Marjolaine is one of the most elegant gluten free desserts to be found and is, indeed, a special occasion dessert.  Don't let its many parts dissuade you from making this. Almost every part can be made ahead just waiting to be assembled.
    Check out this recipe
    Make Ahead Cranberry Linzer Tart
    Cranberry Linzer Tart with its bright deep red, vibrant,  cranberry filling is a variation of the Viennese Linzer Tart with raspberry filling.  The spiced Linzer pastry is a perfect partner with the cranberries.   It is best made ahead so the flavors can blend making this a natural for the holiday season.  It can also be baked and frozen until needed.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of the Cranberry Linzer Tart sits on an antique cream and gold plate.

    Festive Breakfast Bakes to Fill Your Home with Holiday Cheer

    Modified: Dec 5, 2025 · Published: Dec 5, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    Make your December mornings extra special with a warm, homemade breakfast. These cozy muffins, scones, and coffee cakes are brimming with seasonal flavors like cranberry, apple, and warm spices, making them the perfect start to any chilly day.

    Cranberry Muffins Recipe
    This Cranberry Muffins Recipe is quick to make, celebrates the season with their vibrant color and tart taste. While thought of mostly in the fall and around Thanksgiving, this fruit can be used in its frozen form to great advantage as in this recipe.
    Check out this recipe
    A basket of Cranberry Muffins with one split open on top.
    A single Apple Muffin covered with a crunchy sugar topping.
    Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe
    This super Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe is not only super easy and fast but one of the best muffins around. The key to these wonders is lots of apples and a really crunchy sugar topping that isn't exactly a crumb but a close cousin you're sure to love.
    Check out this recipe
    Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones Recipe
    These Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones are perfect for breakfast, brunch or snack. Quickly made with tons of warm spices and toasted pecans, these are finished with an orange glaze and pecans and sanding sugar for a bit of crunch.
    Check out this recipe
    Eight Pumpkin Pecan Scones sit on a white plate with mugs and spoons in the background.
    Squares of Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake with cranberries and cinnamon sticks
    Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake
    This Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake. is easy, quick to make and loaded with everything for fall and for the holiday season, cranberries, pecans, and cinnamon in a sour cream coffee cake.
    Check out this recipe
    Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe
    These really are the Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe. Why? Because I've added a Cinnamon Crunch topping (think Cinnamon Crunch Bagels) which takes this way over the top! Combining these two makes a completely new and different roll that's easy to make for a very special Breakfast or Brunch.
    Check out this recipe
    A Cinnamon Crunch rolls sits on an antique plate rimmed in pink and gray with more rolls in the background.
    A plate of 6 Stuffed Buttermilk Scones on a blue rimmed plate with a multi colored napkin in the background.
    Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones
    Think of these fantastic Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones as sconewiches. Two currant scones are stuffed with a brown sugar and cinnamon filling (think cinnamon rolls) finished with a vanilla glaze. Much quicker than even Cinnamon Bread, these are the perfect touch of sweetness for the holidays.
    Check out this recipe
    Orange Macadamia Rolls
    This Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe is not to be missed. A tender sour cream yeast dough encloses an orange macadamia filling that's finished with a coffee glaze. The amazing yeast dough goes together quickly and is one of the easiest I've every made. It's basically two steps - mix the liquids and yeast, then add the flour, mix and set it to rise. I can't imagine an easier yeast dough to make.
    Check out this recipe

    Cookie Roundup of 45 Cookies & Bars

    Modified: Dec 2, 2024 · Published: Dec 2, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    With cookie season just in sight, I've compiled a list of some really great cookies in this Cookie Roundup. Whether you're looking for a new cookie, cookies for a cookie swap or preparing to ship cookies as gifts, you're sure to find old favorites as well as new cookies.

    American cookies and bars as well as European cookies from Germany, France, Italy, England, Croatia, Poland, Russia and Australia are perfect for the holidays or anytime and you will find them all here. Many of these can be made ahead. Any of the bars or brownies can be cut smaller to use on an assorted tray presentation.

    Be sure to check out Cookie Tips for the Best Cookies and Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique for all manner of information to help you make any cookie come out better.

    Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
    Langue de Chat
    Langue de Chat is a French cookie that translates to cat's tongue because of its shape. It is a crisp, sweet, long, wafer thin cookie and a snap to make with only five ingredients. It's particularly good sandwiched with chocolate - think Milano's.
    Check out this recipe
    Viennese Whirl Cookies
    These are a stunningly delicious, melt in your mouth cookie with only four ingredients for the basic cookie. While the traditional English version is filled with buttercream and raspberry jam, I've upped the ante with a Strawberry Chocolate filling that will wow you.
    Check out this recipe
    A plate of Viennese Whirls with strawberry and chocolate filling in front of gift boxes.
    A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
    Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
    A favorite Italian cookie, Cuccidati (coo-cha-dah-tee) is actually easy to make and can be done over a number of days.   The pasta frolla, an Italian pastry, encloses a filling of black mission figs, dates and raisins highlighted with orange and lemon zest finished with rum.  The cookies are glazed and sprinkled with colored nonpareils.
    Check out this recipe
    Spritz Bars - Easier than The Cookies
    Spritz Bars are a faster way to make the beloved Spritz cookies all dressed up with Swedish Pearl Sugar and drizzled in chocolate.
    Check out this recipe
    Ready to eat Spritz bars piled up.
    Four Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies on a white plate with a brown rim.
    Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies
    These Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies are loaded with peanuts used three ways for the most peanuty cookie ever and are the perfect cookie for a peanut lover.
    Check out this recipe
    Bajadera - A No Bake Cookie Bar
    You will love this concept because it is a no bake cookie bar and the layering adds a sophistication not often seen in this type of cookie. But the real surprise is that it is not too sweet, but intensely flavored.  
    Check out this recipe
    Bajadera - No Bake Cookie Bars are layered hazelnut bars topped with chocolate.
    Mocha Kahlua Brownie
    Mocha Kahlua Brownies
    The brownie itself is of the fudgy variety with a deep, intense chocolate flavor highlighted with coffee undertones. Mocha Kahlua Brownies couldn't be easier to make with a sophisticated taste.
    Check out this recipe
    Zimtsterne - German Cinnamon Stars
    Zimtsterne star shaped cookies are one of Germany's favorite Christmas cookies. Naturally gluten free with few ingredients, these cookies are fat free and go together in minutes.
    Check out this recipe
    White, star shaped cinnamon Zimtsterne cookies are flowing fro a container surounded by holiday ornaments.
    Toasted coconut and macadamia nuts are the basis of these heart shaped shorbreads on a lattice plate over purple.
    Tropical Shortbread Cookies
    These Tropical Shortbread Cookies are the perfect way to say "I love you" to that someone special. While cut out cookies can be a challenge, my post on Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique makes is so much easier - just perfect cookies cut out cookies every time without the drama. The cookies don't spread and cut out cleanly with sharp edges. 
    Check out this recipe
    French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre
    These French Butter Cookies are barely sweet, simple little butter cookies that come from France where they are a much-loved cookie with tea, coffee or as a snack.  They are particularly good in recipes calling for crushed cookies.  
    Check out this recipe
    A bunch of French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, on a plate. They are rectangular cookies with holes throughout them and have browned edges
    Three flavors in one cookie - Chocolate, Vanilla and Strawberry make up this Neapolitan Butter Cookie
    Neapolitan Butter Cookies
    These are a simple butter cookie that goes together without effort and is easy to shape.  The dough itself is a breeze to work with right out of the mixer.  You can vary the flavors by substituting other powders for the cocoa and strawberry.
    Check out this recipe
    Quick Easy Versatile Rugelach Bars
    These bars are an easier, faster version of the Rugelach cookie that can be filled in a variety of ways according to your taste.
    Check out this recipe
    Rugelach Bars are stacked on a decorative plate.
    Honey Diamond cookies
    Honey Diamonds - A cookie? A small cake?
    Honey Diamonds are a rare cookie with no shortening. These soft pillows of spiced chocolate are actually more like little cakes packed with flavor that only get better when they sit. Its quick preparation is a boon to busy bakers and as a bonus they make the house smell wonderful while baking.
    Check out this recipe
    HASELNUSSMAKRONEN -German Hazelnut Macaroons
    Haselnussmakronen! What a mouthful. This German Hazelnut Macaroon is the simplest of recipes with a really big reward that you don't want to miss. Six ingredients whipped up in a matter of minutes, baked in practically no time and filled with jam or chocolate will take a cookie tray to new heights.As an added plus, these cookies are naturally gluten free.
    Check out this recipe
    A plate of 3 Haselnussmakronen -German Hazelnut Macroons on a plate with a cup and saucer and more macaroons in the background.
    Round Sable Breton cookies that are cross hatched on a lace edged plate.
    Sablé Breton
    You don't want to miss this easy, classic, buttery cookie from the Bretagne region (Britanny) in North-West France.
    Best ever butter cookie!
    Check out this recipe
    Hello Dolly Cookies
    Hello Dolly Cookies are quickly made and require no mixer or involved ingredients.  Just stir together, scoop, bake, cool and eat.  A perfect project with kids.  
    Check out this recipe
    Hello Dollie Cookies
    Sarah Bernhardt cookies feature a macaron base with a chocolate ganache filling,dipped in chocolate and finished with gold leaf
    Sarah Bernhardts - A Macaroon Like No Other
    An almond macaroon, topped with a chocolate truffle, dipped in chocolate and decorated with gold leaf for a cookie beyond compare.
    Check out this recipe
    Spice Bars
    This recipe for Spice Bars is one of those fantastic treasures where you make the base, press it into a pan, add a few more ingredients to the reserved amount, pour it on top, and bake.  It couldn't be easier. 
    Check out this recipe
    Spice bars ready to eat surrounded by spices.
    Finished Photo
    Orange Almond Madeleines - A Petit Four
    These shell shaped Madeleines petit fours are a stunning and flavor packed addition to any cookie collection. They are easy to make and easier to eat.
    Check out this recipe
    Oatmeal Cookies
    The Oatmeal cookies are sure to please with a whole pound of add ins of your choice. If oatmeal cookies are your thing, then be sure to give these a go.
    Check out this recipe
    Oatmeal Cookies
    Three Chocolate Biscotti on a white tray with coffee in a cup.
    Chocolate Spice Olive Oil Biscotti
    Biscotti are twice baked cookies and come to us from Italy.  They are not too sweet and are simply addictive.  To make things better they are really easy to make. Make them large or make them small, this spicy version is highlighted with black pepper and cayenne for a surprising after taste.
    Check out this recipe
    Murbteig Pastry
    This basic pastry is German or Viennese depending upon what book you are reading.  It is extremely easy to put together and just as versatile. These cookies literally melt in your mouth.
    Check out this recipe
    Finished photo
    Finished trio of cookies
    Holiday Cookies
    This post of Holiday Cookies includes Sienna Lace, Chocolate Dipped Cappuccino Rounds, and Anise Swirls.
    Check out this recipe
    Pfeffernusse Cookies
    These traditional cookies come from the German repertoire. The word pfeffernusse translates to  “pepper nut”.   While everyone seems to agree they have molasses, pepper and spices, just which spices seem to vary. These cookies are like fine wine - they need to develop their flavor so they are a great make ahead cookie.
    Check out this recipe
    Finished photo
    A cookie crust, peanut butter filling and chocolate topping make up the No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
    No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
    These No Bake Peanut Butter Bars fall into the ridiculously easy category and are great for something to do with the kids. A chocolatey crust, insanely delicious, smooth, and creamy filling and a just right chocolate top, make these one of the best bars around.
    Check out this recipe
    Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies
    I used two techniques - the first is painted cookies, either solid colors or the very simple swirly, marbelized ones. The second is even easier since you simply cover the unbaked cookie with colored sugar and bake. That's it.
    Check out this recipe
    A platter of brightly Decorated Shortbread Cookies for Easter including ducks, flowers and Easter eggs.
    A wicker basket with a doilie holds black and white glazed Pryaniki cookies.
    Pryaniki - Russian Honey Spice Cookies
    Pryaniki (pre-ah-nee-kee) are honey and spice Russian cookies traditionally served at teas and holidays. These cookies are more cake-like than their German cousins, Pfeffernusse and are finished with a white or chocolate glaze.
    Check out this recipe
    French Macarons with Chocolate Raspberry Filling
    These special French Macarons are filled with the same chocolate raspberry truffle filling we sold at the bakery. This deeply chocolate, deeply raspberry filling is sandwiched between two pink macaroons.
    Check out this recipe
    Pink macarons filled with chocolate and raspery on a white plate.
    Hermit Bars
    Hermit Bars with Lemon Glaze
    Spice filled Hermit Bars are really easy to make, packed with flavor and finished with a lemon glaze.
    Check out this recipe
    Traditional Springerle Cookies
    With no shortening in Springerle Cookies, it is a combination of a cookie and a cake. The drying time before baking is to dry the top of the cookie so the design becomes prominent. This anise flavored German cookie is great to eat as well as to use for tree ornaments.
    Check out this recipe
    Springerle Cookies on a mustard colored plate with a springerle rolling pin and mold in the background.
    Dulche de leche cookies with the five finishes - pecan, pecan and sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookie, with sanding sugar
    Dulce de Leche Cookies - Your Way
    The dulce de leche filling is as easy as pouring a can of condensed milk in a bowl and baking it for a couple of hours. I've provided several ways to finish the cookies, from simple to extravagant - all elegant and looking like they came from a bakery.  While this recipe looks like it might be a challenge, it is really quite easy and very much worthwhile.
    Check out this recipe
    Almond Macaroons
    Almond Macaroons are simplicity itself and one of the easiest, fastest, most delicious cookies you can make. They are naturally gluten free.
    Check out this recipe
    Almond Macaroons
    Single cookie for The Importance of Base Recipes in Baking
    The Importance of a Base Recipe in Baking
    This is a perfect base recipe for cookies as it can be adapted endlessly and can be put together in a matter of minutes. This post lists 8 variations to get you started.
    Check out this recipe
    Pecan Bars
    These Pecan Bars are one of the most used recipes from the Culinary Institute of America. I have seen various versions of these Pecan Bars but this one is the one we used in the bakery. Cut them in half for the perfect bar on a cookie tray
    Check out this recipe
    Finished photo
    A tray of breakfast cookies with a blue striped glass of milk.
    Versatile Breakfast Cookies
    Everything you need for breakfast. Oats, Wheaties or Total, fruits and nuts, spices, and applesauce all come together for a great breakfast treat.
    Check out this recipe
    Fudgey Chocolate Cookies with Variations
    Soft chewy cookies such as this Fudgey Chocolate Cookie are not synonymous with under-baked cookies.  Altering the way the cookie is normally put together and changing one ingredient makes the difference.
    Check out this recipe
    Fudgey Chocolate Cookies with variations
    Amaretti Cookies
    These Amaretti cookies which are Italy's version of a macaroon are a perfect example. Crunchy, gluten free and low in fat, these are the perfect accompaniment to lightly sweetened or macerated fresh fruit or ice cream or just eat them by themselves.
    Check out this recipe
    Amaretti Cookie photo
    Multi colored Painted Cookies on a lace plate
    Painted Cookies
    Years ago when I owned my bakery glazed cookies started showing up everywhere. Fancy and fanciful, I was not skilled at that time with a pastry bag so I came up with this marbelized version that is so, so easy anyone can do it. It is used commonly now by many - even those that can pipe.
    Check out this recipe
    Hazelnut Crunch Bars
    Hazelnut Crunch Bars are a fantasy dessert.  Milk chocolate, rice krispies and toasted hazelnuts form the crunch base for these bars which are topped with a layer of caramel.   A light as air marshmallow tops the caramel and the dark satin ganache finishes the Hazelnut Crunch Bars elegantly.
    Check out this recipe
    Finished Hazelnut Crunch Bar
    Zippy Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
    Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
    While shortbreads are usually thought of as sweet, these Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads are definitely on the savory, snacky side. When I had my take out shop, we sold these Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads and they were always a winner with wine, beer, lemonade or nothing at all. Warning: these are really addictive.
    Check out this recipe
    Flourless Chocolate Raspberry Cookies
    While it is good by itself, it is better if you sandwich them together with raspberry jam and sprinkle them with powdered sugar. These Flourless Chocolate Raspberry Cookies are amazingly fudgy and moist and have quickly become a favorite.
    Check out this recipe
    Finished photo
    Round butter cookies finished with chocolate on an orange and white plate.
    Chocolate Dipped Sweet and Salty Butter Cookies
    These Chocolate Dipped Sweet and Salty Butter Cookies are one of the simplest cookies to be found. Salt and sanding sugar are mixed to top the chocolate covered cookie. To speed up the process, logs of dough are rolled and sliced so there is no rolling and cutting out the cookies.
    Check out this recipe
    Peanut Butter Cookie Pops
    What could me more fun than a cookie pop - a peanut butter cookie on a stick?  How about a peanut butter cookie with a snicker’s bar inside on a stick?
    Check out this recipe
    Finished Photo of Cookie Pops

    Kick-Start Your Holiday Spirit: Cookies & Breads to Bake Now

    Modified: Nov 28, 2025 · Published: Nov 28, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    Viennese Whirl Cookies are comprised of two cookies filled with a chocolate and strawberry buttercream.

    As the Thanksgiving plates are cleared, our minds turn to the festive season ahead! Get into the holiday spirit with this collection of beautiful European-inspired cookies and stunning braided breads that are perfect for gifting or sharing.

    Viennese Whirl Cookies are comprised of two cookies filled with a chocolate and strawberry buttercream.
    Murbteig Pastry
    Murbteig cookies  were one of my favorite Christmas cookies made by my mother. The basic pastry is German or Viennese depending upon what book you are reading.  It is extremely easy to put together. Mother made this in a mixer but I find it easier in the food processor. Both versions are included.
    Check out this recipe
    Various shaped cookies with pecan and sugar topping sit on a silver tray.
    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.
    My Chocolate Babka
    My Chocolate Babka Recipe is a visually stunning sweet bread that has a couple of tips to help you shape this marvelous filled yeast dough. For the chocolate filling, I simply used Nutella to highlight the sweet dough for an unparalleled treat that is easier to make than it looks.
    Check out this recipe
    Serbian Walnut Cookies Recipe
    These melt-in-your-mouth Serbian Walnut Cookies are also known as Vanilice and were quite the surprise to me.  When I first saw the recipe, I thought it was just another butter cookie, but the toasted ground walnuts give these cookies quite a boost. 
    Check out this recipe
    Apricot Pistachio Biscotti sit on a white doile on a tin charger.
    Apricot Pistachio Italian Biscotti Recipe
    These Apricot Pistachio Biscotti are festive looking with the green pistachio nuts and vibrant orange apricots.  An uncomplicated recipe with easy to obtain ingredients, these biscotti last a long time in an airtight container. They also ship well. I've made them in a large size as well as mini's which are perfect with a cup of coffee or tea on a cookie tray.
    Check out this recipe
    Haselnussmakronen-German - Hazelnut Macasroons
    Haselnussmakronen! What a mouthful. This German Hazelnut Macaroon is a very simple recipe with a really big reward that you don't want to miss. Six ingredients whipped up in a matter of minutes, baked in practically no time and filled with jam or chocolate will take a cookie tray to new heights.As an added plus, these cookies are naturally gluten free.
    Check out this recipe
    These Hazelnut Macaroons are filled with a raspberry jam ad sit on an antique plate.
    Three different European Nut rolls -n almond, walnut and poppyseed sit on a marble round.
    European Nut Rolls
    This European Nut Roll with Three Fillings is a recipe long in my family.  My parents were from the former Yugoslavia and every household had their own version of the nut roll.  Nut rolls are especially popular during holidays and celebrations in Central Europe.
    Check out this recipe
    Cuccidati
    A favorite Italian Christmas cookie, Cuccidati (coo-cha-dah-tee) is actually easy to make and can be done over a number of days.   The pasta frolla, an Italian pastry, encloses a filling of black mission figs, dates and raisins highlighted with orange and lemon zest finished with rum.  The cookies are glazed and sprinkled with colored nonpareils.
    Check out this recipe
    Three Cuccidati cookes on a white background.
    A wicker basket with a doilie holds black and white glazed Pryaniki cookies.
    Pyraniki - Russian Honey Spice Cookies
    Pryaniki (pre-ah-nee-kee) are honey and spice Russian cookies traditionally served at teas and holidays. These cookies are more cake-like than their German cousins, Pfeffernusse and are finished with a white or chocolate glaze.
    To make your life easier, these cookies can be made, shaped and frozen for up to a month or so before baking and glazing.
    Check out this recipe
    Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls
    These Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls have so much going for them.  Known as Kardemummabullar, the dough is easy to make in the processor or mixer and interestingly has no eggs.  It is wonderfully soft and really easy to roll out.  Any yeast dough is best eaten the day it is made but these are great even the next day.
    Check out this recipe
    A Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls is feetured on a white an blue plate.
    Viennese Whirl Cookies are comprised of two cookies filled with a chocolate and strawberry buttercream.
    Viennese Whirl Cookies
    These Viennese Whirl Cookies come to you from......England. I was surprised also. It seems they were thought to look like something that came from Vienna. Whatever was thought about them, they are a stunningly delicious, melt in your mouth cookie with only four ingredients for the basic cookie.
    Check out this recipe

    7 Last-Minute Desserts That Taste like you Planned for Weeks

    Modified: Nov 24, 2024 · Published: Nov 24, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    A slice of the Apple Crisp Cheesecake sits on a tan oplate with a fork on the plate and a napkin in the background.
    A slice of the Apple Crisp Cheesecake sits on a tan oplate with a fork on the plate and a napkin in the background.
    Non-Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding
    If you're looking for a low stress quickly made holiday dessert this Non Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding is not to be missed. While often thought of as overwhelmingly sweet, this one is not. The easily made individual sponge cakes are rich, moist, served warm with one of two sauces - traditional Toffee Sauce or a Lemon Rum sauce for a change.
    Check out this recipe
    This photograph shows a sticky toffee pudding enveloped in toffee sauce on a white plate.
    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.
    No Bake Chocolate Coconut Tart
    The only way to adequately describe this Chocolate Coconut Tart is to think Mounds Bars. This unusual tart comprises a sublime mixture of cream of coconut, white chocolate, a touch of sour cream and a lot of coconut in a chocolate crust. You'll especially like the no bake aspect of making this.
    Check out this recipe
    Apple Crisp Cheesecake
    Apple Crisp Cheesecake says fall to me in a way few other desserts do. You will love the way the oat, walnut, brown sugar and cinnamon crisp goes with the creamy cheesecake under it with the apple filling on top of the graham cracker crust.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of the Apple Crisp Cheesecake sits on a tan oplate with a fork on the plate and a napkin in the background.
    The Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding is shown partial opened up with a blubeberry sauce dripping down it on a white plate,
    Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding
    This spectacular Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding is based on the Lemon Cheesecake I make at the restaurant. It is extremely popular and very unusual. This version of a bread pudding is very quick and easy to make. The ingredients take a few turns in the processor, are poured over the bread cubes, and into the pans it goes. Not much work at all for this uncommon bread pudding.
    Check out this recipe
    Amazing Banoffee Pie Recipe
    My amazing no bake Banoffee PIe is comprised of a vanilla layer crust, a toffee filling, bananas, and chocolate mousse sprinkled with Heath bar bits, and coffee whipped cream to top it all off. The name of this English dessert comes from either bananas and toffee or bananas and coffee whipped cream which is often used in place of the plain whipped cream.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of Banoffee Pie with coffee whipped cream sits on a white plate.
    A slice of the S'more Tart with it's browned marshmallow topping sits on a brown rimmed plate with a fork and napkin in the background.
    How to Make A S'mores Tart
    How to Make S'mores Tart is more than just one more no bake recipe. It comprises some basic baking elements that you can use over and over. The graham cracker crust and the marshmallow cream (creme or fluff whatever you call it) is so simple to make from scratch you'll wonder why you haven't done it before.
    Check out this recipe
    Orange Date Bread Pudding
    Oranges and Dates are a fantastic combination and never more so than in the Orange Date Bread Pudding with the traditional hard sauce is hard to beat.
    Check out this recipe
    Orange Date Bread Pudding with Hard Sauce drizzled on

    Happy Thanksgiving to all. I have much to be thankful for including the fact you are here. Have a wonderful day.

    Recipes for a Stress-Free Thanksgiving Morning

    Modified: Nov 20, 2024 · Published: Nov 21, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A plate of scones with one on top broken open to show the interior of the scone.

    Keep everyone happy and out of the kitchen with these delightful breakfast and brunch treats. These muffins, scones, and coffee cakes can be made ahead, filling your home with wonderful aromas as the turkey roasts.

    A plate of scones with one on top broken open to show the interior of the scone.
    Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones Recipe
    These Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones are perfect for breakfast, brunch or snack. Quickly made with tons of warm spices and toasted pecans, these are finished with an orange glaze and pecans and sanding sugar for a bit of crunch.
    Check out this recipe
    Eight Pumpkin Pecan Scones sit on a white plate with mugs and spoons in the background.
    A basket of Cranberry Muffins with one split open on top.
    Cranberry Muffins
    This Cranberry Muffins Recipe is quick to make, celebrates the season with their vibrant color and tart taste. While thought of mostly in the fall and around Thanksgiving, this fruit can be used in its frozen form to great advantage as in this recipe.
    Check out this recipe
    Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones
    Think of these fantastic Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones as sconewiches. Two currant scones are stuffed with a brown sugar and cinnamon filling (think cinnamon rolls) finished with a vanilla glaze. Much quicker than even Cinnamon Bread, these are the perfect touch of sweetness after the holidays.
    Check out this recipe
    A plate of 6 Stuffed Buttermilk Scones on a blue rimmed plate with a multi colored napkin in the background.
    An Orange Macadamia Roll sits on a white plate with a rack of other rolls behind it and a saucer to a coffee cup to the right.
    Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe
    This Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe is not to be missed. A tender sour cream yeast dough encloses an orange macadamia filling that's finished with a coffee glaze. The amazing yeast dough goes together quickly and is one of the easiest I've every made. It's basically two steps - mix the liquids and yeast, then add the flour, mix and set it to rise. I can't imagine an easier yeast dough to make. So if you're new or apprehensive about working with yeast, this is the reciope for you
    Check out this recipe
    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins
    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins with pecan streusel couldn't be any easier. Two bowls and a few measuring utensils, a whisk and, a rubber spatula are all that are needed. Combine the dry ingredients in one bowl, the liquid ingredients in another, mix them together, plop them in the cups and into the oven they go.
    Check out this recipe
    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a yellow happy face mug in the background and a blue and yellow towel.
    The open cinnamon crunch roll is on a white plate with flowers on the edge. A plate of rolls is in the background and a blue dotted cup and saucer are on the right.
    Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe
    These really are the Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe. Why? Because I've added a Cinnamon Crunch topping (think Cinnamon Crunch Bagels) which takes this way over the top! Combining these two makes a completely new and different roll that's easy to make.
    Check out this recipe
    Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe
    This super Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe is not only super easy and fast but one of the best muffins around. The key to these wonders is lots of apples and a really crunchy sugar topping that isn't exactly a crumb but a close cousin you're sure to love.
    Check out this recipe
    A single Crunchy Topped Apple Muffins
    Squares of Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee cake with fresh cranberries and cinnamon sticks.
    Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake
    This Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake consists of a sour cream coffee cake riddled with bright red cranberries and topped with a pecan streusel is easy to make and easy to eat.
    Check out this recipe

    American Pie Crust Tutorial

    Modified: Nov 25, 2025 · Published: Nov 19, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 22 Comments

    A slice of the American Pie Crust showing off it's flakiness.

    This American Pie Crust Tutorial is for beginners as well as seasoned bakers. Many a great cook or baker is still intimidated by a pie crust. Trying to wrangle a few ingredients into a flaky crust that will bake beautifully without sliding down the pan or hold a juicy filling without getting soggy is a challenge and with good reason.

    Follow along in this deep, deep dive into how to make a pie crust from scratch that lets you master this most important element in baking with lots of step by step photos to guide you. But be ready, this challenges many of the most popular recipes but it works!

    A slice of the American Pie Crust showing off it's flakiness.

    Several years ago, Midwest Living magazine asked me to provide a “no fail pie crust”.  The results elicited this comment from the food editor: “We share a test kitchen with Better Homes and Gardens, Traditional Home, Successful Farming, Diabetic Living and more. The staff is educated in food science or through a culinary school. We used your crust for all the pies and they were blown away with the recipe. Not only does it taste great, it was easy to work with. You became a sensation! One of the staffers refuses to make any other crust at home and she’s been on staff for almost 20 years. I hope you feel the love!” I think you will too after making this melt in your mouth crust.

    This post has been modified from the original to make it easier to follow, add more photographs and ensure you get the results you are looking for.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    How to Make a Pie Crust from Scratch

    Purpose and Kinds of Flour Used

    Many elements go into a pie crust and an understanding of how they work will help allay any misgivings you have. First of all, let’s talk about flour. The type of flour used will determine, almost completely, the outcome of the crust due to the protein count of the gluten.  In making pastry dough, the fat is cut into the flour so that the two proteins in flour, which make up the gluten, cannot come together to link up and form a chain or strand. On the other hand, bread dough is worked vigorously by kneading in order to link the two proteins to form a chain. Whereas the elasticity gained by working the dough is desirable in bread, it is not in pastry, which is why pastry dough is handled and worked as little and as quickly as possible with a lower protein flour.

    Bread flour has the highest percentage of gluten followed, in descending order, by all- purpose flour, pastry flour and cake flour which has the very least. It would seem reasonable that if the lowest amount of protein is desired then cake flour would be the choice.  Using all cake flour does make a very tender crust, however it is rather mealy and without good texture.

    Because pastry flour is not commonly available to the consumer, many recipes combine two thirds all-purpose flour with ⅓ cake flour. While this yields a better crust, reversing it and using a larger amount of cake flour with just a little all-purpose yields the requisite tenderness and flakiness without sacrificing the crispness, texture or strength.  In addition, it can stand a little more handling than crusts made with other flours – a boon to beginners.

    Which Fats Work Best

    The most important item is the fat used. The colder and harder the fat, the flakier the crust. At every point while and after adding the fat, the pastry should be worked quickly and kept cold. Lard, a very hard fat, is advocated by die hard pie crust makers as providing the flakiest crusts. This is true, but its very definite flavor along with its very high cholesterol and the difficulty of finding it in the supermarkets make this the least used choice.

    The second flakiest crust will be obtained with vegetable shortening, as it is 100 percent fat, although not as hard as lard but it doesn't have any flavor. Butter, with a fat content of 75 to 80 percent, will not produce as flaky a crust, but the taste is superior. To maximize flavor and retain flakiness a combination of butter and shortening is used in this recipe. Both are used frozen. Under no circumstances use butter substitutes such as I Can’t Believe it’s Not Butter, etc. They have a lot of water in them that alters the proportions of fat and water.

    Liquids

    Liquids make the dough cohesive. Water, although the main liquid usually used in pie crusts, is not the only one to be considered. Egg and lemon juice play an important part also. Ice cold water is used to slow down the formation of the gluten strands.  Several ice cubes placed in a cup of water 5 to 10 minutes before using are sufficient to chill it. Egg in the crust adds firmness, crispness and color and is particularly good when making pies with juicy fillings. When less than a whole egg is called for, beat a whole egg with a fork until the yolk and white are completely mixed, then measure the amount called for. Lemon juice, because of its acid content, acts as a tenderizer on the gluten. Vinegar can be substituted. I have seen crusts that use vodka but I haven't seen that it substantially improves the crust.

    Measuring

    Measuring the flours is very important to the finished pastry which is why I suggest using a scale. It makes all the difference in the world for consistent outcomes when baking.  As a professional baker, I weigh everything and recommend home bakers do also. If you don't, stir the flour in the bag or canister lightly, dip the cup in and fill to overflowing. With the back of a knife or anything flat, sweep the excess flour off.  Be sure to use a dry measure – one that has no lip on the top.

    Mixing

    At this point you are ready to mix. There are several ways to mix the dough.  But the best way is to use the food processor.  The only caveat is you mustn’t over mix – use pulses as they are easy to control. Frozen butter and shortening are cut into the flours with pulses. You want the pieces to remain the size of peas so when the pastry is rolled out the fat gets trapped between the layers of flour. When it bakes, the fat melts and the steam causes the pastry to puff and become flaky. After the fat is cut in, the liquids are combined and pulsed in until large crumbs are formed.

    The food processor allows you much more control than does a mixer. By using pulses you can more easily control it keeping the butter and shortening in large pea size pieces. It's also easier to keep the gluten in the flour under control and shows you how to make a pie crust from scratch.

    Rolling the Pastry Out

    To roll the pastry, use as little flour as possible. You may think a photo of "lightly floured surface" is ridiculous but I have had students that use so much flour you can't see the surface of the table. Extra flour rolled into the dough at this point will only serve to toughen it.

    To keep a round shape when rolling, roll from the middle out to the edges. If, no matter what you do, the shell does not form a good circle you can help it along.  Cut away the bulging part of the pastry, moisten the edge of the pastry that needs help with water and patch it with the cut piece overlapping to make a seam.  Sprinkle lightly with flour and roll lightly.  The seams will not adhere to each other without the water.

    Roll the pastry into a circle about 12 ½ to 13 inches round for a 9" pie pan. To make sure the pastry fits into the corner of the pan and is not being stretched, ease about one eighth of the pastry at the side of the pan gently toward the middle. Now bring the pastry back to the rim and slide it down the side of the pan so you can see it fits the angle at the bottom.  Continue around the pan in this manner. Trim the overhang a uniform 1 ½". Turn it under and flute the edges if making a single crust. Both a single and double crust are shown below.

    The crust can be baked at this point or it can be frozen for several months. It can also be rolled out flat, frozen, stacked with parchment paper between them and frozen for several months. Simply remove a crust, thaw in the refrigerator and use as directed.

    Baking the Pie Crust

    Baking an empty shell is called “blind” baking the shell. The biggest obstacle here is the tendency towards shrinking when baking. To forestall this, it is necessary to freeze the shell first then weight it. I am always amused by the pictures of a few aluminum weights on the bottom crust or something that looks like a string of beads. These will do nothing to help your cause.

    Line the frozen pie crust with foil that has been sprayed with a releasing agent (do not use parchment paper – it doesn’t have enough strength when removing), lightly pressing it, sprayed side down on bottom of the crust and against the sides letting it stick up over the top. Fill the crust completely to the top with dried beans such as pinto or lima beans. It will take about two pounds of  beans for a nine inch crust.  Preheat the oven to 425°F. Bake for 20 minutes with the beans. Remove the foil and the beans and bake for 15 to 18 minutes more for a full baked crust. It is important for the finished shell to have color so it remains crisp and flaky. Cool the beans completely and store in a covered container to use over and over. I have had mine for years.

    To par bake (or partially) a shell reduce the time after removing the beans to about 10 to 12 minutes. The crust should be firm but not browned as for the fully baked crust. This crust is used when it will be filled and baked again. Be sure to cover the edges of the crust after it is filled and before it goes into the oven. Be sure to change the oven temperature to whatever your filling suggests.

    Anytime a pie is going to bake for 30 to 40 minutes the crust should be par baked.

    Cover the Edges Before Baking

    If you are baking a pie longer than 30 to 40 minutes, the edges need to be covered or they will become overly brown. It is much safer to do this before baking instead of waiting until it is halfway or more done then trying to cover it while hot. After the top is put on the pie, simply tear off strips of foil about 3 inches wide and cover the edges. These are left on for about half the baking time and then removed so these edges can bake also.

    Choice of Pie Pans or Plates

    The color of the pans will alter the baking times.  I see mostly dark ware for consumers these days, very little aluminum. Dark metal or glass pie pans require a twenty five degree reduction in heat in order not to over brown or burn. My preference is aluminum or glass.

    Amount of Filling for 9" Pie Pans

    To figure out how much filling you need, a standard pie pan requires about 6 cups of fruit, plus sugar and thickeners. The deep dish pie pans require about 8 cups of fruit plus sugar and thickeners.

    By following the steps you see here, you will be assured your pie crusts will be fast, flaky, fantastic and fail-proof because you learned how to make a pie crust from scratch.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the American Pie Crust include cake flour, all-purpose flour, salt, unsaltedbutter, shortening, beaten egg, lemon juice and ice water.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, egg, lemon juice

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, shortening (such as crisco)

    BACK ROW: Cake Flour, ice water, all-purpose flour

    Key Ingredients

    • Cake flour is essential in this recipe.
    • A bit of all-purpose flour boosts the strength and stability of the cake flour
    • Unsalted butter is used. If salted butter is used reduce the salt by ⅓.
    • Shortening, such as crisco, is used to ensure maximum flakiness. All butter can be substituted but it may not be as flaky. It will also soften faster when working with it.
    • Freezing both the butter and the shortening is necessary to ensure visible pieces of each will be visible so these will melt and cause the flakiness.
    • Ice water is necessary to keep the dough as cold as possible.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Make sure the butter and shortening are frozen before proceeding.

    Making the Crust

    The first collage hows the two flours blended in the processor, the frozen butter is added, then processed leaving large chunks followed by the addition of the frozen shortening.

    Step 1. Combine the flours in the bowl of a processor and pulse several times. Step 2. Step 2. Add the frozen butter. Step 3. Pulse a few times to break it up in large clumps. Step 4. Add the frozen shortening.

    This collage shows the egg beaten, poured over the ingredients in the processor, processed to large pieces and poured out onto a work surface.

    Step 5. Beat the egg to until completely combined. Combine the the 2 tablespoons egg, lemon juice and water. Step 2. Pour it in a circle over the processor contents. Step 7. Pulse until large clumps of dough form. Do not over process. Step 8. Pour it out onto a work surface. Note: One of my long time readers came up with an alternative way to add the liquid that worked better for her. After cutting in the butter and shortening, she removed everything to a large bowl. Then added the liquids and stirred them in by hand to prevent the butter and shortening from being cut into too small of pieces.

    This collage shows the dough pushed together, fattened into a round circle, wrapped in plastic wrap and the surface lightly dusted with flour.

    Step 9. Push the dough together in a cohesive block. Step 10. Knead it several times and shape it into a round 1" thick. Here you can plainly see butter pieces in the dough. Step 11. Wrap it in plastic wrap and refrigerate a minimum of 2 hours or overnight. Step 12. Lightly flour your work area. It may seem unnecessary to show you this, but I have seen people really heavily cover their surfaces with flour. All of that flour going into your crust will toughen it and inhibit the flakiness.

    Rolling the American Pie Crust Out

    This collage shows the dough in a round, flattened with a rolling pin, rolled out and trimmed.

    Step 13. Remove the dough round from the fridge and place it on the lightly floured surface. Step 14. With a rolling pin, press the dough down in 3 or 4 places to make rolling out easier. Step 15. Roll the dough out to about 13" for a 9" pie pan. Step 16. This is an optional step, but I place a 12 inch cardboard on my rolled out dough and then cut it slightly larger to ensure a 13" round. This makes a uniform amount of dough being turned under at the edge.

    This collages shows the dough being transferred to the pie plate, being secured to the sides of the plate, and the edges tucked under.

    Step 17. Pick the crust up by slicing both hands under the crust and transferring it to the pie plate making sure it is evenly set in. While I do this with my hands, you can also roll the dough loosely around a rolling pin and simply unroll it in the plate. Step 18. Going around the edge of the pan, pull the dough back and make sure it is securely seated to the edge. Step 19. Press it lightly against the side and the bottom. Step 20. Tuck the overhang under the top edge of the crust.

    Blind Baking a Single Crust

    This shows how to make a single, blind baked crust by fluting the edges of the crust, lining it with foil and filling it with beans and the baked crust.

    Step 21. Flute the edges of the crust by placing your finger on the inside of the crust and pinching it from the outside or however you wish. Step 22. Go around the entire edge to finish the crust. I do not dock mine with a fork. Freeze the crust until it is rock hard. Step 23. To keep the crust from sliding down the side of the pie plate, spray a large piece of foil with a non-stick baking release and place it, sprayed side down, onto the crust. Make sure the foil fits well into the edges of the crust. Fill it to the top completely with beans or rice. Step 24. Bake as called for removing the foil and beans about half way through to allow the crust to bake completely.

    Double Crusted Pie

    This collage shows a double crusted pie with two rounds of dough, the filling being covered, the edges turned under and fluted.

    Step 25. Divide the dough as called for. Step 26. Roll the crust into a 13" round as above and place it evenly in the pie plate as for the single crust. Step 26. Roll the top crust about 12" round. Wet the overhang on the bottom crust and place the top crust on. Step 27. Press the two edges together. The water will seal the top and bottom edges. Turn them under. Step 28. Flute the edges as above or however you please.

    The last collage shows the top of the crust being egg washed, a vent cut in the top, the edges wrapped and the baked pie.

    Step 29. Brush the top of the crust with a beaten egg for a beautiful top. Step 30.Cut a vent or vents into the top of the pie. This will prevent the crust from splitting on its own. Sprinkle the pie with sanding sugar for a sparkly look. Step 31. Place the finished pie on a foil lined baking sheet to catch any drips. This is one of the most important steps. Cover only the edges of the pie with foil before it goes into the oven. They will over bake and burn with the long baking time needed if not protected. By covering them now and removing the foil half way through, you don't have to take the pie out of the oven and cover them when the pie is hot. We used this method at the bakery. Step 32. This is your pie, beautifully golden brown with a flaky crust that you will be proud to serve. BhuBBhuB= srBuBBuBuBiB sr SaveSaveSaveSave

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Why do many pie recipes bake first at a higher temperature, then lower it?

    This helps in a couple of ways. One it helps bake the bottom crust and secondly, the burst of hot heat starts the butter and/or shortening to melt fast and start the layers separating for a flaky crust. The temperature is then lowered to finish the baking.

    Why do lard and shortening make the flakiest crusts?

    Because they are all fat. Butter contains water so it doesn't have as high a percentage as the lard and shortening.

    Can all butter be substituted for the lard or fat?

    If a recipe calls for both butter and another shortening, then yes it can be made with all butter but it may not be as flaky and tender.

    Make Ahead, Storage and Freezing

    The crusts can be made ahead frozen at several different times for several months. When it is initially made into the 1" round, when it is rolled out or when it is in the pie plate. If more than one crust is frozen when rolled out, separate with parchment paper. If frozen in the pie plate it is safest to use a metal pan or make sure the glass pie plate will go from freezer to oven safely. In any case, freeze the crusts hard, then wrap well in foil or place in freezer proof bags. If frozen flat, thaw in the fridge for the best result.

    Expert Tips

    • Everything should be worked cold - the butter, shortening, egg and water.
    • I don't poke holes in the unbaked crusts to prevent liquids from escaping through them. If bubbles do pop up, I simple flatten them.
    • If a crust is to be par baked, that means only bake it partially. It will finish in the oven after the filling is added. It needs to be weighted down with beans or rice.
    • A blind baked crust is one that is fully baked and weighted down half way through baking.
    • The tray with the pie can be placed on the lowest rack in the oven to ensure the bottom bakes.
    • The egg wash on top is optional but makes for the best looking pies.

    SaveSave

    Slice of a double crusted pie on a gold and white plate.

    More Wonderful Pies with an American Pie Crust

    • Finished Photo
      Lemon Meringue Pie
    • A slice of Dutch Peach Pie on a white lace plate with a fork beside it.
      Dutch Peach Pie
    • A meringue topped coconut cream pie in a glass pie pan with plates and forks beside it.
      Coconut Cream Pie with a Difference
    • Double Banana Cream Pie with plates and cups and saucers.
      Double Banana Caramel Cream Pie

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the American Pie Crust showing off it's flakiness.

    American Pie Crust Tutorial

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This American Pie Crust Tutorial shows you how to wrangle a few ingredients into a flaky crust that will bake beautifully without sliding down the pan or hold a juicy filling without getting soggy with just a few ingredients you probably have in your pantry and fridge.
    4.86 from 7 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Chilling & Freezing time 2 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 3 hours hrs 55 minutes mins
    Course Pie Crust
    Cuisine American

    Equipment

    • 9" Pie plate
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Single American Pie Crust

    • 1 ¾ cups cake flour (180 grams)
    • ⅓ cup all-purpose flour (45 grams)
    • ¾ teaspoon table salt
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter (85 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons shortening (45 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons beaten egg
    • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
    • 5 tablespoons ice water

    Double American Pie Crust

    • 2 ¼ cup cake flour (280 grams)
    • ½ cup all-purpose flour (70 grams)
    • 1 ¼ teaspoon table salt
    • 9 tablespoons unsalted butter (130 grams)
    • ¼ cup shortening (60 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons beaten egg
    • 1 ½ teaspoons lemon juice
    • 8 to 9 tablespoons ice water

    Instructions
     

    Single American Pie Crust

    • Cut the butter into tablespoons size pieces and cut those in half. Freeze until rock hard.
    • Measure the shortening in tablespoons and freeze those until they are rock hard also.
    • Combine the cake. all-purpose flour and salt in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse several times to mix well.
    • Place the frozen butter over the flours. Pulse several times to cut the butter into large chunks.
    • Add the frozen shortening. Pulsing the processor, cut in until the butter and shortening are the size of large peas. Do not over process. Use short bursts.
    • Combine the egg, lemon juice and water. Pour it in a circle over th e processor contents. Pulse until it forms small clumps in the bowl. Note: One of my long time readers came up with an alternative way to add the liquid that worked better for her. After cutting in the butter and shortening, she removed everything to a large bowl. Then added the liquids and stirred them in by hand to prevent the butter and shortening from being cut into too small of pieces.
    • Pour it onto a lightly floured work surface. Push the clumps together to form a cohesive mass.
    • Knead it 4 or 5 times to forma dough. Pat into a circle about 1" thick. Wrap in plastic warp and refrigerate a minimum of 2 hours or overnight.
    • Preheat the oven to 425°F.
    • Roll the dough into a circle about 13 ½" for a 9" pie pan. The easiest way to do this is to roll the dough from the center to the outside. Go around the entire circle of dough this way. Trim to a 13" circle.
    • Pick this up by sliding both hands under the crust and lifting it into the pie plate. It can also be rolled up on a rolling pin and unrolled in the pie plate. Position it so it is even in the plate. There will be a 1" overhang.
    • Turn the overhang underneath the dough at the edge. Flute the edge as shown or as you please. I do not make holes with a fork.
    • Fill and bake as your recipe requires.

    To Blind Bake a Crust which is to bake it empty.

    • After the crust has been completed in the pie plate freeze it until it is rock hard.
    • When ready to bake, spray a large piece of foil with a non-stick baking release. Place it, sprayed side down into the crust shaping it to fit. Do not use parchment paper as it can break when you have to remove the weights.
    • Fill it to the top with beans or rice which I favor over the marble like pie weights and I think they are too heavy and can mark the crust.
    • Bake for 20 minutes with the beans. Remove the beans by bringing the four corners of the foil together and lifting it out. Return the crust to the oven and bake or about 15 to 18 minutes more until evenly browned and baked through.
    • Cool and fill as desired.

    Double Crusted American Pie

    • Divide the dough into two pieces. One about 400 grams and the other 200 grams. Form each int a round about 1" thick. Wrap in plastic wrap and chill for about 2 hours or overnight.
    • Roll the larger amount of pastry as above for the single crust but do not flute the edge.
    • Fill the pastry as desired.
    • Roll the smaller piece into a 12" circle. Wet the overhanging edge of the bottom pastry with water. Place the 12" circle on top and press the edges slightly together. Tuck the overhang underneath and flute the edge.
    • Cut vents in the top.
    • Brush with a beaten egg and sprinkle with sanding sugar.
    • Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil. Place the pie on it. This will make clean up easy if the filling goes over te edge while baking.
    • To prevent the edges from browning too much or burning, it is easier to cover them with foil before you bake than halfway through when it is hot. We did this at the bakery. Halfway through baking we removed the foil from the edges and after baking they were the same color as the rest of the crust. Tear off 3 pieces of foil about 4" wide. Place them over the fluted edges of the crust, covering them front and back.
    • Bake as directed in your recipe.
    • Allow the pie to cool on a cooling rack before serving or freezing.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________________
    Everything should be worked cold - the butter, shortening, egg and water.
    I don't poke holes in the unbaked crusts to prevent liquids from escaping through them. It also keeps them from becoming flaky. If bubbles do pop up, I simple flatten them. 
    If a crust is to be par baked, that means only bake it partially. It will finish in the oven after the filling is added. It needs to be weighted down with beans or rice. 
    A blind baked crust is one that is fully baked and weighted down half way through baking.
    The tray with the pie can be placed on the lowest rack in the oven to ensure the bottom bakes. 
    The egg wash on top is optional but makes for the best looking pies.
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Thanksgiving Pie and Tart Perfection

    Modified: Nov 18, 2025 · Published: Nov 17, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself

    The countdown to Thanksgiving is on! A show stopping dessert is a must, and these pies and tarts have something for everyone. From classic pumpkin to decadent chocolate pecan, find the perfect recipe to complete your feast.

    A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself
    Butter Rum Pecan Tart Recipe
    This Butter-Rum Pecan Tart  is just the easy Thanksgiving desert you're looking for. Fresh pecans abound and are perfect for the amazingly easy pastry tart shell. Golden syrup and a bit of dark rum accentuates the flavor of the toasted nuts for an unbeatable combination that is sure to find a place in your repertoire.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of Butter Rum Pecan Tart on a plate with whipped cream to the side.
    A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself
    Almost No Bake Pumpkin tart
    I don't know how to make an easier dessert than this No Bake Pumpkin Tart.  It takes almost no time and can be made by seasoned bakers as well as beginning bakers with ease. If time is your problem, this is your dessert.
    Check out this recipe
    Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust
    Cranberries and apples are the perfect combination for this pie in a freeform crust that is easy to shape and will have your guests asking for more.
    Check out this recipe
    Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust ready to eat.
    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Pie
    This Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart is a twist on the traditional pecan pie and is the perfect tart to sit next to a pumpkin pie for Thanksgiving. The toasted pecans are sandwiched between a deep chocolate ganache and a homemade caramel, which is very easy to make.
    Check out this recipe
    Caramel Apple Tart
    Caramel Apple Tart is everything you would want in an apple dessert.  Full of apples, spices, brown sugar and brandy, it's covered with walnut streusel and caramel. This was a fall favorite with my clientele at the bakery.
    Check out this recipe
    Slice of Caramel Apple Tart
    Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart
    Pumpkin Cheesecake tart with Caramel Rum Sauce
    This Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart with Caramel Rum Sauce is ease personified in baking. The simple Caramel Rum Sauce can be made weeks ahead and refrigerated. The Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart has a graham cracker crust n and filled with a cream cheese mixture alternated with a pumpkin mixture which are swirled together.
    Check out this recipe
    Cinnamon Whiskey Apple Tart
    An unusual combination of apples, cinnamon whiskey and white balsamic vinegar in a simple to make Pâté Sucrée crust make for one fantastic dessert.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of the Cinnamon Whiskey Apple Tart with ice cream on a plate.
    Cranberry Linzer Tart
    Make Ahead Cranberry Linzer Tart
    Cranberry Linzer Tart with its bright deep red, vibrant,  cranberry filling is a variation of the Viennese Linzer Tart with raspberry filling.  The spiced Linzer pastry is a perfect partner with the cranberries.   It is best made ahead so the flavors can blend making this a natural for the holiday season.  It can also be baked and frozen until needed.
    Check out this recipe
    Honey Thyme Apple tart
    This Honey Thyme Apple Tart is a simple tart that uses brown sugar, honey, and thyme to accentuate the apples.
    Check out this recipe
    Honey Thyme Apple Tart
    A slice of the Apple Crisp Cheesecake sits on a tan oplate with a fork on the plate and a napkin in the background.
    Apple Crisp Cheesecake
    You will love the way the oat, walnut, brown sugar and cinnamon crisp goes with the creamy cheesecake under it with the apple filling on top of the graham cracker crust for this one of a kind cheesecake.
    Check out this recipe

    Unforgettable Breads to Bake and Share

    Modified: Nov 13, 2025 · Published: Nov 14, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls along with their pearl sugared breakfast rolls.

    There's nothing quite like the satisfaction of a freshly baked loaf or rolls. From savory popovers to sweet, swirled babka, these incredible easy bread recipes are surprisingly simple and guaranteed to impress your family and friends.

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and Breakfast Rolls out of one recipe
    Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread Recipe
    This is definitely a treat for anyone who loves chocolate - two different chocolates including a chocolate crumb topping and Dutch cocoa for the most chocolatey taste and look.
    Check out this recipe
    Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.
    A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.
    Cheddar Bacon Popovers
    This Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe will be the easiest you will ever make. There is easy and then there is POPOVER EASY! All of the ingredients, except the cheese and bacon go into a processor or blender and that's pretty much it. Process or blend, portion out the bacon, pour the batter over, sprinkle with cheese and in the oven they go.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Babka Recipe
    My Chocolate Babka Recipe is a visually stunning sweet bread that has a couple of tips to help you shape this marvelous filled yeast dough. For the chocolate filling, I simply used Nutella to highlight the sweet dough for an unparalleled treat that is easier to make than it looks. 
    Check out this recipe
    Slices of English Muffin Bread on a white plate with orange juice, honey and jam with a blue and white napkin in the background.
    English MuffinBread
    Easy English Muffin Bread is possibly the easiest, fastest bread you can make. But the best part is its chewy texture and it tastes just like an English muffin. Slice and toast and you have a breakfast, brunch or an anytime treat.
    Check out this recipe
    Outback Steakhouse Bread
    This incredibly easy Outback Steakhouse Bread dark with honey, molasses, whole wheat and bread flour has become a staple in my house due to its fantastic flavor and soft texture.
    Check out this recipe
    Different ways to shape the Outback Steakhouse Bread are shown.
    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and Breakfast Rolls out of one recipe
    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways
    These Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways with their subtle spicing are an easy recipe that take no time to make but yield great taste. This make ahead, foolproof dough can go from dinner roll to breakfast roll with the addition of one ingredient.
    Check out this recipe
    Super Fast and Easy Brioche Rolls
    These updated, super-fast, and easy Brioche Rolls are the perfect complement to any special dinner and never more so than during the holidays.  When I say super easy, I mean super easy.  Just a quick turn in a food processor and the dough is are ready to rise.
    Check out this recipe
    Two Brioche Rolls are on a plate with a jar of jam.

    Fill Your Home With Autumn Baking

    Modified: Nov 10, 2025 · Published: Nov 10, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 1 Comment

    A slice of the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake sits on a yellow rimmed plate with a napkin in the back ground.

    Get a head start on the season with these totally autumn recipes that are perfect for a chilly weekend. These recipes are filled with all the classic fall flavors like pumpkin, apple, and warm spices that will have everyone asking for more.

    A slice of the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake sits on a yellow and blue rimmed plate with a multi-colored napkin and mug in the background.
    Pumpkin Mousse Torte Recipe
    This Pumpkin Mousse Torte is an exciting change of pace for Thanksgiving dessert....and it can be made ahead of time.
    Check out this recipe
    A singles slice of the torte sits on a cream colored plate rimmed in beige and sliver.
    Eight Pumpkin Pecan Scones sit on a white plate with mugs and spoons in the background.
    Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones Reco[e
    These Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones are perfect for breakfast, brunch or snack. Quickly made with tons of warm spices and toasted pecans, these are finished with an orange glaze and pecans and sanding sugar for a bit of crunch.
    Check out this recipe
    Apple Spice Bundt Cake
    What if I were to tell you this Apple Spice Bundt Cake is as easy to make as falling off a log? What's more it has no apples to peel, core and slice and features a secret ingredient. Finished with a Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting, this cake is filled with the warm spices of fall and is sure to be your newest fall cake.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background.
    A slice of Butter Rum Pecan Tart on a plate with whipped cream to the side.
    Butter Rum Pecan Tart
    This Butter-Rum Pecan Tart screams fall is just about here. Fresh pecans abound and are perfect for the amazingly easy pastry tart shell. Golden syrup and a bit of dark rum accentuates the flavor of the toasted nuts for an unbeatable combination that is sure to find a place in your repertoire.
    Check out this recipe
    Apple Caramel Hand Pies
    These Apple Caramel Hand Pies feature my Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe that mimics puff pastry without all the fuss. There are no butter blocks to contend with, no butter breaking through and not worries. With apple season just around the corner, what could be better than caramels and apples enclosed in a flaky pastry?
    Check out this recipe
    Two golden half moon hand pies with slits showing the apple filling sit on an Irish decorated platter.
    Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a blue and yellow cloth and yellow smiley face tea cup,,
    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins
    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins with pecan streusel couldn't be any easier. Two bowls and a few measuring utensils, a whisk and, a rubber spatula are all that are needed. Combine the dry ingredients in one bowl, the liquid ingredients in another, mix them together, plop them in the cups and into the oven they go.
    Check out this recipe
    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake
    This Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake is the perfect cake for crumb lovers. The ratio of crumbs to cake is almost equal and that's my type of coffee cake. A river of cinnamon apples runs through a sour cream coffee cake that stays softly delicious for days under a cake cover.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake sits on a yellow and blue rimmed plate with a multi-colored napkin and mug in the background.
    Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie slice on a plate with the pie plate in the background.
    Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie
    Apple pies scream autumn and this one has a unique cinnamon bun topping. Here you find the classic apple pie topped with a cinnamon bun topping. It's a fun twist on a great dessert.
    Check out this recipe

    Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread Recipe

    Modified: Nov 7, 2025 · Published: Nov 7, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

    Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.

    Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread is not only variable but can be stashed in the freezer for a quick addition to breakfast, brunch or snacking. This is definitely a treat for anyone who loves chocolate - two different chocolates including a chocolate crumb topping and Dutch cocoa for the most chocolatey taste and look.

    Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.

    This recipe has been updated with new photography as well as step by step instructions. In addition to the quick bread, it makes great muffins.

    Other great quick breads include: Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones Recipe, Cream Biscuits, Best Two Step Banana Bread, Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones, and Heavenly French Toast with Blueberry Compote.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Baking Pans

    Baking pans are not all created equal. Thicker pans will often take a bit longer to bake than lighter ones. Color is also important. The darker the color the quicker the product will brown. So if a recipe is not fully baked within the time given, just add a few minutes to the baking time until it tests done. Conversely, if baking in a dark pan, check the item sooner. All of this depends upon the temperature of your oven being correct. For more in-depth information on the materials used and it affects baking, see my post Baking Pans.

    What makes this bread intriguing

    • There are two classic flavors in this recipe. Chocolate with orange and cranberries with orange. When you combine all of these flavors it can't be anything but a hit!
    • The cranberries are used raw and frozen so there is no cooking involved.
    • It's really easy to make.
    • The recipe is straight forward and quick to make.
    • This is a flavor combination that is sure to please.
    • It works for a loaf of bread or muffins. Take your pick.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Chocolate Crumbs

    The ingredients for the chocolate crumbs are unsalted butter, brown sugar, cake flour, cocoa, cinnamon and salt,

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, table salt

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, cocoa

    BACK ROW: Brown sugar, all-purpose flour

    Chocolate Cranberry Bread

    The ingredients for the Chocolate Cranberry Bread include, semisweet chocolate, unsalted butter, cranberries, all-purpose flour, cocoa, baking power, baking soda ,eggs, granulated sugar, orange zest, sour cream, vanilla, chocolate chunks.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla, baking soda, orange zest, baking powder

    SECOND ROW: Cinnamon, unsalted butter, sour cream

    THIRD ROW: Chocolate Chunks, granulated sugar, semisweet chocolate

    BACK ROW: Eggs, all-purpose flour, frozen cranberries

    Key Ingredients

    • Orange Zest can be had with 1 large orange. Navel oranges are usually best as they yield more zest and it is sometimes dryer. A bit more or less is fine. When zesting, be sure not to go too deep. You do not want to include the pith as it can be bitter. Using a microplaner is preferred to a box grater. Do not use juice oranges. They don't yield as much zest.
    • I used Dutch cocoa for its mellow flavor and the darker finish to the bread. It's also important because of the increased amount of baking powder over baking soda.
    • Dark Brown Sugar adds an intensity to the chocolate bread. Light brown can be substituted if necessary.
    • Sour Cream adds moisture and flavor to the bread.
    • There are two types of chocolate used. Chocolate chunks are used to intensify the depth of chocolate. Chocolate chips can be subbed. The second is semisweet chocolate.
    • Semisweet chocolate provides the base for the chocolate. Chocolate chips should not but used here as they don't have the depth of flavor as does unadulterated semisweet chocolate. The chocolate I use is Callebaut #811 Chocolate Callets. Although they look like chips they are pure chocolate.
    • The cranberries must be frozen for this recipe to work. They should be frozen hard then coarsely chopped in the food processor and incorporated at once into the batter. Used this way they will not add any liquid to the batter when baked.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Be sure the cranberries are solidly frozen before proceeding.

    This collages shows the frozen cranberries in the processor, processed into pieces, the dry ingredients for the chocolate crumbs in the processor, and the butter added,.

    Step 1. Place the frozen cranberries in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process briefly with pulses into large, small and some whole cranberries. Transfer the cranberries to a bowl and place in the freezer.  Step 3. Place all the dry ingredients for the chocolate crumbs in a processor bowl. Process to mix. Step 4. Add the butter to the processor in a circle over the dry ingredients. Process briefly to bring the ingredients together. Pulse with long pulses until it forms crumbs. Be patient and scrape down. Make quicker pulses as it starts to come together. Do not over process or it will form a paste.

    The crumbs are on a sheet tray, an orange is zested, teh butter and chocolate are in a bowl to be microwaved and the chocolate/butter mixture is smooth and liqud

    Step 5. Pour the crumbs onto a quarter sheet pan and refrigerate while proceeding. Step 6. Zest the orange. Do not go too far into the pith or it will be bitter. I like to use a microplaner instead of a box grater. Navel oranges yield more zest than juice oranges. Step 7. Place the butter and semisweet chocolate together in a microwave bowl. Microwave on half power until the chocolate appears shiny and the butter is melted. Step 8. Whisk together. If chocolate is not completely melted, let it sit for a couple of minutes and whisk again. If still not smooth briefly microwave at half power again.

    The flour, cocoa, baking powder and baking soda are in a bowl, the sifted with lumps of cocoa in a strainer, the dry ingredients mixed and the eggs, granulated sugar and orange zest in a mixer bowl.

    Step 9. Combine the flour, cocoa, baking powder and baking soda together. Step 10. Sift the mixture over waxed paper. Cocoa often has lumps in it that will not break down with just whisking it together. Push the lumps through with a spoon. Step 11. Whisk together. Step 12. Place the eggs, granulated sugar and orange zest in the bowl of a mixer. 

    This collage shows the eggs, granulated sugar and orange rind mixed in the bowl, the sour cream and vanilla added, then mixed anf finally the chocolate/butter added.

    Step 13. Mix until thoroughly combined. This took about 3 minutes on medium in my Breville. Scrape down as needed. Step 14. Add the sour cream and vanilla. Step 15. Beat on low until completely combined, scraping down as needed. Step 16. Add the cooled chocolate/butter mixture.

    The frozen cranberries are in the processor bowl, processed to make a variety of sizes, then they are added with the chocolate chunks to the batter and mixed in on low.

    Step 17. Mix on low until combined, scraping as needed. Step 18. Add all the flour and once and beat on low to combine. Step 19. Add the cranberries and chocolate chunks into the batter. Step 19. Beat until combined.

    The final collage shows the tray of crumbs and the bowl of batter, a loaf pan with the batter and crumbs on top, 3 muffins and the baked quick bread and muffins.

    Step 21. Have the crumbs and batter ready. Step 22. Place a parchment liner on the bottom of the pan and spray the entire pan, including the parchment with a non-stick baking release. Fill the loaf pan about with about ¾ of the batter or 915 grams. Top with about ¾ of the crumbs or 170 grams. Step 23. Line three jumbo muffin pans with paper cups and divide the remainder of the batter between them. Top with the crumbs. Step 24. Bake as directed.

    Recipe FAQS

    Can dried cranberries be used instead of fresh?

    Not for this recipe. It is important to use the fresh cranberries so they can be frozen and chopped. They also taste differently than dried cranberries as their flavor is concentrated due to drying.

    What is the difference between quick breads and yeast breads?

    Quick breads use baking soda and baking powder which are chemical leavening agents for quick breads. They will cause the bread to rise quickly, hence the word quick breads. While yeast also leavens bread, it is a much slower process resulting in a different outcome.

    What are some other quick breads?

    Banana Bread, Zucchini Bread, Cheddar Cheese, Carrot Bread, Soda Bread. Also, muffins, pancakes, waffles, scones, popovers, tortillas and cornbread are all considered quick breads.

    Expert Tips

    • The cranberries have to be frozen before chopping and incorporated from the frozen state.
    • Both semisweet chocolate and chocolate chunks are used. Chocolate chips can be substituted for the chocolate chunks if necessary.
    • Dutch chocolate is used for its dark color and mellow taste. I don't suggest using natural cocoa as it requires different amounts of the leavening agents.
    • Six regular size muffins can be made instead of the larger ones.
    Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.

    Other Tasty Quick Breads You Will Enjoy

    • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
    • A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.
      Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe
    • This photo shows an open cranberry vanilla muffin sitting on top of more muffins.
      Cranberry Muffins Recipe
    • Apple Fritters with Speculass Spice
      Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.

    Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread is definitely a treat for anyone who loves chocolate - two different chocolates including a chocolate crumb topping and Dutch cocoa for the most chocolatey taste and look.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Course Quick Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 482 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x5 loaf pan and a regular size muffin pan or jumbo muffin pan.
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Chocolate Crumbs

    • 6 tablespoons butter, cold (90 grams)
    • ½ cup brown sugar (100 grams)
    • ¾ cup cake flour (100 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons Dutch cocoa (14 grams)
    • ¾ teaspoon cinnamon
    • ⅓ teaspoon salt

    Chocolate Cranberry Bread

    • 6 ounces semisweet chocolate (170 grams)
    • ½ cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • 2 cups frozen cranberries (200 grams)
    • 1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour (245 grams)
    • ¼ cup Dutch cocoa (23 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • 3 large eggs
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams)
    • Zest 1 large orange
    • ¾ cup sour cream (170 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla (McCormick is fine ])
    • ½ cup chocolate chunks (85 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Chocolate Crumb Topping

    • Cut the cold butter into pieces.
    • Place the dry ingredients in the processor bowl and pulse several times to mix.
    • Circle the cold butter over the dry ingredients and pulse the processor until crumbs form. Do not be impatient and to not over process or you will have a paste. Refrigerate while you make the batter.

    Chocolate Cranberry Bread

    • Due to the fact this is a very heavy batter, use a regular paddle attachment and not a scraper attachment if you have one.
    • Preheat the oven to 325°F. Line the bottom of a 9x5 loaf pan with parchment paper. Spray the pan, including the parchment with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Cut the chocolate in small pieces. Melt the butter and chocolate in the top of a double boiler or in the microwave at half power until the chocolate is shiny and the butter is melted. Whisk to smooth out. If there is any unmelted chocolate, let it sit for a few minutes and whisk again. If there are still a few, briefly microwave and whisk.
    • Wipe out the processor bowl and add the frozen cranberries. They must be frozen hard. Pulse to coarsely chop them but don't get them too small. There should be large pieces or even some whole cranberries. Place in the freezer while you finish the batter.
    • Whisk together the flour, cocoa, baking powder, and baking soda. It's best at this point to place the mixture in a strainer to make sure there are no lumps of cocoa left. If there are, push them through with a spoon. Mix well.
    • Place the eggs, granulated sugar and orange zest in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until completely combined, scraping down as necessary. It took about 3 minutes in my Breville on medium.
    • Add the sour cream and vanilla, mixing well, followed by the chocolate/butter. Mix well and scrape down.
    • Add the dry ingredients and mix on low. When most of the flour has been mixed in, add the frozen cranberries and chunk chocolate. Beat on low until all the ingredients are incorporated. The batter will be very heavy.
    • Place about ¾ of the batter (915 grams) in the 9x5 pan. Smooth is flat and spread about ¾ of the chocolate crumbs (about 170 grams) evenly over the top, pressing them in lightly.
    • Place paper liners in 3 jumbo muffin wells or 6 regular size wells and divide the remaining batter and crumbs among them.
    • Bake the chocolate cranberry quick bread for about 70 to 75 minutes or until a tester comes out clean. Cover the top loosely with foil about ⅔ through. Bake the muffins about 28 to 30 minutes for the jumbos or 15 to 20 for the regular size.
    • Cool about 15 minutes before going around the sides of the loaf pan with a metal spatula and placing on a cooling rack. The muffins can be remove after about 1o minutes by lifting them out by the edge of the paper liners.
    • Either of these may be frozen, wrapped well and kept for 3 months or so. Thaw at room temperature.
    • Dust with powdered sugar before serving.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article. Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume. For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used. 
    ________________________________________________
    The cranberries have to be frozen before chopping and incorporated from the frozen state.
    Both semisweet chocolate and chocolate chunks are used. Chocolate chips can be substituted for the chocolate chunks if necessary.
    Dutch chocolate is used for its dark color and mellow taste. I don't suggest using natural cocoa as it requires different amounts of the leavening agents. 
    Six regular size muffins can be made instead of the 3 larger ones.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 482kcalCarbohydrates: 57gProtein: 7gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 92mgSodium: 256mgPotassium: 261mgFiber: 4gSugar: 31gVitamin A: 590IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 96mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Pumpkin Mousse Torte Recipe

    Modified: Nov 27, 2025 · Published: Oct 31, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 35 Comments

    Pumpkin Mousse with a graham cracker crust, cheesecake layer topped with pumpkin mousse finished with a wreath of whipped cream

    This Pumpkin Mousse Torte Recipe is exactly that new dessert you're looking to serve during the holidays. This was, without question, the most popular dessert we made at the bakery for the fall months including Thanksgiving. The crumb crust, topped with a cheesecake layer and finished with a light, but intense pumpkin mousse soon became everyone's favorite.

    This is an update of the original recipe that included raw eggs which I removed due to concerns about them. I found they were completely unnecessary as the torte is every bit as good without them.

    A slice of the Pumpkin Mousse Recipe sits on a beige and silver rimmed plate with the whole torte on a cake stand behind it.

    Pumpkin Mousse Recipe is an easily made dessert that can be made ahead and frozen. In fact, that is exactly how we sold them to our clientele when I had the bakery. It takes one more thing off of a busy to-do list for Thanksgiving.

    Looking for more than one fabulous dessert for the holidays? Here are a few more suggestions: Almost No Bake Pumpkin Tart, Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie, Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust (so much easier than a tradition pie), Butter-Rum Pecan Tart, Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart, Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart with Caramel Rum Sauce, or try one of our snackables Cranberry Muffins Recipe, Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins (with a streusel top), the Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe or the easiest ever Apple Cake Doughnuts.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It's absolutely loaded with flavor.
    • Easy to make yet delicious and beautiful.
    • The Pumpkin Mousse Recipe is impressive looking and it will amaze your family and guests.
    • It can be made ahead and thawed in the fridge.
    • It's simply the best dessert for Thanksgiving when you're giving that pie a rest.

    How To Use The Leftover Pumpkin

    I know how irritating it is to use a portion of a product and be stuck with the rest. What are you supposed to do with it? Well I have some really tasty ideas to get you started. You can actually make several of these out of the remaining puree.

    • Make 3 times the recipe for the Pumpkin Pecan Scones - they are that good! Freeze some for a treat for breakfast, brunch or a snack. Thaw as needed.
    • The Pumpkin Mousse Torte is a perineal favorite that has been sitting at the top of Goggle since 2019. That should tell you a lot!
    • Make the Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins with a pecan streusel.
    • The Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways
    • Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart with Caramel Rum Sauce
    • Last Years favorite - (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart
    • And don't forget about the really fast Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe

    Recipe Ingredients

    Graham Cracker Crust

    Ingredients for the Pumpkin Mousse Recipe include graham crackers, unsalted butter and brown sugar.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, brown sugar

    BACK ROW: Graham Crackers

    Cheesecake Layer

    Ingredients for the cheesecake layer are cream cheese, vanilla, eggs and granulated sugar.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla extract, cream cheese

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, eggs and egg yolk

    Pumpkin Mousse Recipe

    The Pumpkin Mousse ingredients include gelatin, water, heavy cream, canned umpkin, powdered sugar, vanilla extract, salt, cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg, and cloves.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla extract, gelatin, nutmeg, ginger

    MIDDLE ROW: Salt, cinnamon, water, cloves

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, canned pumpkin, heavy cream

    Whipped Cream Wreath

    The ingredients for the whipped cream wreath are powdered sugar and heavy cream.

    LEFT TO RIGHT: Powdered Sugar, heavy cream

    Key Ingredients

    • Not all graham crackers are made the same way. Consequently, some will take more or less butter to bind them. Because this crust is baked, it doesn't require as much butter as unbaked crusts. These should stick together when pressed into the pan.
    • Either light or dark brown sugar can be used.
    • Full fat or ⅓ less fat cream cheese can be used for the cream cheese layer.
    • Look for cans of pumpkin that say 100% or Real pumpkin. Libby has both labels. Some cans marked "pumpkin" use a different squash that is very much, in color and taste, like pumpkin but is actually kobacha also known as Japanese pumpkin.
    • While I used vanilla that cost $400 a gallon at the restaurant, I also used McCormick Imitation Vanilla for recipes heavy in chocolate or spices. McCormick Imitation Vanilla is fine here. See my post, The Making of Vanilla to learn more about the fascinating world of vanillas.
    • Heavy cream is higher in fat content, whips up better and holds with no stabilizers. We used it for fillings, to frost cakes and as an ingredient in other recipes. At no time did we stabilize it in any way - no gelatin, corn starch or anything. If frozen, it thawed beautifully. This only works with heavy or 40% cream.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Graham Cracker Crust

    The first collage shows the crumbs for the crust, the butter added, the mixture being stirred and the finished crumbs in the pan.

    Step 1. Combine the crumbs and brown sugar in a bowl. Step 2. Add the melted butter. Step 3. Start mixing with a fork to moisten the crumbs. I usually end up using my hand because it's faster and does a better job. Step 4. Pour the crumbs into a cheesecake or springform pan that has been sprayed with a non-stick baking release.

    The final steps for the graham cracker crust include distributing the crumbs evenly in the pan, pressing them firmly into the bottom of the pan, using a spoon to seal the edges of the crumbs to the pan and the finished crust.

    Step 5. Distribute the crumbs evenly over the bottom of the pan. Step 6. Press them firmly into the bottom. Step 7. Using the back of a spoon, press the edges firmly into the side of the pan so no filling can leak under the crust. Step 8. This is what the finished crust should look like. Bake as called for.

    The Cheesecake Filling for the Pumpkin Mousse Recipe

    The cheesecake filling is made by processing the cream cheese, adding the sugar and vanilla, then the eggs and egg yolk and the last photo shows the prepared filling in the processor

    Step 9. Cut the room temperature cream cheese into 4 pieces and add it to the processor. Process until smooth. Step. 10. Add the sugar and vanilla, processing until smooth. Scrape down as necessary. Step 11. Add the whole eggs and yolk. Step 12. Process, until everything is combined and smooth. Make sure to scrape well so no lumps are left.

    For this collage the cheesecake filling is poured into the crust, the baked layer is in the pan, the heavy cream is in the mxing bowl and then beaten.

    Step 13. Pour the cream cheese layer over the baked crumb crust. Step 14. Bake as called for. It should be browned around the edge of the pan only. The top will be white with no wiggle. Cool completely before proceeding. Step 15. Pour the cream into the bowl of a mixer. Step 16. Using the whisk attachment, beat the cream until medium stiff peaks form. Do not beat to stiff peaks. Remove the cream to another bowl and set aside. There is no reason to clean the bowl before continuing.

    The Pumpkin Mousse Recipe

    This collage shows the gelatin in the water, then bloomed, the mousse ingredients in a mixing bowl and mixed.

    Step 17. Combine the water and gelatin. Stir together to moisten all of the gelatin. Step 18. Set aside to let it bloom. Step 19. Place all of the ingredients for the mousse except the cream and gelatin in the mixing bowl. (In this photo there are eggs. This is an updated version and they have been removed from this Pumpkin Mousse Recipe.) Step 20. Mix the ingredients just until combined. Liquify the gelatin in the microwave for a few seconds and pour it into over the ingredients. Immediately, mix it in completely but gently.

    In this collage, the cream has been returned to the bowl and is being folded in, it is poured over the cheesecake layer and smoothed out.

    Step 21. Return the whipped cream to the bowl and fold together. Step 22. Pour the mousse over the cheesecake layer Step 23. Using a small offset spatula, smooth out the filling. Step 24. The finished torte should be refrigerated overnight or for a couple of days.

    This collage shows the blow dryer about a quarter inch away from the pan to release the torte, the side of the pan slid down releasing the ak, the edge of the cake being pipied with whipping cream and the finished torte,

    Step 25. To release the cake go around the edge of pan with a blow dryer about a quarter inch away. This will gently heat the torte. Step 26. Place the pan on a wide can (a 28 ounce can is perfect) and slide the rim of the pan down. Place the torte on the table and use two pancake turners placed between the cake and the metal bottom. Lift it off onto a cake round or serving plate. Step 27. Whip the cream for the whipped cream wreath until fairly stiff. Fit a piping bag with a #5 or #6 open star and fill it with the cream. Pipe a wreath around the edge of the Pumpkin Mousse Recipe. Step 28. Sprinkle the wreath with coarsely chopped pecans if desired. Refrigerate until serving.

    It is best to freeze the Pumpkin Mousse Recipe without the whipped cream wreath as it can be damaged easily. Thaw it in the refrigerator overnight. Remove it from the pan if frozen in the pan and finish with the wreath.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Who was the first President to pardon a turkey?

    George H.W. Bush in 1989.

    Are pumpkins a fruit or a vegetable?

    They are a fruit because they grow from a flower and contain seeds. The entire plant, including the flower and seeds can be eaten. The word pumpkin comes from the Greek word "pepon" meaning "large melon.

    What spices are contained in the traditional pumpkin spice?

    Cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg, cloves and sometimes allspice.

    Storage and Freezing

    The Pumpkin Mousse Recipe can be stored in the fridge for up to 4 days. It can be frozen for a month. If freezing it is best to do so without the whipped cream wreath around the edge. Simply freeze it in or out of it's pan then wrap it well in foil. Thaw it in the fridge then finish it.

    Expert Tips

    • I find a cheesecake pan is easier to use and from which to release the product. They are also easier to clean.Springform pans often have a ridge at the bottom that makes getting them off the bottom can be difficult.
    • Baking the graham crust bottom ensures it will not become soggy.
    • Make sure the cheesecake layer is fully baked with no jiggle.
    A singles slice of the torte sits on a cream colored plate rimmed in beige and sliver.

    Looking for More Great Holiday Desserts?

    • Pumpkin Cheesecake with Salted Caramel Sauce
      Pumpkin Cheesecake with Salted Caramel Sauce
    • Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust ready to eat.
      Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust
    • Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie slice on a plate with the pie plate in the background.
      Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie
    • The Banana Bread Bread Pudding sits in a white bowl covered with the bourbon pecan sauce on a yellow and white background.
      Banana Bread Bread Pudding

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Pumpkin Mousse with a graham cracker crust, cheesecake layer topped with pumpkin mousse finished with a wreath of whipped cream

    Pumpkin Mousse Torte Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Pumpkin Mousse Torte Recipe was the most popular dessert we made at the bakery for the fall months including Thanksgiving.  The crumb crust, topped with a cheesecake layer and finished with a light, but intense pumpkin mousse soon became everyone's favorite.
    4.67 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 50 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 441 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1 9x3 cheesecake or springform pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Graham Cracker Crust

    • 1 ¼ cups graham cracker crumbs (140 grams)
    • ¼ cup brown sugar, packed (50 grams)
    • 4 tablespoons butter, melted (60 grams or ½ stick)

    Cheesecake Layer

    • 8 ounces cream cheese, softened (225 grams)
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams)
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 large egg yolk
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Pumpkin Mousse

    • 1 tablespoon gelatin
    • 5 tablespoons cold water
    • 1 ½ cups heavy cream
    • 2 ⅔ cups canned pumpkin (570 grams or 1 ¼ 15 oz. cans)
    • ⅔ cup powdered sugar (85 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla
    • ¾ teaspoon salt
    • 1 ¼ teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon ginger
    • ¼ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ⅛ teaspoon cloves

    Whipped Cream Decoration

    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 3 tablespoons powdered sugar
    • pecan pieces as needed, optional

    Instructions
     

    Graham Cracker Crust

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray the bottom and sides of a 9x3" cheesecake or springform pan with a non-stick baking rlelease. Set aside.
    • If using ready made crumbs, combine them with the brown sugar. Mox well. Add the melted butter and mix with a fork to start coating the crumbs. After initially coating them, I use my hand to mix them as it is so much faster and better.
    • If using whole graham crackers, crush them between your hands and put them in the bowl of the food processor. Process to make crumbs, but do ot turn it to powder. Add the brown sugar and pulse several times to mix well. Transfer to a bowl, add themelted butter and stir with a fork to initially mix. As above, I prefer to finish with my hand but either way is fine.
    • In either case, arrange the crumbs evenly over the pan and press in firmly with the heel of your hand. Bake for 10 minutes.
    • There is no need to clean the processor bowl for the next step. Simply wipe it out with a paper towel.

    Cheesecake Layer

    • While the crust is baking, prepare the cheesecake layer. Cut the softened cream cheese into fourths. Place evenly around the processor. Process until it is smooth; add the granulated sugar and vanilla. Process until smooth, scraping down as necessary.
    • Add the eggs and yolk and process again until smooth. Scrape down well so no cream cheese is visible.
    • Pour over the crust and bake for 20 to 25 minutes until completely set. It will be somewhat browned along the edge of the crust but there should be no color on top and it will not jiggle. Remove from the oven immediately and cool completely before proceeding.

    Pumpkin Mousse

    • In a mixing bowl, beat the cram with a whisk attachment until medium peaks form. Do not beat until stiff or it will be difficult to fold in. Remove to a bowl and refrigerate until needed. There is no need to clean the bowl.
    • Combine the gelatin and cold water in a small bowl. Stir well and set aside to bloom.
    • In the same mixing bowl, add all of the ingredients except the whipped cream and gelatin. Mix briefly to combine.
    • Liquify the gelatin by heating it in the microwave for 5 to 10 seconds. With the mixer running, pour it in being careful to pour it between the edge of the bowl and the whisk. Mix for about a minute or two to make sure the gelatin is evenly incorporated.
    • Fold in the whipped cream. Pour it over the cheesecake layer and smooth out the top.
    • Refrigerate overnight or freeze at this point.

    Whipped Cream Wreath

    • Whip the cream and powdered sugar to the stiff peak stage. Fit a piping bag with a #5 or 6 open star tip. Pipe a wreath around the edge of the Pumpkin Mousse Torte and sprinkle with coarsely chopped pecans if using.
    • The torte can be refrigerated up to 3 days. Serve from the refrigerator.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ___________________________________________________
    Not all graham crackers are made the same way. Consequently, some will take more or less butter to bind them. Because this crust is baked, it doesn't require as much butter as unbaked crusts. These should stick together when pressed into the pan.
    Either light or dark brown sugar can be used. 
    Full fat or ⅓ less fat cream cheese can be used for the cream cheese layer.
    Look for cans of pumpkin that say 100% or Real pumpkin. Libby has both labels. Some cans marked "pumpkin" use a different squash that is very much, in color and taste, like pumpkin but is actually kobacha also known as Japanese pumpkin.
    While I used vanilla that cost $400 a gallon at the restaurant, I also used McCormick Imitation Vanilla for recipes heavy in chocolate or spices. McCormick Imitation Vanilla is fine here. See my post, The Making of Vanilla to learn more about the fascinating world of vanillas.
    Heavy cream is higher in fat content, whips up better and holds with no stabilizers. We used it for fillings, to frost cakes and as an ingredient in other recipes. At no time did we stabilize it in any way - no gelatin, corn starch or anything. If frozen, it thawed beautifully. This only works with heavy or 40% cream.
    I find a cheesecake pan is easier to use and from which to release the product. They are also easier to clean. Springform pans often have a ridge at the bottom that makes getting them off the bottom can be difficult.
    Baking the graham crust bottom ensures it will not become soggy.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 441kcalCarbohydrates: 40gProtein: 5gFat: 30gSaturated Fat: 18gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 116mgSodium: 323mgPotassium: 222mgFiber: 2gSugar: 32gVitamin A: 9618IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 85mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Non Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding

    Modified: Oct 24, 2025 · Published: Oct 21, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

    An individual Sticky Toffee Pudding sits in a puddle of Lemon Sauce in a yellow and white bowl.

    If you're looking for a low stress quickly made holiday dessert this Non Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding is not to be missed. While often thought of as overwhelmingly sweet, this one is not. The easily made individual sponge cakes are rich, moist, served warm with one of two sauces - traditional Toffee Sauce or a Lemon Rum sauce for a change.

    So why is this non traditional? Because the dates are cooked with a bit of Kahlua which enhances the taste and both sauces contain a bit of dark rum for depth.

    An individual Sticky Toffee Pudding sits in a puddle of Lemon Sauce in a yellow and white bowl.

    I had a bit of fun researching this recipe. I found it is steamed, it isn't steamed (at least not anymore), it has spices, oh, no it doesn't, it can be soaked in toffee sauce but doesn't have to be, it's served hot but can be served cold (if you are a bore), it is accompanied by whipped cream, no make that ice cream.

    The two things everyone agrees on it is made with dates that are softened in hot or boiling water and it is served with toffee sauce accompanied by whipped cream, creme anglaise, or ice cream or just toffee sauce. Or it used to be - now there's a Lemon Rum Sauce to go with it.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What's the best date for the Toffee Pudding?

    For the purposes of this recipe all dates are not created equal. The premier date is Fresh Medjool Dates. Native to Morocco, Medjool dates come from the date palm tree and are now grown in warm regions of the United States, the Middle East, South Asia, and Africa. There are a couple of great articles, 6 Benefits of Medjool Dates and Everything you Need to Know About Medjool Dates that fill you in on all the benefits of this amazing fruit.

    Fresh Medjool dates are not the same as dried dates and therein lies the difference for me. They are harvested at their peak of ripeness when their moisture content is high making them soft and chewy with a caramel like texture. On the other hand, "dried dates" are dehydrated making them firmer in texture and sweeter. I made this several times because the first time I used a package of dates found in the dried fruit department of the grocery store. I found it to be bland. So I went to my usual go-to Medjool dates and it made a big difference.

    Here are a few things to look for when preparing them to cook with:

    This collage on dates shows the package of Medjool dates, the dates out of the package, two dates one with the stem end, one withough and the date split open to show no seed.

    1. Medjool dates come pitted and with pits. I'm not sure about you but I have better things to do than pit dates. 2. The size of the dates is at least twice as big as other dates and they are moist as opposed to dry. 3. Look carefully at the dates as some of them still have their stem end on as you can see on the one on the left. On the right date, I have removed it. 4. The other thing to look for is the pit or stone. These dates are split from top to bottom so it is easy to open them to make sure there are no pits.

    What to do with the remaining dates?

    There are three really good ways to use these up. The first is the Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins. While the recipe calls for 8 ounces, the remaining 6 ounces are fine. The second recipe is the fantastic and easy Date Nut Bread which makes a great ham and cheese sandwich. The final offering is the Orange Date Bread Pudding.

    This Toffee Pudding is:

    • Super Simple to make in a processor in just a couple of steps.
    • Packed with flavor and perfectly balanced.
    • Everything can be made ahead of time.
    • It simplicity belies the richness and complexity of taste.
    • Everyone loves and individual dessert and this one presents beautifully.

    Variations

    • Adding the grated zest of a medium size orange makes this an even more amazing dessert. It's one of my favorite things to do.
    • Also, the addition of ½ cup of coarsely chopped toasted walnuts or pecans adds a bit of texture with or without the orange zest.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Toffee Puddings

    The ingredients for the Non Traditional Toffee Pudding are:  Medjool dates, Kahlua liqueur, water, baking soda, all-purpose flour, baking powder, salt, unsalted butter, sugar, vanilla and eggs.

    FRONT ROW: Baking powder, salt, baking soda, vanilla

    MIDDLE ROW: Kahlua, eggs, unsalted butter, medjool dates

    BACK ROW: Brown sugar, all-purpose flour, water

    Toffee Sauce

    Ingredients for the Toffee sauce include:  Golden syrup, unsalted butter, dark rum, brown sugar, heavy cream.

    FRONT ROW: Golden Syrup (or honey or clear corn syrup), unsalted butter, dark rum ( such as Meyer's)

    BACK ROW: Dark brown sugar, heavy cream

    Lemon Sauce

    Ingredients for the Lemon Sauce include, lemon juice, sugar, water, unsalted butter, dark rum and salt.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, dark rum, cornstarch

    BACK ROW: Lemon juice, granulated sugar, water

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage for the Non Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding includes the the dates, water and Kahlua coming to a boil then transfered to the processor and processed.

    Step 1. Spray six jumbo muffin cups or 6 ounce ramekins or a 12 well muffin pan for smaller puddings with a non-stick baking release. Set aside. Place the dates, Kahlua, and water in a medium size saucepan with high sides as this will boil up quite high. Bring to a boil. Step 2. Remove from the heat and heat and add the baking soda. The liquid will rise up quickly and then subside. Step 3. Place the dates and liquid in the bowl of a food processor. Step 4. Process until pureed. Cool.

    This collage shows the flour, salt and baking powder in a bowl to be mixed, the eggs, butter, sugar and vanilla added to the bowl and mixed, the flour added and the final batter.

    Step 5. Add the baking powder and salt to the flour and whisk. Set aside. Step 6. Add the butter, eggs, brown sugar and butter to the processor bowl. Process until smooth. Step 7. Add the flour. Step 8. Pulse quickly 3 or 4 times just to mix the flour in. Do not over mix. Divide the mixture between the molds, using about ½ cup less 1 tablespoons per mold or 140 grams. Bake as directed.

    In this collage the batter has been poured into the molds and baked, they are being flattened with a measuring cup as they have domed ,and then they are turned out.

    Step 9. The puddings have domed and need to be flattened. Step 10. I found the best way to do this is to use a 1 cup measure about the size of the top of the molds. Step 11. As soon as they come from the oven, press down hard with the cup to flatten them. Wipe the bottom of the cup each time to prevent the cake from sticking to the cup. Do it again if necessary. Step 12. Cool for about 10 to 15 minutes and turn the puddings out onto a cooling rack to cool completely.

    The Lemon Sauce shows the sugar and cornstarch being mixed, all the ingredients in a medium pan, brought to a rolling boil and the finished sauce.

    Step 13. For the lemon sauce, whisk together the flour and baking powder in a medium size saucepan. Step 14. Add the remaining ingredients. Step 15. Bring to a boil while stirring. Stop stirring and let the sauce boil hard for 1 minute. 16. Remove from the heat and pour into a bowl.

    In this collage a skewer is making holes in the puddings, all six on the  tray are skewered, the sauce is poured into the pudding and da finished toffee pudding is covered with the lemon sauce in a yellow and white bowl.

    Step 17. With a skewer that is about ⅛ to ¼" thick, poke holes in the pudding. Rotate the skewer to widen the hole. Try not to go all the way through to the bottom of the puddings or the sauce will run out. Step 18. Continue until all of the puddings have been prepared. Step 19. Pour a large spoon of the lemon sauce over the top so it drips down into the holes. Let it sit for several minutes and repeat. Step 20. When serving, microwave each pudding for about 10 to 20 seconds to warm it up and then place it in a bowl and pour more sauce over it.

    Here you see the ingredients for the toffee sauce in a medium size pan, brought to a boil, then falling down and the finished sauce.

    Step 21. To make the toffee sauce, place everything but the cornstarch in a medium size sauce pan. Step 22. Bring the mixture to a rolling boil. Mix the cornstarch with the water and add it to the sauce. Bring it back to a boil and boil for 1 minute. Step 24. Pour the toffee sauce into a bowl. Pour a large spoonful over the prepared puddings and follow the instructions for the lemon sauce.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    What is the origin of sticky pudding?

    According to Wikipedia, "The pudding was invented in 1907 by the landlady of the Gait Inn in Millington, East Riding of Yorkshire, but was popularised in the 1970s by Francis Coulson and Robert Lee, who developed and served it at the Sharrow Bay Country House Hotel in Cumbria.[4][5]"

    If it's actually a cake why is it called a pudding?

    Because the English refer to desserts as puddings. They are not what Americans call puddings.

    Why is baking soda used with the dates?

    Dates are very fibrous. The baking soda softens the dates and break down the fibers allowing the dates to make a smooth paste. It also reacts with the acidic nature of the dates and brown sugar as well as aiding it the cake rising.

    This photograph shows a sticky toffee pudding enveloped in toffee sauce on a white plate.

    More Yummy Puddings

    • The Banana Bread Bread Pudding sits in a white bowl covered with the bourbon pecan sauce on a yellow and white background.
      Banana Bread Bread Pudding
    • Orange Date Bread Pudding with Hard Sauce drizzled on
      Orange Date Bread Pudding
    • Orange Bread Pudding
      Orange Bread Pudding
    • The Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding is shown partial opened up with a blubeberry sauce dripping down it on a white plate,
      Easy Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    An individual Sticky Toffee Pudding sits in a puddle of Lemon Sauce in a yellow and white bowl.

    Non Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding

    Helen S. Fletcher
    If you're looking for a low stress quickly made holiday dessert this Non Traditional Sticky Toffee Pudding this recipe is not to be missed.
    4.50 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 40 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine English
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 995 kcal

    Equipment

    • A 6 well jumbo muffin pan or 6 6 ounce ramekins or a 12 well regular muffin pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Toffee Pudding Sponge

    • 6 ounces Medjool dates (170 grams)
    • ⅓ cup Kahlua liqueur
    • ⅞ cup water (1 cup less 2 tablespoons)
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ¾ cup brown sugar, light or dark (150 grams)
    • 2 large eggs
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (60 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla, McCormick artificial is fine
    • 1 ¼ cup all-purpose flour (170 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    Lemon Rum Sauce

    • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
    • 1 ½ tablespoons cornstarch
    • ¾ cup water
    • ¼ cup dark rum (such as Meyers)
    • ⅓ cup lemon juice, freshly squeezed
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (60 grams)

    Toffee Rum Sauce

    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (60 grams)
    • ½ cup heavy cream
    • 1 cup dark brown sugar (200 grams)
    • ¼ cup dark rum (such as Meyers)
    • ¼ cup golden syrup, corn syrup or honey
    • 1 ½ tablespoons cornstarch
    • 2 tablespoons water

    Instructions
     

    Toffee Pudding Sponge

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray the jumbo or regular muffin cups or ramekins with a non-stick baking spray and set aside.
    • Place the dates, Kahlua and water in a medium size saucepan with high sides. Bring to a boil. Remove from the heat and add the baking soda. the liquid will rise up quickly and then subside.
    • Place the dates and liquid in the bowl of a food processor. Process until completely smooth. Cool before continuing.
    • Combine the flour, baking powder and salt. Set aside.
    • Place the butter, eggs, sugar and vanilla in the bowl of the processor with the dates. Process until well mixed.
    • Add the flour to the processor and pulse 3 or 4 times quickly just to mix the flour in. Do not over process.
    • Divide the batter between the six containers using about ½ cup less a tablespoon or 140 grams. If using the smaller muffin pans use a scant ¼ cup or about 70 grams.
    • Place in the oven and bake the larger ones for 22 to 26 minutes until a tester comes out mostly clean and the tops bounce back when lightly touched. Bake the smaller ones about 12 to 15 minutes.
    • Immediately upon removing from the oven, use a 1 cup dry measuring cup to press down the humpy middle to flatten the puddngs. Repeat if necessary to flatten the tops. Use a smaller cup for the smaller puddings.
    • Cool about 10 minutes and then release the puddings, leaving them upside down. Place on a cooling rack to cool completely.

    Lemon Sauce

    • Combine the sugar and cornstarch in a medium saucepan. Add the remaining ingredients and place over medium heat.
    • Stirring constantly, bring to a boil and boil hard for 1 minutes. Remove from the heat and pour into a container to cool. Store in the refrigerator.

    Toffee Sauce

    • Place everything but the cornstarch and 2 tablespoons water in a medium size saucepan over medium heat. Bring to a boil and boil for 5 minutes.
    • Add the cornstarch to the water, stirring well. Add to the toffee sauce in the pan, and bring it back to a boil stirring constantly. Boil for 1 minute. Remove from the heat and pour into a container to cool. Refrigerate if not using at once.
    • Using a wooden skewer about ⅛" to ¼" wide, poke about 5 holes in the puddings but not going through the bottom. Pour a large serving spoon full of one of the sauces on top of the cake. Wait a few minutes for it to dribble down into the holes and repeat once more.
    • To serve: Warm the puddings in the microwave for about 20 to 25 seconds each if room temperature. If heating a lot, preheat the oven to 350°F. oven. Place them on a baking pan lined with parchment paper. Cover the pan with foil, poking a hole in the middle. Heat for 10 to 15 minutes until vey warm.
    • Serve with one of the sauces generously poured over.
    • The puddings can be stored covered for a couple of days at room temperature. Heat them as above and warm the sauces before serving.
    • The puddings can be frozen, well wrapped for several months. Thaw at room temperature then heat as called for above before serving. he sauces can be made a week ahead and refrigerated.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________________
    Adding the grated zest of a medium size orange makes this an even more amazing dessert. It's one of my favorite things to do.
    Also, the addition of ½ cup of coarsely chopped toasted walnuts or pecans adds a bit of texture with or without the orange zest.
    The only caveat is to take care not to over process the batter after the flour is added.   or 4 quick pulses is all that is needed. 
    Medjool dates are important to the best outcome of this dessert.
    McCormick's artificial vanilla is fine to use here. 
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6servingsCalories: 995kcalCarbohydrates: 160gProtein: 6gFat: 32gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 145mgSodium: 406mgPotassium: 375mgFiber: 3gSugar: 133gVitamin A: 1124IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 147mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones Recipe

    Modified: Oct 18, 2025 · Published: Oct 14, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    Eight Pumpkin Pecan Scones sit on a white plate with mugs and spoons in the background.

    These Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones are perfect for breakfast, brunch or snack. Quickly made with tons of warm spices and toasted pecans, these are finished with an orange glaze and pecans and sanding sugar for a bit of crunch.

    Eight Pumpkin Pecan Scones sit on a white plate with mugs and spoons in the background.

    One of the best things about these scones is they are more cake like and moist. While good the day they are made, they're good the second day too! Want fresh scones for breakfast? Simply freeze these, unbaked, bake and finish. Or, freeze the completed to make things even easier for a breakfast treat.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Are Scones Hard to Make?

    Emphatically, NO!! When I research a recipe I want to make, I read as much as I can and over and over people think they are hard. As you will see in this recipe, in just a couple of steps in the processor and you're on your way to a delicious treat.

    Keys to Perfect Scones

    • The butter should be frozen rock hard so pieces of the butter remain visible after mixing. I am not of the school that does this by hand.
    • Process or mix the dough just until it comes together.
    • Knead it lightly into a round.
    • If cutting into rounds, do not twist the cutter or the scones will not bake up straight.
    • Keep the dough cold as much as possible. This isn't hard because it's so quick to make - especially if a processor is used. Pop it in the fridge or freezer if it warms.
    • Since the dough is going to be sticky, shape it into a round, flatten it then freeze it for 30 to 40 minutes until it's throughly cold and beginning to freeze around the edges. Then cut it with a knife for triangles or a cookie cutter for rounds or shapes. Wipe the knife between cuts with a paper towel to keep it clean. No need to rinse - wiping will do. This will make clean cuts for a better looking scone.
    • Triangles are easier and faster as there are no re-rolls.
    • A relatively high oven temperature will allow for the butter pieces to melt quickly providing the steam, along with the baking powder and soda to lift the scones.

    What To Do with the Leftover Pumpkin Puree?

    I know how irritating it is to use a portion of a product and be stuck with the rest. What are you supposed to do with it? Well I have some really tasty ideas to get you started. You can actually make several of these out of the remaining puree.

    • Make 3 times the recipe for the Pumpkin Pecan Scones - they are that good! Freeze some for a treat for breakfast, brunch or a snack. Thaw as needed.
    • The Pumpkin Mousse Torte is a perineal favorite that has been sitting at the top of Goggle since 2019. That should tell you a lot!
    • Make the Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins with a pecan streusel.
    • The Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways
    • Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart with Caramel Rum Sauce
    • Last Years favorite - (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart
    • And don't forget about the really fast Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pumpkin Pecan Scones

    Ingredients for the Pumpkin Pecan Scone Recipe are:  Pumpkin puree, an egg, sour cream, vanilla, all-purpose flour, brown sugar, baking powder, baking soda, salt, spices and butter.

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, baking soda, ginger, salt and cloves

    SECOND ROW: Vanilla extract, unsalted butter, baking powder, nutmeg

    THIRD ROW: Sour cream, toasted pecans, egg

    BACK ROW: Brown sugar, all-purpose flour, pumpkin puree

    Orange Glaze

    Ingredients for the Orange Glaze are:  Powdered sugar, orange zest, sanding sugar and toasted pecans.

    FRONT ROW: Sanding sugar, orange zest, toasted pecans, orange juice

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Chop the nuts - see my post Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way. Cut the butter into small pieces and freeze it rock hard.

    The first collage shows a cardboard circle on waxed paper, drawn around, dry ingredients i the processor, and processed.

    Step 1. Draw around an 8" cardboard cake round or a plate on a piece of waxed or parchment paper. Step 2. Remove the round and set aside. Step 3. Place the all-purpose flour, spices, baking powder, baking soda, and brown sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Step 4. Process briefly until mixed.

    The second collage shows the frozen butter over the flour mixture, cut in with pieces off butter visible, the pumpkin puree, egg, sour cream and vanilla added and mixed.

    Step 5. Distribute the cut up frozen butter over the flour mixture. Step 6. Process very briefly, leaving some of the butter in larger pieces. Step 7. Add the pumpkin puree, sour cream, egg and vanilla to the bowl. Step 8. Pulse in the ingredients to form a shaggy batter.

    This collages, shows the finished batter with the pecans added, it's turned out onto a lightly floured table, shaped into a round placed inside the circle on the waxed paper and patted out to fill the round.

    Step 9. Add the pecans and process very briefly to mix the dough. Step 10. Turn the dough out onto a lightly floured surface. Step 11. Knead briefly to make a smooth ball. Place the ball inside the circle drawn on waxed or parchment paper. Step 12. Pat the dough out evenly to the edges of the circle.

    This collage shows the waxed paper with the patted out round placed on a baking sheet, then cut into 8 wedges which are placed on a baking sheet and then baked.

    Step 13. Place the paper on a baking sheet and freeze for 20 to 30 minutes or until the edges are just frozen but it is not hard throughout. This will make it much easier to cut cleanly. Step 14. Cut the circle of dough into 8 pieces. Step 15. Place them on a parchment lined baking sheet. Step 16. Immediately bake as called for. Cool completely before glazing.

    The last collage shows the glaze  with the toasted pecans and sanding sugar mixed in a bowl, the orange zest over the powdered sugar, the glaze mixed and the scones on a cooling rack glazed and sprinkled with the pecan/sugar mixture,

    Step 17. Mix the reserved toasted pecans and the sanding sugar in a small bowl. Set aside. Step 18. Add the orange zest to the powdered sugar in a medium bowl. Step 19. Add 2 tablespoons of orange juice to the bowl and stir. If the glaze is too loose, add a bit more orange juice a teaspoon at a time. Step 20. Place a cooling rack over waxed or parchment paper. Spread the cooled, baked scones out on the rack. Using a large serving spoon scoop up a spoonful and pour it over the center of the scone lengthwise. Spread it over the scone and let it run over the sides. Glaze a couple at a time and immediately sprinkle with the pecan/sugar mixture. Repeat until they are all glazed. Let the glaze dry completely. Store in a covered container if not serving right away or freeze.

    Recipe FAQS

    Where did scones originate?

    Scones most likely originated from Scotland. The first print reference dates back to 1513 and is from a Scottish poet.

    When are scones most eaten?

    It depends upon where you live. In England and the former or current related countries, they are most usually eaten at "tea" which is around four o'clock in the afternoon. They are usually served with clotted cream and jam. In the US they are eaten for breakfast, brunch and as a snack since we don't do "tea".

    What's the difference between American and English Scones?

    English scones are pretty straight forward without a lot of embellishments although they may contain raisins or currants. In America we use more butter, and a lot more add ins of all kinds.

    Storage and Freezing

    The baked and glazed scones can be held under a cover for a day or two. They are best within 2 days.

    They can also be frozen unbaked. Just add a bit more time when baking. In addition, they can be baked, glazed and finished then frozen until hard. Wrap them individually in foil and place in freezer proof bags. Thaw at room temperature. The glaze will initially be wet but will dry as they thaw out.

    Expert Tips

    • Some cans of pumpkin puree use a different squash that is very much in color and taste like pumpkin but is actually kobacha also known as Japanese pumpkin. Try to get pure pumpkin puree which is sold by Libby marked 100% Pure Pumpkin. I have found it to the thicker than the kobacha.
    • Using the McCormick imitation vanilla is fine here as there are so many spices the pure vanilla is a waste of money.
    • Either dark or light brown sugar can be used. Dark brown adds more flavor.
    • When you knead the dough a few times to make a smooth ball, do not push hard on it. Keep a light hand and it will not stick to the surface so less flour can be used. Just remember that flour is going into the scone. The dough should remain a bit tacky on the outside.
    • 1 large orange will yield enough zest for the glaze.
    A plate of scones with one on top broken open to show the interior of the scone.

    Looking for more quick treats?

    • Pumpkin cake donuts on a plate with a cup of tea.
      Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe
    • Apple Fritters with Speculass Spice
      Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice
    • Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.
      A Cranberry Orange Muffin
    • Breakfast Scone
      Breakfast Scones - An Easy Morning Treat

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Eight Pumpkin Pecan Scones sit on a white plate with mugs and spoons in the background.

    Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones are the perfect breakfast, brunch or snack. Quickly made with tons of warm spices and toasted pecans, these are finished with an orange glaze, pecans and sanding sugar for a bit of crunch.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 55 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast/brunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 scones
    Calories 412 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Pumpin Pecan Scones

    • ½ cup unsalted butter, cut and frozen (114 grams)
    • ½ cup pecans, divided (60 grams)
    • 1 ¾ cup all-purpose flour (240 grams)
    • 1 ½ teaspoon cinnamon
    • ¾ teaspoon ginger
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ¼ teaspoon cloves
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon table salt
    • ⅓ cup brown sugar (65 grams)
    • ½ cup canned pumpkin puree
    • 1 large egg
    • ¼ cup sour cream (55 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract (McCormick is fine)

    Orange Glaze

    • 1 ½ cup powdered sugar (200 grams)
    • 1 tablespoon orange zest
    • 2 to 3 tablespoons orange juice
    • 2 tablespoons reserved toasted pecans
    • 2 tablespoons sanding sugar

    Instructions
     

    Pumpkin Pecan Scones

    • Cut the butter into small pieces and freeze hard.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper. Set aside. Toast the pecans for 7 to 9 minutes depending on the size. Cool then chop. See my post, Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way. Reserve 2 tablespoons. Turn the oven off.
    • Place the flour, spices, baking powder, baking soda, salt, and brown sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Process briefly to mix.
    • Place the frozen butter over the dry ingredients. Process very briefly, leaving some of the butter in larger pieces.
    • Add the pumpkin puree, egg, sour cream, and vanilla to the bowl and process with pulses to bring together.
    • Add the pecans and process very briefly to mix into a shaggy dough. Do not over mix. The dough will be sticky. Do not add additional flour. That is how it should be,
    • Lightly flour a work surface and place the dough on the flour. Knead the dough to form a smooth, round ball. Use a very light touch and do not press hard on the dough. It should come together in 7 or 8 turns.
    • Place the dough ball in the center of the circle on the waxed or parchment paper. Press it out evenly to reach the edges of the circle.
    • Preheat the oven to 400°F.
    • Pick up the paper and place it in a baking sheet. Freeze for 20 to 30 minutes or until the edges are fairly hard. Don't freeze the disc hard.
    • Remove from the freezer and place the paper on a flat surface. Cut into 8 triangles. Place them on the parchment line baking sheet.
    • Bake for 12 to 15 minutes until they are lightly browned but still a bit soft.
    • Cool completely on a rack.

    Glazing the Scones

    • Combine the reserved 2 tablespoons pecans with the sanding sugar. Set aside.
    • Add the orange zest to the powdered sugar in a medium size bowl. Add 2 tablespoons of the orange juice and stir to combine. If the glaze is too thick add a teaspoon of orange juice at a time to thin it.
    • Using a large serving spoon, scoop some of the glaze up and place it from the top to the bottom in the center of the cooled scone. Spread it out and let it run down the sides.
    • After glazing 2 or 3 scones, sprinkle with the pecan/sugar mix so it adheres to the wet glaze. Let dry.
    • The scones can be covered and stored at room temperature for a day or so. They can also be frozen unbaked and baked from the freezer by adding a bit more time or they can be finished, including glazing and finishing. Thaw at room temperature.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________________
    • Some cans of pumpkin puree use a different squash that is very much in color and taste like pumpkin but is actually kobacha also known as Japanese pumpkin. Try to get pure pumpkin puree which is sold by Libby marked 100% Pure Pumpkin. I have found it to the thicker than the kobacha.
    • Using the McCormick imitation vanilla is fine here as there are so many spices the pure vanilla is a waste of money.
    • Either dark or light brown sugar can be used. Dark brown adds more flavor.
    • When you knead the dough a few times to make the smooth ball, do not push hard on it. Keep a light hand and it will not stick to the surface so less flour can be used. Just remember that flour is going into the scone. The dough should remain a bit tacky on the outside. 
    • 1 large orange will yield enough zest for the glaze. 
    • The butter should be frozen rock hard so pieces of the butter remain viseable after mixing. I am not of the school that does this by hand.
    • Process or mix the dough just until it comes together. 
    • If cutting into rounds, do not twist the cutter or the scones will not be straight. 
    • Keep the dough cold as much as possible. This isn't hard because it's so quick to make - especially if a processor is used. 
    • Since the dough is going to be sticky, shape it into a round, flatten it then freeze it for 30 to 40 minutes until it is throughly cold and beginning to freeze around the edges. Then cut it with a knife for triangles or a cookie cutter for rounds or shapes. Wipe the knife between cuts with a paper towel to keep it clean. No need to rinse - wiping will do. This will make clean cuts for a better looking scone. 
    • A relatively high oven temperature will allow for the butter pieces to melt quickly providing the steam, along with the baking powder and soda to lift the scones.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8sconesCalories: 412kcalCarbohydrates: 59gProtein: 5gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 58mgSodium: 284mgPotassium: 134mgFiber: 2gSugar: 35gVitamin A: 2833IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 70mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    No Bake Chocolate Coconut Tart

    Modified: Oct 10, 2025 · Published: Oct 9, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 13 Comments

    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.

    The only way to adequately describe this Chocolate Coconut Tart is to think Mounds Bars. This unusual tart comprises a sublime mixture of cream of coconut, white chocolate, a touch of sour cream and a lot of coconut in a chocolate crust. You'll especially like the no bake aspect of making this.

    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.

    While completely optional, the white chocolate swirl on top adds visual appeal. Easy to make, easier to eat!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It's past easy to make. The crust is a chocolate version of the graham cracker crust.
    • It freezes completely made for several months.
    • It can be made several days ahead and refrigerated.
    • The ingredients are easily available. The cream of coconut can be found in the liquor department of grocery stores.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

    The ingredients for the chocolate graham cracker crust include:  Graham crackets, powdered sugar, unsalted butter and cocoa.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, cocoa powder (either natural or Dutch)

    BACK ROW: Graham Crackers, powdered sugar

    Coconut Filling

    Ingredients for the coconut filling are:  cream of coconut, sweetened coconut, white chocolate, sour cream and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: White chocolate, sour cream, unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Cream of Coconut, sweetened coconut

    Chocolate Glaze and Finish

    The glaze ingredients are: semisweet chocolate, heavy cream, corn syrup, unsalted butter, and white chocolate.

    FRONT ROW: White Chocolate

    MIDDLE ROW: Corn syrup, unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Semisweet Chocolate, heavy cream

    Important Ingredients

    • Graham crackers made from different companies take more or less butter. Start with ½ cup and add a tablespoon more at a time until they stick together when a small amount is pressed between your fingers.
    • Either natural or Dutch cocoa can be used.
    • Real Cream of Coconut is the brand I like because it is a translucent liquid with no lumps of coconut in it.
    • Full fat or Light sour cream can be used.
    • Honey or Golden syrup can be subbed for the corn syrup.
    • Make sure to use heavy cream for the ganache
    • I found another white chocolate I like a lot. It can be found at Aldi's, among other places, and is a less expensive than the Ghirardelli. They are both 4 ounces. The Moser Roth is a bit creamier and has specs of Madagascar vanilla bean in it. Both are good.
    Photo of Ghirardelli and Moser Roth white chocolate.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

    The first collage for the chocolate graham cracker crust shows the dry ingredients in a processor bowl, then processed, the butter added and everything mixed in a bowl.

    Step 1. Place the dry ingredients - graham crackers, cocoa and powdered sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Step 2. Process until uniform fine crumbs form. Step 3. Remove the crumbs to a medium size bowl and add ½ cup of the melted butter. Step 4. Toss with a fork until all of the crumbs are coated. Pick up a few and press them between your fingers. If they don't stick together well, add the remaining butter 1 tablespoon at a time. Retest to see if they need the last tablespoon.

    The last collage for the crust shows crumbs loosley around the edge of a tart pan, then pressed into the rim of the pan, a measurng cup pre

    Step 5. Place the called for amount of crumbs evenly around the rim of the tart pan. Step 6. Press them firmly into the sides of the pan Step 7. Place the remaining crumbs evenly on the bottom of the pan With your hand or a measuring cup, press them firmly into the bottom and along the sides of the pan. Step 8. Refrigerate the finished crust while the filling is being made.

    Coconut Filling

    The first collage for the coconut filling shows the white chocolate chopped, in the bowl with the cream, combined and the butter added.

    Step 1. Coarsely chop the white chocolate to make it easier to melt. Step 2. Place it in a medium size bowl with the cream of coconut. Microwave at ½ power for about a 1 to 1 ½ minutes. Be careful to start on the low side as white chocolate burns very, very easily. Alternatively, make a double boiler by placing the bowl over a saucepan filled with a couple of inches of water. Bring the water to a bare simmer - no more. Do not let the water touch the bottom of the bowl. Step 3. Whisk to smooth out the chocolate. If it isn't smooth, heat again very briefly. It is easier to control in a double boiler. Step 4. Add the butter.

    In this collage the butter has been melted in, the sour cream added and whisked in followed by the coconut.

    Step 5. Whisk in the butter. If the mixture is too cool, reheat briefly - just enough to melt the butter. Step 6. Add the sour cream. Step 7. Whisk it in. Step 8. Add all of the coconut.

    In the collage the coconut has been stirred into the liquid, poured into the chocolate shell, smoothed out and covered with film.

    Step 9. Stir the mixture to coat all of the coconut. Step 10. Remove the crust from the fridge and spoon the filling into the chocolate shell. Step 11. Smooth the top. Step 12. Cover it with plastic wrap and place it in the refrigerator for 4 hours or overnight to firm up.

    The last collages shows the chocolate, cream, corn syrup and butter in a small bowl, the ganache on the tart, the white chocolate circles on top and the finished, marbelized tart.

    Step 13. Place the cream, corn syrup, butter and chocolate in a medium size bowl. Heat at half power for 20 t0 30 seconds to melt the chocolate or place over a double boiler. Whisk to smooth out. It should be pourable but not runny. Step 14. Pour the ganache over the tart and level it with a small offset spatula or by picking it up and carefully tilting in each direction to let the ganache run to the edge of the filling. Do not go over the edge of the crust. Step 15. Melt the 2 ounces of white chocolate very carefully at half power in the microwave, starting at abut 10 to 15 seconds. Do not over heat or it will burn. Dip a soup spoon into the white chocolate and wave it over the chocolate ganache in circles. Step 16. Quickly, with a toothpick or small wooden skewer, marbleize the white chocolate by dragging the toothpick through the white chocolate in a random pattern. The dark chocolate needs to be unset to do this. Refrigerate.

    Recipe FAQS

    What are the different types of coconut?

    Desiccated coconut, shredded and flaked. Desiccated coconut involves finely grating coconut meat and drying it until only 3% moisture remains. It is very dry and usually unsweetened. Shredded coconut is fresh or dried. Fresh has a higher moisture content but drier versions last longer. Last, Coconut Flakes are larger and fatter than shredded. They can be sweetened which are most often used for baking and decorating or unsweetened.

    Is coconut a fruit or a nut?

    Despite having the word nut at the end, coconut is a type of fruit known as a drupe.

    What should I look for when buying white chocolate?

    White chocolate isn't chocolate at all but it is made from cocoa butter, milk solids and sugar. It contains no cocoa solids which make chocolate dark. When buying white chocolate check to make sure cocoa butter is listed in the ingredients. If it isn't then it isn't real white chocolate.

    Expert Tips

    • The most important tip is to use very little heat for the shortest time when melting white chocolate if there is little or no liquid with it. It burns very easily and there is no saving it after that.
    • Keep a couple of tablespoons of butter out when adding to the crumbs. I have also found, that stirring the butter into the crumbs requires less butter than if added to the crumbs while in the processor.
    • Always chop any chocolate when melting it. Large pieces will melt unevenly and the smaller pieces can burn while the others need more time to melt.
    • When melting any chocolate, it should be heated until about half of the chocolate is hot and melty. Stirring, will melt the remainder. The general rule is chocolate melts between 86 and 90 degrees so very little heat is needed to melt it.
    • The most delicate chocolate to melt is white chocolate. It burns very easily.
    This photo shows a slice of the tart,  partially eaten, on a white plate with a red napkin in the background and a fork on the plate.

    More No Bake Treats to Share

    • A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.
      Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake
    • Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.
      Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce
    • A cookie crust, peanut butter filling and chocolate topping make up the No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
      No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
    • A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.
      Macadamia and Coconut Tart

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.

    Chocolate Coconut Tart

    Helen S. Fletcher
    The only way to adequately describe this no bake Chocolate Coconut Tart is to think Mounds Bars. This unusual tart comprises a sublime mixture of cream of coconut, white chocolate, a touch of sour cream and a lot of coconut in a chocolate crust.
    4.43 from 7 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Chilling time 4 hours hrs
    Total Time 4 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 562 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1 9 x 1" tart pan with removable bottom.
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Chocolate Crumb Crust

    • 1 ⅓ cups graham crackers (170 grams)
    • ¼ cup cocoa, natural or Dutch (20 grams)
    • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (45 grams)
    • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (150 grams or 1 stick + 2 tablespoons)

    Coconut Filling

    • ¾ cup cream of coconut
    • 4 ounces white chocolate (114 grams)
    • ⅓ cup sour cream, full fat or light
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter (90 grams)
    • 3 cups sweetened coconut flakes, packed (255 grams)

    Chocolate Ganache

    • ¼ cup heavy cream
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter (45 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons clear corn syrup
    • 4 ounces semisweet chocolate (114 grams)
    • 2 ounces white chocolate (60 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Chocolate Crumb Crust

    • Place the graham crackers, cocoa and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Process until uniform, fine crumbs form.
    • Remove the crumbs to a medium size bowl and add ½ cup of the melted butter. Toss with a fork until all of the crumbs are coated. Pick up a few and press them between your fingers. If they don't stick together well, add the remaining butter 1 tablespoon at a time.
    • Spray the bottom only of the tart pan with a non-stick baking release. Place ⅔ of the crumbs (about 200 grams) evenly around the rim of the pan. Press them firmly into the sides of the pan.
    • Place the remaining crumbs evenly in the bottom of the pan. With your hand or the bottom of a ⅓ cup measure, press the crumbs firmly against the bottom of the pan and the sides of the pan joining those at the bottom of the rim.
    • Refrigerate while preparing the filling.

    Coconut Filling

    • Coarsely chop the white chocolate to make it easier to melt. Place it in a medium size bowl with the cream of coconut.
    • Microwave on half power for about 1 minute. Whisk to smooth out. Microwave for about 20 seconds more if it isn't smooth.The times given are for my microwave and may be different than yours. In any case, err on the side of less heat as white chocolate burns very easily.
    • The bowl may also be placed over barely simmering water that does not touch the bottom of the bowl. Heat, stirring often until the chocolate is melted.
    • Add the butter and whisk in. If it doesn't melt completely, reheat briefly.
    • Whisk in the sour cream until everything is smooth.
    • Add all of the coconut and stir with a spoon to blend the ingredients. Remove the chocolate crust from the fridge and pour the filling into the crust, using an offset spatula to smooth it out. Cover the top with plastic wrap and refrigerate for about 4 hours or overnight.

    Chocolate Ganache and Finishing

    • Place the cream, butter, corn syrup and chocolate in a medium size bowl and microwave for 20 to 30 seconds at half power. Stir (do not whisk or there is a chance of air bubbles forming) until smooth. This may be done over a double boiler also. The ganache should be pourable but not runny. If it is too loose, let it sit at room temperature to thicken.
    • Just before pouring the ganache over the coconut, melt the 2 ounces of white chocolate with very low heat and stir until smooth. Have a toothpick or small wooden skewer close to the tart.
    • Pour the chocolate ganache on top of the coconut filling. Either pick it up and carefully rotate it around so the ganache slides to the inside edge of the tart covering the coconut or spread it with an offset spatula.
    • Immediately, using a soup or serving spoon, dip it into the white chocolate and wave it in circles over the ganache. Quickly, drag the toothpick or skewer through the white chocolate to make a marbleized finish. Try not to go through to the filling. Refrigerate to set up.
    • The tart can be made several days ahead and refrigerated as long as there are no strong smells from other food. Butter and chocolate pick them up. It can also be frozen, then wrapped well in foil and frozen for several months. Thaw in the fridge.
    • This is best served near room temperature - although I have been known to eat it anyway it's available.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ______________________________________________________
    The most important tip is to use very little heat for the shortest time when melting white chocolate if there is little or no liquid with it. It burns very easily and there is not saving it after that.
    Always chop any chocolate when melting it. Large pieces will melt unevenly and the smaller pieces can burn while the others need more time to melt.
    When melting any chocolate, it should be heated until about half of the chocolate is hot and melty. Stirring, will melt the remainder. The general rule is chocolate melts between 86 and 90 degrees so very little heat is needed to melt them. 
    The most delicate chocolate to melt is white chocolate. It burns very easily.
    Keep a couple of tablespoons of butter out when adding to the processed crumbs. I have also found, that stirring the butter into the crumbs requires less butter than if added to the processor.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 562kcalCarbohydrates: 53gProtein: 4gFat: 39gSaturated Fat: 26gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 59mgSodium: 161mgPotassium: 239mgFiber: 5gSugar: 41gVitamin A: 657IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 65mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    Modified: Oct 4, 2025 · Published: Oct 3, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background.

    What if I were to tell you this Apple Spice Bundt Cake is as easy to make as falling off a log? What's more it has no apples to peel, core and slice and features a secret ingredient. Finished with a Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting, this cake is filled with the warm spices of fall and is sure to be your newest fall cake.

    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background./

    This cake is so easy to make it will go together in about 20 minutes after you measure the ingredients.

    Other cakes I suggest are: Poppyseed Cake with Orange Curd and White Chocolate Buttercream, Chocolate Raspberry Marzipan Gateau, Lemon Rum Bundt Cake, Double Chocolate Mousse Cake and the, Amaretto Truffle Torte.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The Secret Ingredient Is........

    Apple Butter!! This is not to be confused with applesauce. Apple butter is made during the fall and is often offered then and retired until the next year. Apples are very slowly cooked with sugar and spices until they are dark, sweet, thick and very much apple! It makes the perfect addition to a simple bundt cake and takes it from good to outstanding.

    And About the Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting

    The second surprise is the Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting. Homemade caramel (it's very easy so don't be intimidated!) is teamed with cream cheese for an intense tasting finish to this special cake. That's it. No additional powdered sugar or butter. It's all in the caramel.

    Why both Butter and Oil in the Cake?

    This combination is often used in cakes to insure flavor from the butter and oil to keep the cake moist give it a longer shelf life.

    You're Going to Love this Because:

    • It's super easy to make.
    • The frosting is smooth, delicious and easy to make.
    • It's a fall cake with a difference. No apples to peel, core and slice. That alone has to intrigue you.
    • The flavors pack a punch that makes this memorable.
    • The frosting has the tang of cream cheese and the irresistible flavor of real caramel. It uses no additional ingredients and it's a dream to pipe.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Caramel

    Ingredients for the caramel are water, granulated sugar, heavy cream, butter, vanilla and corn syrup.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla, corn syrup

    BACK ROW: Water, granulated sugar, heavy cream

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    Ingredients for the Apple Spice Bundt Cake are all-purpose flour, baking soda, baking powder, cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg, cloves, salt, unsalted butter, canola oil, brown sugar, granulated sugar, eggs, vanilla and apple butter.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, ginger, baking soda, cloves, cinnamon

    SECOND ROW: Nutmeg, baking powder, unsalted butter, vanilla

    THIRD ROW: Eggs, brown sugar, granulated sugar

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, canola or vegetable oil, apple butter

    Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting

    Ingredietns for the caramel cheesecake filling are homemade caraamel and cream cheese.

    LEFT TO RIGHT: Caramel and Cream Cheese

    Main Ingredients

    • Heavy cream is essential to the outcome of the caramel.
    • Thick apple butter (not applesauce) is used.
    • Either canola or vegetable oil should be used.
    • The cream cheese can be full fat or ⅓ fat.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Caramel

    Heat the cream in a microwave or on the stove until steamy hot but not boiling. Set aside. For more information on making caramel, please see my post, Caramel, a Building Block of Pastry.

    The first collage for caramel shows sugar and water in saucepan, the saucepan covered, the syrup at a rolling boil and the bronze color of the sugar syrup.

    Step 1. Stir the water, corn syrup and sugar in a medium saucepan over medium high heat. Bring it to a boil. Step 2. Cover the pan tightly for 3 minutes or brush down the sides of the pan with cold water to remove any sugar crystals that could cause the caramel to granulate after cooling. Step 3. Bring the mixture to a rolling boil. Step 4. Boil it until it reaches a medium golden color.

    The second caramel collage shows the butter added to the bronze syrup, the cream and vanilla added, the caramel brought to a hard boil again and the finished caramel in a bowl.

    Step 5. Remove the pan from the heat and stir in the butter until it is melted. Step 6. Add the hot cream and stir it in. If it wasn't hot enough and it lumps somewhat, that's fine. It will be corrected in the next step. Step 7. Return to the heat and bring it back to a boil until the temperature reaches 228°F. Remove from the heat immediately and pour it into a bowl to cool or if in a hurry, pour it into a rimmed sheet pan where it can spread out.

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    The first collage for the Apple Spice Bundt Cake shows the flour, spices, baking powder and baking soda in a bowl, then mixed, the butter, brown and granulated sugar and butter in the bowl of a mixer, then mixed.

    Step 1. Place the flour, spices, salt, baking powder and baking soda in a medium bowl. Step 2. Whisk them together and set aside. Step 3. Place the brown and granulated sugar, the softened butter and oil in the bowl of a mixer fitted with a paddle attachment. Step 4. Mix on low to bring together and then raise to medium. Mix to combine, scraping often, especially on the bottom.

    This collages for the cakes shows the eggs and vanilla added to the mixing bow and mixed, half  the applesauce added, followed by the flour and the whole mixed.

    Step 5. Add the eggs and vanilla to the batter and mix to combine. Step 6. Add half the apples butter and beat until combined. Step 7. Add half the flour. Step 8. Beat in on low, scraping often. Repeat with the remaining apple butter and flour.

    This collage shows the batter in the bundt pan and baked.  The caramel and cream in a mixing bowl and the finished frosting.

    Step 9. Spray the bundt pan well with a non-stick baking spray. Dollop the batter evenly into the bundt pan and smooth it out. Step 10. Bake as called for. Step 11. Place the room temperature caramel and cream cheese in the bowl of a mixer. Step 12. Beat on low to mix and then raise to medium or medium high and beat until smooth and completely combined. Scrape often to ensure an even frosting.

    The last collage shows the cake turned out cooling on a rack, the buttercream being applied and the finished ake.

    Step 13. Cool the cake in its pan for about 20 minutes. Turn it out onto a rack to cool completely, then transfer to a serving dish or cardboard round. Step 14. Place a ½" plain tip in a piping bag and pipe frosting between the lines starting about 2" above the bottom as shown. Step 15. Pipe the frosting up the side of the bake in the natural divide, then up and over the top into the hole. Step 16. After all of these have been piped, go back and pipe in the same manner between the already piped lines as seen in the this photo. Alternatively, omit the frosting and dust with powdered sugar.

    Recipe FAQS

    Why are Bundt cakes so popular?

    They are easy to make, require no filling and no fancy finishes.

    Are there more than one design of the bundt pan?

    There used to be one design, but in ensuing years, there are many different designs including seasonal ones. Just make sure the cup size is correct for the recipe being made.

    How much batter does a bundt cake pan hold?

    There are different sizes so it's important to check to make sure the pan you have will hold enough batter. The traditional Nordic Bundt pan holds 12 cups. However, the pan should only be filled to ⅔ to ¾ full with cake batter to allow it to rise without going over the edge of the pan.

    Expert Tips

    • Use a scale to measure the flour - it makes all the difference in the world. I just bought a new one that can be recharged - love the no more batteries. You can find it here. (I am not an affiliate.)
    • Use a thick apple butter.
    • The caramel can be made a week ahead. Just bring it to room temperature or microwave it briefly. Don't get it hot.
    • ⅓ less cream cheese works as well as full fat.
    • McCormick Imitation vanilla is fine here.
    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background.

    More Fall Treats

    • Pumpkin Mousse with a graham cracker crust, cheesecake layer topped with pumpkin mousse finished with a wreath of whipped cream
      Pumpkin Mousse Torte Recipe
    • Finished Whole, Cut
      27 Layer Tuile Torte
    • Orange Bread Pudding
      Orange Bread Pudding
    • Four Halloween cookies on a white plate wih a glass of milk and several gourds in the background,
      Halloween Cookie Recipe

     
    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the Caramel Apple Spiced Cake sits on a white plate with colored leaves with an apple, plaid napkin and the cake in the background.

    Caramel Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    What if I were to tell you this Caramel Apple Spiced Bundt Cake is as easy to make as falling off a log? What's more it has no apples to peel, core and slice and features a secret ingredient. Finished with a Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting, this cake is filled with the warm spices of fall, is sure to be your newest fall cake.
    5 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Cake
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 687 kcal

    Equipment

    • 10 to 12 cup Bundt Pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Caramel

    • 1 cup water
    • ½ cup corn syrup
    • 1 ¼ cup granulated sugar (250 grams)
    • 4 tablespoons butter (60 grams)
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    • 2 cups +2 tablespoons all-purpose flour (300 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 2 teaspoons cinnamon
    • ¾ teaspoon ginger
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ¼ teaspoon cloves
    • ½ teaspoon table salt
    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams) or 1 stick
    • ½ cup canola or vegetable oil
    • ⅞ cup brown sugar, packed (175 grams) [1 cup less 2 tablespoons]
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
    • 3 large eggs
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 ½ cups thick apple butter (430 grams)

    Caramel Cheesecake Frosting

    • 8 ounces caramel, room temperature (225 grams)
    • 8 ounces cream cheese, room temperature (225 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Caramel

    • Heat the cream until hot to make it easier to mix with the sugar syrup. Set aside.
    • Place the water, sugar and corn syrup in a 2 quart saucepan.
    • Stir over medium high heat until the sugar is dissolved completely. Bring to a boil. Cover the pan with a tight fitting lid for 3 minutes. Remove the lid and continue boiling. Alternatively, wash the sides of the pan down with a natural bristle pastry brush dipped in cold water.
    • Boil without stirring until the mixture becomes a medium golden color. Swirl in the pan to even out the color.
    • Remove from the heat and immediately add the butter to the saucepan and stir until melted.
    • Pour the hot cream in all at once and stir. If some of the cream lumps up, don't worry.
    • Clip a thermometer onto the side of the pan if possible. Return to medium high heat and bring to a hard boil.
    • Continue to boil until the thermometer reaches 228°F. Cool to room temperature. To cool it quickly, after it comes to temperature, pour it onto a rimmed sheet pan where it will spread out and cool while you prepare the cake.
    • This yields 2 cups are about 1 pound.

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F with the rack in the center of the oven. Have the bundt pan nearby.
    • In a medium bowl, combine the flour, baking powder, baking soda, spices and salt. Whisk to mix.
    • Place the softened butter, oil, brown and granulated sugars in the bowl of a mixer fitted with a paddle attachment. Beat until completely combined.
    • Add the eggs and vanilla and incorporate into the mixture, scraping often and into the bottom of the bowl.
    • Mix in half of the apple butter, followed by half of the flour. Repeat with the remaining apple butter and flour.
    • Spray the bundt pan well with a non-stick baking release. Dollop the batter evenly into the pan. Smooth it out.
    • Bake for 40 to 45 minutes or until a cake tester comes out clean. Place the pan on a cooling rack and allow to cool for about 15 to 20 minutes. Place a round cake cooling rack over the top of the bundt pan and carefully flip it over to release the cake. Allow it to cool completely before finishing.

    Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting

    • It is important that the ingredients are at room temperature. Place them in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the paddle attachment.
    • Beat them on low to bring them together and then on medium high until they are completely combined. Scrape the sides and bottom often.

    Finishing the Cake

    • Fit a pastry bag with a ½" plain pastry tip. Fill the bag and pipe the frosting onto the cake as shown in the pictures above.
    • Let the frosting set up briefly and the cake is ready to cut and serve. It can be held at room temperature for a day and then refrigerated if held longer. Bring to room temperature to serve.
    • Alternatively, omit the frosting and dust with powdered sugar.
    • Yields 12 servings.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
     Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _____________________________________________________
    Use a scale to measure the flour - it makes all the difference in the world. I just bought a new one that can be recharged - love the no more batteries. You can find it  here. (I am not an affiliate.)
    Use a thick apple butter. Do not  use apple sauce.
    The caramel can be made a week ahead. Just bring it to room temperature or microwave it briefly. Don't get it hot.
    ⅓ less cream cheese works as well as full fat.
    McCormick Imitation vanilla is fine here.
    For more information on making caramel please see my post on Caramel, a Building Block of Pastry

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 687kcalCarbohydrates: 88gProtein: 4gFat: 37gSaturated Fat: 17gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 120mgSodium: 439mgPotassium: 164mgFiber: 1gSugar: 82gVitamin A: 983IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 132mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe

    Modified: Nov 11, 2025 · Published: Sep 30, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

    A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.

    This Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe will be the easiest you will ever make. There is easy and then there is POPOVER EASY! Think about this. All of the ingredients, except the cheese and bacon go into a processor or blender and that's pretty much it. Process or blend, portion out the bacon, pour the batter over, sprinkle with cheese and in the oven they go.

    A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.

    With its cheesy top and bits of bacon, this is the perfect accompaniment to almost anything or just for a snack. The bacon and cheese really come through.

    Often compared to Yorkshire pudding and crepes, popovers can be plain, enhanced as I did or add parmesan cheese, basil and oregano for an Italian version, or lemon and feta for a Greek version.

    Other quick breads I think you'll enjoy are: Buttermilk Flatbreads, Cream Biscuits, Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones, and Traditional Irish Soda Bread.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The Popover Pan

    A rack of 6 popover molds sits on a baking pan.

    This is the traditional popover pan. There are 6 cups attached between rails so the heat can get around them evenly. It is easier and safer to put them on a half sheet pan to move them in and out of the oven. The cups are tapered at the bottom to encourage the "popover".

    Do you have to bake in these? No, the popovers can be made in muffin cups but they don't have the same look but are just as good.

    Why is it called a Popover?

    Because it can literally turn over in the pan while baking. You can see it here on the front and back left side.

    Here are six popovers in their pan on a cooling rack.

    Custard or No Custard?

    I'm not sure who came up with the description that includes the custardy inside. What is inside is unbaked dough! The definition of custard is a mixture of milk, sugar and eggs as its base where the eggs act as the thickener. It has a smooth, creamy texture with no flour in site.

    The doughy inside comes from either overfilling the popover cups or underbaking the popover or both. Very little batter goes into the cup which is why it is so amazing that they rise so high. The dough inside is also the reason so many recipes call for rushing to the table before they deflate. The uncooked dough inside retains heat and steam which quickly deflates the popovers and they become soft and soggy.

    But the bottom line is there is no custard in a popover. My popovers are a crispy outside surrounding a hole in the middle. You can see it here along with the bacon and the cheese. There is no need to rush them to the table because they don't deflate. They stay crisp.

    This photo shows a open popover with the inside empty,

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the pOpovers include eggs, milk, butter, bread flour, salt, cooked bacon and cheddar cheese..

    FRONT ROW: Cheddar cheese, salt, cooked bacon

    BACK ROW: Eggs, bread flour, 2% milk

    Essential Ingredients

    Bread flour is used for its strength. It will hold the popover up while they get set in the oven. It also makes a crisper crust that stays that way.

    2% milk or a combination of whole milk and water is important to the end result of the the popovers. I give you the choice in the recipe.

    While I give you a weight for the bacon, it depends upon the bacon. Some render out more fat than others.

    The eggs are size large.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collage for the Cheddar Bacon Popvers include the bacon being cut, the cooked bacon, the ingredients in the food processor and then processed.

    Step 1. I have found the easiest way to cut the bacon for this is the just slice it vertically. Step 2. Place the slices in a frying pan and fry it over low to medium heat until they are crisp and the fat is rendered out. The bacon will separate out into individual pieces as it fries. Step 3. Place the eggs, 2% milk or the milk and water, melted butter, bread flour and salt in the bowl of a processor or blender. Step 4. Process or blend until smooth.

    The second collage shows a popover cup well sprayed with baking release, the bacon in the bottom, the batter being poured in and the cheese on top,

    Step 5. Spray the cups and lips of the cups very well with a non-stick baking release. Step 6. Place 1/12 of the bacon in each cup. Step 7. Pour ¼ cup batter over the bacon. Step 8. Top with 1/12 of the grated cheese.

    The last collage shows a 6 cup popover pan filled, the baked popovers on a rack, a knife slitting the top of one and a popover opened up to expose the inside.

    Step 9. Place the rack of popover pans on a half sheet pan. Step 10. Bake as called for. You can see some of them have popped over. Step 11. Immediately, upon taking the popovers out of the oven, slit the top to release any steam inside. Step 12. One of the popovers opened up. This is how they should look. They should not be doughy inside.

    Recipe FAQS

    How does a popover rise so high with no leavening agent?

    There are four ways products rise. They are yeast, chemical leaveners like baking powder and baking soda, air (think angel food cake) and steam (think choux paste for cream puffs and popovers).

    Is the thickness of the batter important?

    Yes, the batter needs to the very thin and pourable. That is one reason 2% milk is better than whole milk in this recipe because it is thinner. Water can be used to dilute the whole milk.

    Why are popovers baked at such a high temperature?

    It is important to heat the popovers quickly so the steam can push them up. Too low a temperature will result in popovers that are not as high and crisp and may end up doughy inside.

    Expert Tips

    • There is a lot of discussion about whether to rest the batter, refrigerate overnight, use it cold, bring it to room temperature and more. I usually let mine rest for an hour at room temperature like I do my crepe batter. It's mainly to let the gluten relax for the highest lift. If you don't have time, just use it right away.
    • For me, popovers are a super quick bread to make for a meal or a snack. This aren't rocket science.
    • The oven temperature is of great importance. Make sure to preheat at least 15 to 20 minutes before baking them. The liquid needs to get hot as soon as possible to make the steam that will cause the lift.
    • Also, there are a lot of people that say you can't open the oven ever, ever, ever until they are done. That too is a bunch of poppycock. I usually wait until they are risen and then peek if I feel the need to. No need? Don't peek!
    The last photo shows baked popovers out of their pans on a cooling rack.

    Here's a Few Other Quick Breads to Enjoy

    • Slices of Date Nut Bread on a plate with walnut halves and dates around it.
      Date Nut Bread
    • Scone with Cranberry Strawberry Jam on a plate
      Scones with Cranberry Strawberry Jam
    • Two slices of Chocolate Orange Raisin bread on a white plate with a cup of tea next to it and lavender flowers.
      Chocolate Orange Raisin Bread-A Favorite Homemade Bread
    • Slices of Banana Bread in a circle with strawberries in the middle on a blue and white plate.
      Best Two Step Banana Nut Bread

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.

    Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe will be the easiest you will ever make. There is easy and then there is POPOVER EASY! All of the ingredients, except the cheese and bacon go into a processor or blender and that's pretty much it. Just bake and eat!
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Popovers, Quick Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 9 servings
    Calories 224 kcal

    Equipment

    • 2 6 well popover pans or regular muffin pans
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces bacon
    • ⅔ cup sharp cheddar cheese, shredded
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (45 grams)
    • 4 large eggs
    • 1 ½ cups 2% milk*
    • 1 ½ cups bread flour (210 grams)**
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • *1 ¼ cup whole milk + ¼ cup water may be substituted.
    • **All-purpose flour can be used but the they will be less crisp and may not rise as high.

    Instructions
     

    • Cut the bacon vertically about ½" wide strips and fry until golden and crisp. See the photo above for the easiest way to cut this.
    • Place all the remaining ingredients in the bowl of a processor or blender. Process or blend to mix completely so it is smooth with no lumps.
    • The batter can be used at once but if you let it rest an hour at room temperature, the popovers will rise a bit higher.
    • Preheat the oven to 450°F with the baking rack on the lowest rung. Position the other rack on the very top rung of the oven. Spray the popover wells, including the top rims with a non-stick baking release.
    • Place the popover pans on half sheet pans to make it easier and safer to move in and out of the oven. Divide the fried bacon between the 12 cups. Pour ⅓ cup batter over the bacon. Divide the cheese evenly over the batter.
    • Make sure the oven is at temperature before putting the popovers in - this is very important for the rise.
    • The popovers can be baked one pan at a time if there isn't room in the oven. Just leave the second pan out at room temperature.
    • Bake the popovers for 20 minutes. Lower the heat to 350°F. Bake for an additional 10 to 15 minutes until they are a deep golden brown.
    • Immediately upon removing them from the oven, release the steam inside by sticking the tip of a knife in the top of the popover. Remove them from their pans immediately. Serve warm or cool and freeze.
    • To reheat: Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place them on a bakong while frozen. Heat for 10 to 15 minutes oruntil warmed through. Serve Warm.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above. If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article. Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency. Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume. For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
     Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________________
    There is a lot of discussion about whether to rest the batter, refrigerate overnight, use it cold, bring it to room temperature and more. I usually let mine rest for an hour at room temperature like I do my crepe batter. It's mainly to let the gluten relax for the highest lift. If you don't have time, just use it right away. 
    For me, popovers are a super quick bread to make for a meal or a snack. These aren't rocket science. 
    The oven temperature is of great importance. Make sure to preheat at least 15 to 20 minutes before baking them. The liquid needs to get hot as soon as possible to make the steam that will cause the lift. 
    Also, there are a lot of people that say you can't open the oven ever, ever, ever until they are done. That too is a bunch of poppycock. I usually wait until they are risen and then peek if I feel the need to. No need? Don't peek!
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 9servingsCalories: 224kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 14gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 104mgSodium: 739mgPotassium: 114mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 361IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 123mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Chocolate Babka Recipe

    Modified: Sep 23, 2025 · Published: Sep 23, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.

    My Chocolate Babka Recipe is a visually stunning sweet bread that has a couple of tips to help you shape this marvelous filled yeast dough. For the chocolate filling, I simply used Nutella to highlight the sweet dough for an unparalleled treat that is easier to make than it looks. It's very straight forward to make and easy to twist using a much easier technique than most recipes. So if you're thinking twice about making this, let me assure you, you can make this!

    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.

    Babka is a sweet bread from old world Poland and Ukraine and while many recipes fill it with cinnamon sugar, when the new world took a look at it the filling quickly changed to chocolate or almost anything.

    Other sweet breads I love are: Lemon Sugar Buns, Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe, Brandied Chocolate Cherry Almond Garmisch, and my Best Cinnamon Rolls with Cinnamon Crunch Topping (think Panera's Cinnamon Crunch Bagel topping).

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What's so special about this Babka

    Everything is the answer! The dough is enriched with butter, eggs, and sugar providing an easy to roll out dough which is filled with Nutella. I used my mothers enriched yeast dough from European Nut Roll with Three Fillings.

    Babka is recognizable from it's distinctive swirly inside made by rolling the dough as if making cinnamon rolls then twisting it to further shape it inside. It can be finished with a crumb coating or a shiny, simple sweet glaze. I chose the glaze for a beautiful finish that enhances the Babka.

    The basic steps are to make the dough, let it rise then chill overnight to make it a snap to roll out with no spring back. It is then filled, rolled tightly like a cinnamon roll dough but there the difference stops. Most recipes call for the dough to be slit from top to bottom and then twisted. I did this the first time and there is no way to adequately describe the mess it makes. There was chocolate all over the table, my hands, and me. So much so, I almost gave up at that point.

    Since I'm not easily defeated in the kitchen, I went back and researched some more. I found a recipe for Chocolate Babka from Martha Stewart where I found the perfect method for shaping and swirling the dough without the mess Unfortunately, when I went to her site to link it, it is no longer there. I am sharing this method with you.

    Why You'll Love this Recipe

    • The dough is a snap to make and roll out.
    • The filling is Nutella - what more can I say?
    • The shaping is sooooo much easier than the traditional method.
    • It is a treat for your taste buds.
    • Make sure you serve it to special friends who will thank you over and over!
    • It isn't difficult to make, just follow the pictures and the steps and you'll have a stunner that looks like you bought it from a European bakery.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Yeast Dough

    Ingredients for the Chocolate Babka Recipe include: Yeast, milk, sugar, salt, unsalted butter, whole egg, egg yolk, vanilla flour and  Nutella.

    COUNTERCLOCKWISE FROM TOP LEFT: Bread flour, egg + egg yolk, milk, unsalted butter, vanilla, salt, yeast.

    IN MIDDLE: Water, granulate sugar

    Filling, Shaping and Finishing

    The ingredients for the fillings and finishes of the Chocolate Babka are granulated sugar, nutella, water, cream and egg yolk.

    FRONT ROW (egg wash): Cream, egg yolk

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, Nutella, Water (sugar & water for the simple syrup, Nutella for the filling

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Yeast Dough

    The first collage shows the milk being heated, the butter, sugar and salt added to the hot milk then transferred to a mixing bowl, and being whisked.

    Step 1. Stir the yeast into the water and set aside. Heat the milk to simmering. Step 2. Add the butter, sugar and salt. Stir to melt the butter. If all of it doesn't melt, reheat briefly. Step 5. Pour into the bowl of a mixer. Step 4. Whisk together and cool to lukewarm. Whisk in the water and yeast.

    This collage shows the flour added ot the mixing bowl, the dough hanging off the dough hook, a small piece of dough stretched into a window pane and the finished dough in a rising container.

    Step 5. Add the flour all at once to the mixing bowl. Step 6. Fit the mixer with a dough hook if available. Mix on low until it comes together and then on whatever speed your mixer suggests for yeast doughs. Beat until it cleans the side of the bowl. Step 7. Take a small piece of dough and stretch it between your fingers. If you can see through it the dough is finished. This is called a windowpane test. If the dough breaks and will not stretch, then beat it for a couple of more minutes. Repeat the windowpane test. Step 8. For the first rise, place the finished dough in a container at least twice as big that has been sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Cover the dough and mark the top with the time. Allow the dough to rise until doubled in bulk. This can be a slow riser due to the enrichment of egg, sugar and butter. Deflate the dough and refrigerate overnight to make it easier to roll the next day. It can be refrigerated up to 3 days before using.

    This collage shows the dough rolled out, the nutella spread on, the dough rolled up and he seam being moistened, the dough and ends being pinched together.

    Step 9. Remove the dough from the fridge. Spray a 9x5" pan with a non-stick baking release. Roll the dough into an 18" x 24" rectangle on a lightly floured surface. If the dough is really soft, fold it in quarters, place it on a parchment paper lined sheet pan and put it int the freezer for a few minutes to firm up. . Step 10. Turn the dough so the 18" side is in front of you. Spread the nutella to within ½" inch of the edges of the dough. If the nutella is too stiff to spread easily, microwave it briefly to a spreadable consistency. Step 11. Roll the dough tightly. When you get to the end, wet it lightly with water. Step 12. Pinch the seam together as well as the ends to seal them.

    This collage shows the roll being twisted, nutella spread on half of the twisted roll, the the plain half folded over the nutella, the babka with the pan behind it and the babka in the pan.

    Step 13. Take the roll in each hand and twist each hand in the opposite direction. Twist has hard as possible to make them very tight. Twist a second time. Step 14. Spread the reserved 2 tablespoons nutella over half of the twist. Step 15. Fold the plain side over the nutella. Step 15. Spray a 9x5" loaf pan with a non-stick baking release. Twist the babka again as much as you can and tuck it into the prepared loaf pan. Flatten it with your hand. Cover and give it a second rise until doubled.

    The last collage shows the babka in the pan, it is baked, holes are bing punched with a cake tester and the simple syrup poured over the chocolate babka.

    Step 17. When the Chocolate Babka has doubled in the pan, brush it with the egg wash. Brush it again just before it goes into the oven. Step 18. Bake it on the middle rack of the oven as directed. While the babka is baking, prepare the simple syrup. Let it simmer for 1 minutes. Step 19. Poke holes all over the babka with a cake tester. Go almost to the bottom but not through it. Step 20. Pour the prepared simple syrup mixture over the babka and let it cool. Serve or freeze.

    Recipe FAQS

    Where did Babka come from?

    We have the Jewish settlements in Poland and Ukraine to thank for Babka. In the 1800's the bakeries would use their traditional challah bread that is enriched with eggs and butter as a base, roll it out, fill it with cinnamon sugar or jam, roll it up and bake it in a round pan for a sweet treat.

    What doughs are used for Babka?

    Doughs that are enriched with eggs, butter and sugar are used. Think, challah, brioche dough or any enriched yeasted sweet dough.

    What fillings can be used for Babka?

    Anything you fill a sweet roll with - cinnamon and sugar, poppyseed filling, cream cheese, chocolate, jams or preserves, almond paste, apricot or prune lekvar are just a few of the possibilities

    Expert Tips

    • The butter, eggs and sugar in the dough are referred to as a rich dough as opposed to lean doughs that refer to breads which contain flour, water,salt and yeast.
    • Refrigerating this dough allows the gluten to rest as well as firm up the dough with it's high butter content making it really easy to roll out with no spring back.
    • Rolling the dough up tightly and then twisting it as much as possible makes the swirly inside that is indicative of babka.
    • If at any point the dough becomes too soft to work, simply put it on a parchment lined baking sheet and refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm it up again.
    • I prefer to cover my dough when rising with a tea towel and not plastic wrap. If the item rises above the rim of the pan, the plastic wrap can inhibit any further rise if it is too tightly bound to the pan.
    • To make a proofer If the room is really cool, place the container in the oven with the light on. Do not turn the oven on. The light will provide enough heat to make a proofer. Check the temperature after about an hour. Make sure it isn't over about 90°F. If it is, place a wooden spoon in the door to keep it ajar about ½" to moderate the temperature. This works with any yeast dough.
    • Do not store this in the refrigerator. Refrigeration drys out breads.

    Storage and Freezing

    The babka will last, covered at room temperature for several days. Do not refrigerate. For longer storage, bake it and soak it, then freeze it. Wrap it well and it will last for several months in the freezer. Thaw it at room temperature and freshen it in a 350°F oven. Wrap it in aluminum foil, leaving a small opening in the top and heat for about 20 minutes.

    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.

    More Sweet Breads to Tempt You

    • Five Mexican sweet rolls, Conchas with different toppings.
      Conchas - A Mexican Sweet Bread
    • Gibassier - A French Breakfast Treat
    • A Swedish Cardamom Knot sits on a blue and white plate
      Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls
    • A slice of Lemon Glazed Lemon Twists made with Sixty Second Brioche
      60 Second Brioche

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.

    Chocolate Babka Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    My Chocolate Babka Recipe with its nutella filling is a visually stunning sweet bread that has a couple of tips to help you shape this marvelous swirlly filled yeast dough.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Sweet Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 426 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9 x 5" loaf pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Yeast Dough

    • 2 ¼ teaspoon active dry yeast
    • 2 tablespoons water
    • ⅓ cup milk, whole or 2%
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
    • ½ teaspoon table salt
    • ½ cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 large egg yolk
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 ½ cups bread flour (350 grams)

    Filling and Finishing

    • 1 cup + 2 tablespoons Nutella (320 grams)
    • 1 large egg yolk
    • 1 tablespoon cream
    • ½ cup water
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Yeast Dough

    • Dissolve the yeast in the water. Set aside.
    • Heat the milk to simmering. Remove from the heat and add the sugar, butter and salt. Stir to dissolve and cool to lukewarm.
    • Transfer to a mixing bowl and add the egg, egg yolk and vanilla. Fit the mixer with a dough hook. Add half the flour and beat until smooth. Add the remaining flour and again, beat until smooth. Knead in the machine for 3 minutes, turning it half way through. It will be a very soft dough.
    • Take a small piece of dough and stretch it between your fingers. If you can see through it, it's fine. If it doesn't or if it breaks, knead it for another minute or two in the machine. Test it until you can see through it. (See the photo in the Step by Step instructions). This is referred to as the windowpane test and should be used on yeast doughs to determine the strength of the gluten.
    • Spray a container at least twice the size of the dough with a non-stick baking release. Remove the dough from the mixer and place in the container turning it over so the top will be greased also. Cover with a piece of plastic wrap and allow to rise until doubled - about 1 ½ hours.
    • If the room is really cool, place the container in the oven with the light on. Do not turn the oven on. The light will provide enough heat to make a proofer. Check the temperature after about an hour. Make sure it isn't over about 90°F. If it is, place a wooden spoon in the door to keep it ajar about ½" to moderate the temperature. This works with any yeast dough.
    • Deflate, cover again and refrigerate overnight or up to 3 days.

    Filling, Shaping and Finishing

    • Spray a 9" x 5" loaf pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Roll the dough into an 18" x 24" rectangle. Turn the dough so the 18" side is in front of you. If at any point the dough softens too much and is difficult to work, place it on a baking sheet (fold it to fit) and place it in the fridge or freezer to firm it up. Unfold, smooth out any wrinkles and continue.
    • Reserving 2 tablespoons of nutella, spread the remainder (1 cup) over the dough to within ½" of all the edges. Roll up tightly to within the last inch. Lightly wet the edge of the dough and finish rolling. Pinch the seam and ends together.
    • Taking one end of the roll in each hand, twist in opposite directions. Twist as hard as you can or several times to maximize the twists.
    • Spread the last 2 tablespoons of nutella on half the twisted roll. Fold the plain twist on top of the nutella and press down. Twist it again as much as you can.
    • Place it in the the prepared pan and press down to flatten. Cover and let rise until doubled.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • While the oven is preheating, combine the egg yolk and cream. Just before putting the babka in the oven, brush it with the egg wash. Let it sit for 5 minutes and brush again to give it that really deep, shiny finish when baked.
    • Bake for 45 to 55 minutes until dark brown and a tester comes out clean and the babka sounds hollow when tapped.
    • While the babka is baking, combine the ½ cup water and ½ cup granulated sugar in a small saucepan. Bring to a boil and boil for 1 minute. Remove from the heat and cool.
    • When the babka is baked, immediately poke holes all over the cake with a cake tester. Spoon the simple syrup evenly over the babka. Cool for about 30 minutes and then turn it out if all of the syrup has been absorebed onto a cooling rack to cool completely.
    • Slice and serve. The babka will keep covered for a couple of days at room temperature. For longer storage, freeze, wrap well and keep frozen for several months. Thaw at room temperature. To freshen, wrap in foil, leaving a small opening at the top. Place in a preheated 350°F oven for about 20 minutes until warmed through.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _____________________________________________________
    The butter, eggs and sugar in the dough are referred to as a rich dough as opposed to lean doughs that refer to breads which contain flour, water,salt and yeast.
    Refrigerating this dough allows the gluten to rest as well as firm up the dough with it's high butter content making it really easy to roll out with no spring back. 
    Rolling the dough up tightly and then twisting it as much as possible makes the swirly inside that is indicative of babka.
    If at any point the dough becomes too soft to work, simply put it on a parchment lined baking sheet and refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm it up again.
    I prefer to cover my dough when rising with a tea towel and not plastic wrap. If the item rises above the rim of the pan, the plastic wrap can inhibit any further rise if it is too tightly bound to the pan. 
    To make a proofer f the room is really cool, place the container in the oven with the light on. Do not turn the oven on. The light will provide enough heat to make a proofer. Check the temperature after about an hour. Make sure it isn't over about 90°F. If it is, place a wooden spoon in the door to keep it ajar about ½" to moderate the temperature. This works with any yeast dough.
    Do not store this in the refrigerator. Refrigeration drys out breads. 
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 10servingsCalories: 426kcalCarbohydrates: 55gProtein: 7gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 14gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 82mgSodium: 143mgPotassium: 174mgFiber: 2gSugar: 30gVitamin A: 396IUVitamin C: 0.01mgCalcium: 55mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies

    Modified: Sep 19, 2025 · Published: Sep 19, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

    A white bowl holds single Spiced Shortbread cookies on a marble background with a broken sandwiched cookie in the foreground.

    These Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies are one of the easiest and simplest to make. Three ingredients plus the two flavorings are all that is needed and I'll bet they're in you pantry and fridge already. Now imagine these are sandwiched with a chocolate sour cream ganache. This shortbread uses Chinese 5 Spice powder or cinnamon.

    A white bowl holds single Spiced Shortbread cookies on a marble background with a broken sandwiched cookie in the foreground.

    This is the same basic shortbread we used at the bakery. I am so in love the shortbread cookies, there is a whole chapter in my Craving Cookies cookbook. If available, European Butter is perfect for these cookies.

    While I include mixing methods for both the processor and mixer, I am showing you the mixer in the instructions.

    Other interesting shortbread cookies include: Viennese Whirls, Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies, Tropical Shortbread Cookies (think coconut and macadamia nuts), Peppermint Ravioli Cookies, and everybody's favorite, the savory Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Chinese 5 Spice Powder

    Chinese 5 Spice is typically a blend of five different spices -  star anise, cloves, Chinese cinnamon, Sichuan peppercorns, and fennel seeds. It is use in savory recipes as well as sweet. Star anise and fennel both taste to a greater or lesser degree like licorice.

    The same amount of cinnamon can be substituted if desired.

    What Makes a Shortbread Cookie

    Traditional shortbread cookies are basically made with butter, flour, and sugar, either granulated or powdered sugar. No eggs, baking powder or baking soda are used. They are tender and have a melt in your mouth texture. Having said that, additions are anything you want from nuts to citrus zest, and extracts. The dough can be used for cookies, cookie bases, and pastry crusts.

    These are one of the easiest cookies to make.....and to enjoy!

    Why You'll Want to Make This Cookie

    • They're really easy to make either in a food processor or mixer.
    • They last forever in an airtight tin.
    • The size and shape can be changed with cookie cutters for any holiday - or just make bars.
    • The Basic Shortbread (butter, flour and sugar) can be sandwiched with you're favorite filling.
    • They can be baked plain, with sanding or pearl sugar on top or iced as in Painted Cookies.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies

    Ingredients for the Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies are all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, unsalted butter, 5 spice powder and orange zest.

    FRONT ROW: 5 Spice Powder, orange zest

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, granulated sugar

    Chocolate Sour Cream Ganache

    Ingredients for the chocolate  sour cream  ganache are semisweet chocolate and sour cream.

    Left to Right: Semisweet chocolate (not chocolate chips), sour cream

    This photo shows the  decorative sanding on the left and Swedish Pearl sugar on the right.

    Left to Right: Sanding Sugar and Swedish Pearl Sugar

    Key Ingredients

    • Chinese 5 Spice powder is used for it's unique flavor. Cinnamon may be substituted if desired.
    • European butter is great to use here. I usually use Kerry Gold but in this instance I was out and subbed American butter with good results.
    • Grating oranges, lemons or limes with a microplaner is recommended over using a box grater. The box grater yields less zest and is often wetter than using microplane grater. The microplanes come with different size shreds from small to large.
    • While I used full fat sour cream, low fat could also be used.
    • The chocolate should be semisweet chocolate not chocolate chips. My chocolate of choice is Callebaut #811 semisweet callets (the look like chocolate chips but are pure chocolate in a form that melts quickly and easily.
    • The two sugars are Sanding sugar which is a sparkly larger version of granulated sugar that won't melt in the oven. The Second one is Swedish Pearl Sugar which is a larger very white sugar that stays that way under the heat of the oven. Both are used for decoration. Do not get Belgian Pearl Sugar as it is much too large for cookies.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collage shows the butter and sugar in the mixer, the spices and orange zest added, the flour added and the finished dough.

    Step 1. Place the softened butter and granulated sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Beat until the mixture is light and fluffy, then beat in the 5 spice powder or cinnamon and orange zest. Step 3. Add the flour all at once. Step 4. Beat until it comes together.

    This collages shows the dough has come together, it's shaped into a round, rolled out between waxed paper and being moved with a spatula.

    Step 5. Continue mixing until it forms a solid mass. Step 6. Remove it from the mixer and shape into a disc. If it is very soft, refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm up. Step 7. Divide the dough in half. Cover one half. Roll between sheets of waxed paper to the thickness of about ¼". (See the Cut Out Cookies using the Waxed Paper Technique). If the dough has softened, place it on a cookie sheet and refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm it up for the best looking cookies. Cut the cookies out. I used a 2" daisy cutter. Step 8. To easily remove the cookies, chill or freeze until hard. Lift them off with a pancake turner or just pop them out and place them on parchment lined cookie sheets or half sheet pans about 1" apart. Sprinkle half of them with either sanding sugar or Swedish Pearl Sugar. Bake as directed. Cool completely before sandwiching.

    The last collage shows the cookies being assembled into sandwiches with the cookie top and bottom lined up, the sour cream ganache made, dropped on the bottom cookie and spread out.

    Step 9. Line the cookies up so the bottoms are turned upward and the tops are facing bottom down. Step 10. Melt the chocolate at half power in the microwave or over simmering water in a double boiler. Cool to lukewarm and stir in the room temperature sour cream. Step 11. Pipe or spoon the ganache in the middle of the bottom cookie. Spread it flat leaving a bit of room around the edge. Place the top sugared cookie on and press lightly to make sure it adheres.

    See the recipe card if using the food processor.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is the best sugar for shortbread cookies?

    It depends upon the texture you want. Granulated sugar makes a crisp shortbread while powdered sugar makes a more tender one. However, they cannot be exchanged for each other by volume - only by weight. ½ cup granulated sugar weighs 100 grams. ½ cup powdered sugar weighs 65 grams.

    What is the best butter for shortbread cookies?

    Many people believe that European style butter which has a higher fat content makes the best tasting cookie since the flavor of the cookie comes from the butter.

    Can additional ingredients be added?

    Of course. Vanilla, peppermint, and almond extracts are popular additions. Finely ground nuts, coconut, mini chocolate chips, lemon or orange zest, many things can be added.

    Expert Tips

    • The butter must be cold if using the food processor.
    • If using the mixer the butter must be very soft.
    • If using mixer the dough may need to be chilled to firm it up before rolling. Do not let it get rock hard which it will if left in the fridge too long.
    • My preference is to roll between waxed paper as it is easier to see through it. The waxed paper needs to flipped over from time to time, the paper removed and then put back on without the wrinkles for the dough to continue to roll out evenly.
    • These shortbreads do not need to be chilled before baking to keep their shape. However, if they are add a few more minutes to the baking time.
    • The cookies benefit from being made ahead so the flavor has time to develop. They last at least a week in an airtight tin.
    • If desired, the cookies can be cut out, frozen hard and then wrapped well and frozen. Bake them from the frozen state adding additional time.
    A white bowl holds single Spiced Shortbread cookies on a marble background with a broken sandwiched cookie in the foreground.

    A Few Holiday Worthy Cookies

    • White, star shaped cinnamon Zimtsterne cookies are flowing fro a container surounded by holiday ornaments.
      Zimtsterne - German Cinnamon Stars
    • A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
      Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
    • A wicker basket with a doilie holds black and white glazed Pryaniki cookies.
      Pryaniki - Russian Honey Spice Cookies
    • Finished trio of cookies
      Holiday Cookies

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A white bowl holds single Spiced Shortbread cookies on a marble background with a broken sandwiched cookie in the foreground.

    Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These Best Spiced Shortbread Cookies use only three ingredients plus two flavorings. Now imagine these are sandwiched with a chocolate sour cream ganache.
    4.75 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 12 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 42 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 25 cookies
    Calories 153 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Shortbread Cookies

    • 1 cup unsalted butter (225 grams)
    • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour (350 grams)
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams
    • 1 teaspoon Chinese 5 spice powder or cinnamon
    • Rind of one small orange
    • Sanding Sugar or Swedish Pearl Sugar as needed

    Sour Cream Ganache

    • 3 ounces semisweet chocolate (85 grams)
    • 3 ounces sour cream (85 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Shortbread Cookies

      Mixer Methods - the butter needs to be softened

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line several baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
      • Combine the softened butter with the sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until very light and fluffy. Add the flour, 5 spice or cinnamon and orange zest and mix until it comes together in a sold mass.

      Processor Method - the butter needs to be cold for this version.

      • Add the flour, 5 spice or cinnamon and orange zest to the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times to mix. Place the cold, cut up butter in a circle on top of the flour.
      • Process until the butter is indistinguishable. Add the sugar and process until a ball forms. The dough may need to be re-distributed and processed again.

      For Both Mixing Methods

      • Divide the dough in half. Wrap the other half while working on this one. Roll between two sheets of wax paper to a thickness of about ¼" (see Cut Out Cookies Technique Using Wax paper. Cut the cookies out with a 2" cutter or your desired shape and size.
      • Place the cookies, still on the waxed paper, on a baking sheet and freeze until hard. Remove the cookies with a pancake turner or simply pop them out. This ensures they have sharp, clean edges with no stretching or distortion.. Place on the prepared baking sheets about 1" apart.
      • Repeat with the second half of the dough. Sprinkle half of the cookies with Swedish Pearl sugar or sanding sugar.
      • Re-roll the scraps and cut more cookies out.
      • Bake for 10 to 12 minutes until lightly browned around the edges.. Cool completely.

      Sour Cream Ganache and Sandwiching

      • Microwave the chocolate at half power or over a double boiler until some of it is melted and appears shiny. Stir to smooth out the chocolate. Cool to lukewarm then stir in the room temperature sour cream.
      • Line the cookies up with a top and bottom. Turn the bottom cookie, bottom side up. Turn the top cookie sugar side up. Pipe or spoon some of the ganache onto the bottom cookie. Spread it out flat leaving a slight edge with no ganache. Top with the top sugared cookie and very lightly press down to make sure it adheres to the ganache.
      • These will last for a week in an airtight tin.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
       Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
      ___________________________________________________
      The butter must be cold if using the food processor.
      If using the mixer it must be very soft.
      If using mixer the dough may need to be chilled to firm it up before rolling. Do not let it get rock hard which it will if left in too long. 
      My preference is to roll between waxed paper as it is easier to see what is going on. The waxed paper needs to flipped over from time to time, the paper removed and then put back on without the wrinkles for the dough to continue to roll out evenly. 
      These shortbreads do not need to be chilled before baking to keep their shape. However, if they are add a few more minutes to the baking time. 
      The cookies benefit from being made ahead as the flavor has time to develop. They last a long time in an airtight tin.
      If desired, the cookies can be cut out, frozen hard and then wrapped well and frozen. Bake them from the frozen state adding additional time.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 25cookiesCalories: 153kcalCarbohydrates: 16gProtein: 2gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 22mgSodium: 3mgPotassium: 40mgFiber: 1gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 250IUVitamin C: 0.03mgCalcium: 10mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Recipe

      Modified: Sep 17, 2025 · Published: Sep 16, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 13 Comments

      A slice of the Butter Run Pecan Tart sists on a brown striped plate with a dollup of whipped cream.

      This Butter-Rum Pecan Tart screams fall is just about here. Fresh pecans abound and are perfect for the amazingly easy pastry tart shell. Golden syrup and a bit of dark rum accentuates the flavor of the toasted nuts for an unbeatable combination that is sure to find a place in your repertoire.

      With Thanksgiving just around the corner, this could very well be the easy recipe you were looking for.  

      A slice of Butter Rum Pecan Tart on a plate with whipped cream to the side.

      Fall is a wonderful time of the year.  I also especially like it since it brings fresh apples just off the trees and a new crop of pecans.  Both are among my favorite foods.

      A few more of my favs: Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart, Easy Almond Raspberry Tart, Chocolate Cranberry Curd Tart, Cinnamon Whiskey Apple Tart, and everyone's favorite, the S'Mores Tart.

      This post was originally published on November 8, 2021. It has been updated in the new format with additional information and a recipe card.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      The Pecans

      Although there are exceptions, I toast all of the nuts I use to deepen their flavor.  The toasted pecans are used in both the crust and the filling.  I generally toast the nuts when I buy them, cool them completely, and then freeze them for longer storage.  That way, they are ready to use when needed.

      To toast the nuts, preheat the oven to 350°F.  Place the pecans on a rimmed baking sheet in a single layer and toast for about 7 minutes.  Stir, then toast for 3 to 5 minutes more until fragrant and lightly colored.  Cool completely before using. Freeze for longer storage.

      The Crust

      This crust is easily made in the processor.  I found a new, easier way to make the bottom of the tart crust, which I show you below in the step by step photos.  I then press in the sides to complete it.  The crust can be frozen for several months, well wrapped, so it is at hand and ready to be partially baked from the freezer.

      The crust needs to be par baked before the pecans and filling are added.

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Filling

      Less gooey than a regular pecan pie, this tart is every bit, if not more, sinfully rich.  The use of golden syrup instead of corn syrup adds one more layer of flavor to this already best of all pecan tarts.

      This filling couldn’t be easier to make.  A whisk and a bowl, and you’re ready to go. 

      I know you'll love this recipe because

      • It's super easy
      • It can be done in part or in whole, and frozen
      • It's the perfect holiday dessert
      • And it's a new take on a holiday favorite

      Recipe Ingredients

      Pecan Crust

      The ingredients for the crust are toasted pecans, all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, salt, unsalted butter, and heavy cream.

      COUNTERCLOCKWISE: Pecans, all-purpose flour, unsalted butter, salt, granulated sugar, and cream in the middle.

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Filling

      Ingredients for the filling are toasted pecans, golden syrup, brown sugar, egg, egg yolk, heavy cream, dark drum, unsalted butter, and salt.

      FRONT ROW: Egg yolk, dark rum, whole egg

      MIDDLE ROW: Brown sugar, heavy cream, melted butter

      BACK ROW: Toasted Pecans, Golden Syrup

      Whipped Cream

      Heavy cream and powdered sugar for the whipped cream accompaniment.

      Powdered Sugar, heavy cream

      Key Ingredients

      • Pecan halves that have been toasted are important to the look and taste of the tart
      • Golden syrup, which can be found on Amazon, enhances the taste of the tart, but clear corn syrup can also be used.
      • Dark rum should be used for the best taste. My favorite is Meyer's Dark Rum. Look for the little individual serving bottles - that's more than you'll need.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      It is easiest to toast all of the pecans at once, using the amounts called for in the crust and filling.

      Pecan Crust

      The first collage for the Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Recipe shows the toasted pecans in the processor blow wth the flour, sugar and salt, then processed, the butter added and   then processed.

      Step 1. Toast the pecans and cool them. Place them in the processor along with the flour, sugar, and salt. Step 2. Pulse to cut them coarsely. Step 3. Cut the butter into pieces and place them over the flour/pecan mixture. Step 4. Process until it looks like sand.

      In this collage, cream is poured over the mixture in the processor and processed unti large crumbs form, the crumbs are poured onto a work surface and the bottom of the tin is place on a piece of parchment paper.

      Step 5. Add the cream to the processor. Step 6. Process until large crumbs form. Take a little of the dough and pinch it together. If it is too dry to hold, process in a teaspoon of cream until it forms large, moist crumbs. Step 7. Pour it out onto a work surface and push it together to form a round. Knead it a couple of times into a smooth ball. Step 8. Place the bottom round of the tart pan on a piece of waxed paper.

      This collage shows the circle made on parchment paper, part of the dough rolled to fit within the circle, the bottom of the tart pan placed over the dough and then inserted into the rim of the tart pan.

      Step 9. Using the bottom of the tart pan as the guide, draw a circle on a piece of wax paper. Flip the paper over so the ink is on the bottom. Step 10. If the dough is really soft, refrigerate it to firm it. Divide the dough in half (about 160 grams). Cover the remaining dough. Shape the half into a round and then flatten it in the middle of the circle. Place another piece of wax paper on top and roll it evenly to fill in the circle. Step 11. Remove the top piece of waxed paper. Place the bottom of the tin on top of the dough. Step 12. Flip the dough over so the bottom of the tart pan is on the work surface and the wax paper is on top.  Remove the wax paper.  Place the pan bottom, dough side up, into the tart pan. If the dough has gotten soft at any point, refrigerate or freeze it to firm it up to make it easier to roll or flip.

      This collage shows the sides of the dough being added to the tart pan with a rope of dough being rolled out, place on the side of half of the pan, the ends of the ropes covering the side of the pan joined and pressed against the rim.

      Step 13. Divide the remaining dough in half again (about 80 grams each). Roll one piece into a 14" rope. Step 14. Place it inside the rim halfway around. Step 15. Repeat with the second piece of dough, overlapping the two edges. Step 16. Press the dough firmly against the rim of the pan.

      This collages shows the pecan crust completed, the brown sugar, egg and egg yolk in a bowl, whisked together and the golden syrup added.

      Step 17. Make sure the bottom edge is at a 90° angle is is firmly attached to the side crust. Freeze the crust until hard. Either wrap and store for later or bake as called for and set aside. If baking immediately, place on a parchment lined baking pan and bake as called for. Set aside while preparing the crust. Step 18. Place the brown sugar, egg, and egg yolk in a medium size bowl. Step 19. Whisk them together until completely blended. Step 20. Whisk in the golden syrup.

      The final collage shows the rum, butter and salt added to the bowl, the toasted pecan halves lining the par baked crust in a single layer, the liquid poured over and the tart baked.

      Step 21. Whisk in the cream, rum, butter, and salt completely. Step 22. While still on the baking pan, fill the crust with the toasted pecan halves. Place them in the pecan shell in an even layer. For the prettiest look, turn the halves right side up. Step 23. Whisk the filling one more time, and carefully and gently pour the liquid filling over the pecans. Submerge any pecans not covered with the filling. Step 24. Bake as called for. Cool. The Butter-Rum Pecan Tart can be served immediately, or it can be left in the tin, cooled completely, wrapped wel,l and frozen for a month or so.

      Serve with whipped cream as on the recipe card.

      Recipe FAQS

      What is the difference between a pie and a tart?

      Pies usually have a top of some kind. It can have two crusts, one on top and one on the bottom, or a crumb or streusel topping. They are also usually, but not always, deeper than a tart. A tart is distinguished by the lack of a top finish when baked, the sides of the pan are rippled, and it is shorter, in most cases, than a pie. They are often very rich.

      Can a regular pie crust be substituted for the pecan crust?

      It isn't advisable as the crust has to be partially baked. Regular pie crusts shrink during baking, but the tart crust, which is a short crust, doesn't if frozen first.

      Where can things go wrong when making a Pecan Tart?

      Using stale pecans, not toasting the nuts first, over or under baking, not par baking the crust, overfilling the crust, using the wrong crust can make a disappointing finished tart.

      Storage and Freezing

      The crust may be made and frozen in the pan, well wrapped, for a couple of months unbaked. Bake straight from the freezer as called for.

      The tart as a whole can be frozen in the pan, well wrapped, for a couple of months also. Thaw the tart at room temperature. Warm it in a 350°F oven for 20 to 25 minutes to refresh it.

      Expert Tips

      • Make sure the pecans are fresh. I buy them in the fall when they are and store them in the freezer to make sure they don't become rancid. At the bakery, we would toast 30# boxes of nuts all at once, replace them in their box when cooled, and store them in the freezer so they would be ready when we needed them. Worked perfectly.
      • Be sure to toast the pecans. It makes all the difference in the taste of the tart.
      • Individual, small bottles of most liquors and liqueurs can be purchased anywhere alcohol is sold. They contain ¼ cup, which is a bit more than needed for this recipe.
      • Please use dark rum (Meyer's Dark Rum is my go-to) for the best flavor. Lighter rums are too mild to carry the flavor.
      • Keep a small piece of the raw crust dough out and use it to patch the crust if it separates anywhere where it was joined. Just use a small spatula to smear a bit of the raw crust over the opening to seal it. It doesn't have to be baked again.
      • While I highly recommend Tate & Lyle's Golden Syrup, corn syrup or honey can be substituted.
      • Dark or light brown sugar can be used. Dark will give the best flavor to the tart.
      A slice of the Butter Run Pecan Tart sists on a brown striped plate with a dollup of whipped cream.

      More Tarts for Your Pleasure

      • Slice of Caramel Apple Tart
        Caramel Apple Tart
      • A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.
        Macadamia and Coconut Tart
      • A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself
        (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart
      • A slice of Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart on a plate with Rum Caramel Sauce and the tart in the bakground
        Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart with Caramel Rum Sauce

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes, and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      A slice of the Butter Run Pecan Tart sists on a brown striped plate with a dollup of whipped cream.

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Butter-Rum Pecan Tart screams fall is just about here. Fresh pecans abound and are perfect for the amazingly easy tart. With Thanksgiving just around the corner, this could very well be that easy recipe you were looking for.  
      5 from 3 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 40 minutes mins
      Cook Time 40 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 10 servings
      Calories 523 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9x¾" tart pan with removable bottom
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Pecan Crust - it is easiest to toast all of the pecans at once and separate them as the recipe calls for.

      • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar (25 grams)
      • ¼ teaspoon table salt
      • ½ cup pecan halves (60 grams)
      • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, cold (90 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons heavy cream

      Butter-Rum Pecan Filling

      • ¼ cup dark brown sugar, packed (50 grams)
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 large egg yolk
      • ⅔ cup golden syrup
      • ⅓ cup heavy cream
      • 3 tablespoons dark rum
      • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (45 grams)
      • ¼ teaspoon table salt
      • 1 ½ cups toasted pecan halves (180 grams)

      Whipped Cream Accompaniment

      • 1 cup heavy cream
      • ¼ cup powdered sugar ((32 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Pecan Crust - It will be easiest to toast all of the pecans at once using them as called for in the recipe.

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
      • Place the flour, sugar, salt and pecans in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse to coarsely cut in the pecans.
      • Cut the butter into smaller pieces and add to the processor. Pulse to cut in and mix well. It will look like sand.
      • Add the cream and pulse it in to make large crumbs. Take a bit between your fingers and press together. If it is too dry to stay together, add about 1 teaspoon cream at a time, pulsing it in.
      • Pour the dough out onto a work surface and push it together. Knead several times to make a smooth dough. Reserve a walnut size piece of dough. Divide it in half (about 160 grams). Cover the remaining dough. If at any time it becomes too soft to work, chill or freeze it to firm it up.
      • Using the bottom of the tart pan as a guide, draw a circle on a piece of waxed paper. Flip the paper over so the ink is on the bottom.
      • Place half of the dough in the center of the circle and flatten it. Place another piece of waxed paper on top and roll it out evenly to fit the circle. If there is a bit of overhang, trim it off.
      • Remove the top piece of waxed paper. Place the bottom of the tart pan on top of the dough.
      • Flip the dough over, so the bottom of the pan is on the work surface and the waxed paper is on top. Remove the paper. Place the pan bottom, dough side up, in the tart pan. If the dough seems too soft to flip, chill or freeze it for a few minutes to firm it up.
      • Divide the remaining piece of dough in half again (about 80 grams each). Roll one piece into a 14" rope. Place it halfway around the inside of the tart pan rim. Repeat with the second piece of dough, making sure the edges overlap.
      • Press the overlapping edges together very well. Press the ropes into the side of the pan and connect it to the bottom crust. Make sure the bottom edge is at a 90° angle and is firmly attached to the bottom crust.
      • Freeze the crust hard before baking it. Line a rimmed baking pan with parchment paper. Place the frozen crust in the pan and bake for about 25 to 30 minutes until lightly browned and almost done. If the crust separates at any joint, take a small piece of the reserved dough and patch it using a small metal spatula or the back of a teaspoon. There is no need to bake again. Set aside while making the filling.
      • Reduce the oven temperature to 325°F.

      Butter-Rum Pecan Tart Filling

      • Whisk together the brown sugar, egg and egg yolk in a medium size bowl.
      • Whisk in the golden syrup until thoroughly mixed, followed by the rum, butter and salt.
      • Line the almost baked bottom crust, still on the baking sheet, with the toasted pecan halves in a flat layer. For the prettiest look, turn the halves right side up. Whisk the filling one more time and pour it gently over the pecans. Submerge any pecans if they are not coated with the filling.
      • Bake in the center of the oven for about 30 to 40 minutes until the pecans are dark, and the filling is bubbling around the edges but still slightly loose in the center.
      • Cool the tart. It can be served immediately with the whipped cream or it can be left in the tin, wrapped well, and frozen for a month or so.
      • When ready to serve, thaw the tart at room temperature. Warm it in a 350°F oven for 20 to 25 minutes to refresh it.

      Whipped Cream Accompaniment

      • Combine the cream and powdered sugar in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the whisk attachment. Whip to soft to medium peaks. This may be done the day before or early in the day. Place it in a covered container and refrigerate.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
       Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
      ­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
      __________________________________________________
      Make sure the pecans are fresh. I buy in the fall when they are and store in the freezer to make sure they don't become rancid. At the bakery, we would toast 30# boxes of nuts all at once, replace them in their box when cooled and store them in the freezer so they would be ready when we needed them. Worked perfectly.
      Be sure to toast the pecans. It makes all the difference in the taste of the tart.
      Individual, small bottles of most liquors and liqueurs can be purchased anywhere alcohol is sold. They contain ¼ cup which is a bit more than needed for this recipe.
      Please use dark rum (Meyer's Dark Rum is my go-to) for the best flavor. Lighter rums are too mild to carry the flavor.
      Keep a small piece of the raw crust dough out and use it to patch the crust if it separates anywhere where it was joined. Just use a small spatula to smear a bit of the raw crust over the opening to seal it. It doesn't have to be baked again.
      While I highly recommend Tate & Lyle's Golden Syrup, corn syrup or honey can be substituted. 
      Dark or light brown sugar can be used. Dark will give the best flavor to the tart.
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 10servingsCalories: 523kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 5gFat: 38gSaturated Fat: 16gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 14gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 86mgSodium: 136mgPotassium: 145mgFiber: 2gSugar: 31gVitamin A: 865IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 49mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Exceptional Tuxedo Cake

      Modified: Sep 16, 2025 · Published: Sep 8, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 18 Comments

      Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.

      This Exceptional Tuxedo Cake is based on the Costco Tuxedo Cake. Named after the black suit with a white vest, shirt and tie, a tuxedo exudes luxury on sight as does this cake. An easily made decadent chocolate cake it's layered with both a chocolate and Bailey's white chocolate mousse. This cake recipe is the perfect celebration cake for any occasion.

      Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.

      I took some liberty with the white chocolate mousse using my favorite combination of white chocolate Bailey's which you can find in Bailey's Pi Day Pie, Easy Chocolate Guinness Cake with Bailey's Whipped Cream, The Definitive Bailey's Cheesecake and Warm Chocolate Cakes with Bailey's Sauce.

      Despite the steps, all of the component parts are simple to make. The chocolate cake layers requires no folding in of ingredients or creaming. Both of the mousses are easy as is the indulgent Dark Satin Ganache which finishes the cake. To make it even more appealing, the entire cake can be made and frozen.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why use oil instead of butter in a cake?

      When I first opened my bakery I thought, mistakenly, that the best cakes were made with butter and so that is what I pursued. We made everything on site except a small butter shell for petit fours. My bakery mainly serviced hotels, restaurants and caterers......and there in lay the problem.

      Despite what is commonly thought, restaurants do not usually serve a whole cake in one night. They need a product that has several days shelf life. Hotels and caterers do but they plate up in advance so the cake has to stay moist and delicious. They are also often stored in the refrigerator until shortly before service.

      The sad news is a butter cake has little to no shelf life and it dries out much faster than a cake made with oil. Also, using a neutral oil allows the flavors to come through. Butter, while adding it own wonderful taste, can dilute the main flavor.

      If you think about it, butter gets hard if cold and most cakes are stored in the refrigerator. Oil, on the other hand, stays liquid at room temperature or in the fridge. Consequently, oil is often the better choice.

      The one exception at the bakery was wedding cakes. The majority were butter cakes unless they chose a chocolate cake (we used the one below) or a carrot cake.

      A cake batter can use both oil and butter. Oil to keep it moist and butter for the flavor. All of these cakes have a place in any cake repertoire. It just depends upon when and how it will be served.

      Melting Chocolate

      Dark chocolate can be melted one of two ways, either in a double boiler over simmering water or at half power in the microwave. For me the half power is the key as it is easier to keep the chocolate from burning.

      However, for white chocolate I always melt in a double boiler over barely simmering water. White chocolate is extremely easy to sieze. Siezing refers to chocolate that either by getting too hot or not having enough liquid with it will form a block that will not melt. At this point, a bit of solid shortening (not butter because it has water in it) can be added to help get it back to a state where it will melt.

      Making the Chocolate Curls

      It's easy to make the curls if you keep a couple of things in mind. The temperature of the chocolate is important. It should be room temperature in a room around 74°F. Also, I have found a lot of success using Ghirardelli chocolate squares in white, milk and dark chocolate. Others may work well also.

      Wrap the bottom of the bar in a couple of thickness of paper towels to prevent the chocolate from melting when you are holding it.

      The white chocolate is the softest and makes the best curls, followed by the milk and the dark usually makes shards which is fine when all of them are mixed together.

      Using a vegetable peeler as seen below, it is easy to just to peel the chocolate from the short side of the bar. The amount of pressure with which you peel will determine the size of the curls.

      Make Ahead Steps

      • The cake can be made a couple of months ahead by leaving it in the pan, freezing it, and wrapping it well.
      • Both mousses can be made a day or two ahead, covered tightly so they don't pick up any orders and refrigerated.
      • The cake can also be assembled and completely frozen for a month. Freeze it first then wrap in foil. To thaw it, place it in the refrigerator still wrapped. Thaw overnight. By leaving it wrapped, the condensation which normally occurs will go to the top of the foil and not the top of the cake.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Very Chocolate Cake

      Ingredients for the Very Chocolate Cake are hot water, instant coffee, granulated sugar, all-purpose flour, Dutch cocoa, baking soda, baking powder, salt, vegetable oil, sour cream, eggs and vanilla extract.

      FRONT ROW: Baking soda, instant coffee, baking powder, vanilla extract, salt

      SECOND ROW: Eggs, sour cream

      THIRD ROW: Brown sugar, granulated sugar, Dutch cocoa powder

      BACK ROW: Water, all-purpose flour, oil

      Tuxedo Cake Mousses

      Chocolate Mousse

      The ingredients for the chocolate mousse are semisweet chocolate, heavy cream, vanilla and instant coffee.

      FRONT ROW: Vanilla extract, instant coffee

      BACK ROW: Semisweet chocolate, heavy whipping cream

      White Chocolate Mousse

      The ingredients for the white chocolate mousse are heavy cream, Bailey's liqueur, white chocolate.

      FRONT ROW: White Chocolate

      BACKROW: Heavy Cream, Bailey's Liqueur

      Cake Finish

      The ingredients to finish the cake are unsalted butter, corn syrup, semi sweet chocolate, heavy cream and multi-colored chocolate curls.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, corn syrup

      BACK ROW: Semisweet chocolate (not chocolate chips), white, milk,dark chocolate curls, heavy cream

      Key Ingredients

      • Any good quality semisweet chocolate is fine. My preference is Callebaut Semisweet callets #811. Although they look like chocolate chips they are pure chocolate.
      • Instant coffee of your choice can be used. Espresso should be cut in half. The coffee is used to enhance the chocolate and not as a discernible flavor.
      • Heavy cream is necessary for not only the taste but for the thickness to which it can be whipped.
      • The Bailey's Liqueur is used as a flavoring with the white chocolate. Small ¼ cup bottles can be found at liqueur and grocery stores. It is just enough for this recipe.
      • The white chocolate mixture requires real white chocolate, not compounds, should be used. If the ingredients on the label list cocoa butter it is real white chocolate. If there isn't it won't taste or act as will white chocolate.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      It is important to mix this cake on low. The cake will rise in the center no matter how the pan is prepared if it is mixed on too high a speed.

      Very Chocolate Cake

      This collage for the Very Chocolate Cake shows the dry ingredients mixed together, the water and coffee in the bowl of a mixer, the dry ingredients added to the mixer and then mixed

      Step 1. Whisk together the flour, cocoa, baking soda, baking powder and salt. Set aside. Step 2. Add the water and coffee in the mixing bowl and whisk to combine. Whisk in the sugar. It will by rather syrupy. Step 3. Add the dry ingredients to the mixing bowl. Step 4. Mix on low to incorporate - about 2 minutes. It will be thick.

      This collage showss the oil being added, mixed in, and the sour cream being added and mixed in.

      Step 5. Add the oil. Step 6. Beat on low to incorporate the oil. Step 7. Add the sour cream. Step 8. Blend in on low completely.

      The last collage for the cake includes the eggs being added, the batter finished, spread out in a half sheet pan and baked.

      Step 9. Add the eggs. Step 10. Mix on low for about 30 seconds until it is completely blended. Step 11. Line a half sheet pan with parchment paper and spray the paper. Step 12. Bake as required until the center springs back when lightly touched. It should not pull away from the sides of the pan.

      Tuxedo Cake

      Chocolate Mousse

      The first collage for the Tuxedo Cake shows the coffee dissolved in the vanilla, the cream and coffee in a small saucepan, the chocolate added to the hot mixture and the base chocolate mixture for the chocolate mousse.

      Step 1. Add the coffee to the vanilla in a small bowl. Stir to dissolve the coffee. Step 2. Place the cream and coffee in a small saucepan. Heat just until the mixture comes is steaming hot, stirring from time to time. Do not let it boil. Step 3. Add the chocolate and submerge it under the hot cream. Let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes to melt the chocolate. Step 4. Stir the mixture until all of the chocolate has melted and it's smooth.

      This collage shows the cream for the chocolate mousse beaten, added to the chocolate, being gently whisked in and the finished mousse.

      Step 5. Using the whisk attachment on your mixer, whip the cream to medium peaks (somewhat passed soft peak). Step 6. Add it to the chocolate base. Step 7. Fold the cream in. It is easiest to use a whisk. Do not stir it in, fold it in so the air is not lost. Step 8. Chill the mousse while the rest of the parts are prepared.

      White Chocolate Mousse

      The white chocolate and Bailey's are in a double boiler over simmering water.

      Step 9. Place the Bailey's and white chocolate in the top of a double boiler over simmering (not boiling) water. Step 10. When it begins to melt, stir it until it is all melted and smooth. Do not let the bottom of the top container touch the water and keep the water at a bare simmer. Cool it completely. Step 11. Whip the cream to medium peaks (somewhat passed the soft peak stage). Step 12. Stir about ¼ of the cream into the chocolate to lighten it. Fold the remainder of the cream into the chocolate. Refrigerate.

      Dark Satin Ganache

      This Collage shows the Dark Satin Ganache being made with the butter, cream and corn syrup in a small pan, melted, the chocolatesubmerged and the finished ganache.

      Step 13. Place the cream, butter and corn syrup in a medium size pan. Step 14. Place over medium heat and heat until the ingredients are melted and the mixture is steaming hot but not boiling. Step 15. Remove from the heat and submerge the chocolate under the hot cream. Step 16. Stir to smooth out, making sure to reach into the corners of the pan. If using immediately, do not use a whisk as it will incorporate air bubbles that are hard to get out.

      Assembly

      This collage shows the paper being removed from the bottom of the cake layer, the cake cut into 3 rectangles, the bottom layer spread with the chocolate mousse and the middle layer spread with the white chocolate mousse.

      Step 17. Go around the edges of the pan with a small metal spatula to release the cake. Cover the top of the baked and cooled cake with a large piece of parchment paper paper. Turn the cake out of the pan so the bottom paper is now on top. Remove the paper carefully, keeping it low to the cake. Do not just pull it off or you can tear the cake. Step 18. Turn the cake so the 18" side is in front of you. Cut 3 5" layers from the cake. There will be a small, delicious treat for your efforts up to this point. Enjoy it! Step 19. Place one of the layers of cake on a cake board or a piece of cardboard cut a bit larger on each side. Wrap it in foil and proceed. Spread the cold chocolate mouse over the cake layer. Top it with the second layer of cake. Step 20. Spread the cold white chocolate mousse evenly over that layer. Top with the last layer of cake. Press down gently to make sure ever adheres to each other. Remove any excess mousse outside of the cake layers with a spatula. Wrap the sides and top of the cake in plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight.

      The last collage shows the assembled cake, white chocolate curls being made with a vegetable peeler, the ganache on top of the cake and the cake finished with multi colored chocolate curls.

      Step 21. Top with the last layer of cake. Press down gently to make sure ever adheres to each other. Remove any excess mousse outside of the cake layers with a spatula. Wrap the sides and top of the cake in plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight. Step 22. To make the white, milk and dark chocolate curls, wrap the bottom of a bar of chocolate with a couple of thicknesses of paper towels to prevent melting the chocolate as you hold it. Using a vegetable peeler, peel the chocolate to make curls. You don't need to make curls from the whole bar. Just a quarter of each bar is plenty. Mix the three curls together. Step 23. If the ganache has been made ahead heat it briefly. It should be thick but still able to flow down the sides. Pour most of the ganache on top of the cake. Step 24. With a large offset spatula, push it over the sides and ends of the cake. If the sides aren't perfect, that's fine, they can be finished later. Try to keep the top as smooth as possible. Immediately, using a spoon so the curls aren't broken or melt in your hand, spoon on the curls down the center of the cake. Return excess ganache to the original container. Refrigerate the cake to set up the ganache. If the sides need to be adjusted, use the remaining ganache, without heating it. At this point you want it thicker so you can spread it on the sides and ends with a straight metal spatula. Store the cake in the refrigerator.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why do the white and milk chocolates make better curls?

      White chocolate is softer because it contains a higher proportion of cocoa butter, the fat from the cocoa bean, along with sugar and milk solids, giving it creamy and buttery texture that melts easily on the palate.

      What kind of oil should be used in a cake

      Almost any kind of oil can be used but it is usually a neutral flavored oil such as vegetable or canola oil. Olive oil is sometimes used but can impart its flavor if that is the goal. However, oil is mainly used to keep the product moist much longer than other fats.

      Are all mousses chocolate?

      No. A mousse can be made from a base such as chocolate or a fruit puree to which whipped cream, a meringue or both are used to lighten it. If using a fruit puree gelatin is often used to ensure the mixture sets. Both are chilled into a light and airy richly elegant dessert.

      Expert Tips

      • To keep the chocolate cake from rising in the middle during baking, no matter if you prepared the cake pan properly or not, it is crucial to beat it at every stage on low. We found this out in the bakery as this was our base chocolate cake.
      • When removing the paper from the bottom of any cake, keep the paper being removed close to the cake to prevent tearing some of the cake away.
      • To keep the Dark Satin Ganache from becoming dull, it is important to just let the liquid heat until it is very steamy but not boiling. If the chocolate becomes overly hot when added to the liquid it will lose its sheen.
      • Stir the chocolate into the ganache. Do not use a whisk as it can make air bubbles making a smooth ganache difficult.
      • When folding the cream into the chocolates for the mousses, use a whisk and a folding motion - down, up and over, turning the bowl a quarter turn each time. It goes faster than using a spatula, deflating the cream less.
      • If substituting espresso powder, use half as much as the recipe calls for.
      Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.

      More Extraordinary Celebration Cakes

      • Hazelnut Gianduja Cake
        Hazelnut Gianduja Cake
      • Pave d'Amour
        Pave d'Amour - The Quintessential Celebration Cake
      • Raspberry Rhapsody
        Raspberry Rhapsody Cake
      • Finished Whole, Cut
        27 Layer Tuile Torte

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

      Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.

      Exceptional Tuxedo Cake

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Exceptional Tuxedo Cake is based on the Tuxedo Cake at Costco. An easily made decadent chocolate cake it's layered with both a chocolate and Bailey's white chocolate mousse. This is the perfect celebration cake for any occasion.
      5 from 4 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 3 hours hrs
      Total Time 3 hours hrs
      Course Cake
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 970 kcal

      Equipment

      • 1 half sheet pan
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Very Chocolate Cake

      • 1 cup very hot water
      • 2 ½ teaspoons instant coffee
      • 1 cup dark brown sugar (200 grams)
      • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
      • 1 ¾ cup all-purpose flour (245 grams)
      • 1 cup Dutch cocoa (90 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon baking soda
      • 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • 1 teaspoon salt
      • ½ cup vegetable oil
      • 1 cup sour cream (225 grams)
      • 2 large eggs
      • 2 teaspoon vanilla

      Chocolate Mousse

      • 1 cup heavy cream
      • 3 ounces semisweet chocolate, coarsely chopped (85 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon instant coffee
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla

      White Chocolate Mousse

      • ¼ cup Bailey's liqueur
      • 3 ounces white chocolate, coarsely chopped (85 grams) [not coating chocolate]
      • 1 cup heavy cream

      Dark Satin Ganache & Chocolate Curls

      • ½ cup heavy cream
      • ¼ cup corn syrup
      • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter (70 grams)
      • 10 ounces semisweet chocolate, coarsely chopped (280 grams)
      • 4 ounce white chocolate bar (114 grams)
      • 4 ounce milk chocolate bar (114 grams)
      • 4 ounce dark chocolate bar (114 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Very Chocolate Cake

      • It is most important to mix this recipe at low speed to ensure the cake comes out flat.
      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment. Spray the parchment only with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
      • Whisk together the flour, cocoa, baking soda, baking powder and salt. Set aside.
      • In the bowl of a mixer, place the very hot water and the coffee; whisk to mix and dissolve the coffee. Whisk in the brown and granulated sugars. The mixture will be rather syrupy.
      • Add the flour mixture and mix on low to incorporate - aobut 2 minutes. It will be very thick, Scape the sides and bottom as necessary.
      • Add the oil, mixing on low, next add the sour cream and then the eggs and vanilla, each time mixing completely, about 30 seconds each time.
      • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and spread it out evenly.
      • Bake for 17 to 20 minutes, until a tester comes out clean and it springs back when the middle is touched lightly. Do not over bake.
      • Cool completely on a rack. Freezing the cake after cooling makes it easier to make clean cuts for the layers. For extended freezing, freeze the cake in the pan, well covered in aluminum foil for up to 2 months.

      Chocolate Mousse

      • Coarsely chop the semisweet chocolate.
      • Heat ½ cup cream and coffee until steamy but not boiling. Off heat, submerge the chocolate and let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes. Stir until smooth, making sure to get into the corners of the pan.
      • Stir in the vanilla. Cool completely.
      • Whip the remaining ½ cup of cream to the medium stiff stage and fold into the chocolate. This is most easily done with a whisk using the folding motion. Refrigerate until cold or up to 2 days before using.

      White Chocolate Mousse

      • Cut the white chocolate up coarsely. Combine the chocolate and Bailey's in the top of a double boiler. Make sure the bottom of the bowl does not touch the water and keep the water at a bare simmer.
      • As soon as the chocolate begins to melt, stir it until it is smooth. Remove from the heat and cool completely.
      • Beat the remaining cream until medium stiff Stir about ¼ of the cream into the chocolate to lighten it. Fold the remainder into the white chocolate. Refrigerate until cold or up to 2 days before using.

      Chocolate Curls

      • Any good quality semisweet chocolate is fine. My preference is Callebaut Semisweet callets #811. Although they look like chocolate chips they are pure chocolate.
        Instant coffee of your choice can be used. Espresso should be cut in half. The coffee is used to enhance the chocolate and not as a discernible flavor.
        Heavy cream is necessary for not only the taste but for the thickness to which it can be whipped. 
        The Bailey's Liqueur is used as a flavoring with the white chocolate. Small ¼ cup bottles can be found at liqueur and grocery stores. It is just enough for this recipe. If omitting, use ¼ cup cream with the white chocolate.
        Real white chocolate, not compounds, should be used. If the ingredients on the label list cocoa butter it is real white chocolate. If there isn't it won't taste or act as will white chocolate. of each bar is enough to decorate the cake.
      • Wrap the bottom of the chocolate bar where you hold it with a double thickness of paper towels so the chocolate doesn't melt from the heat of your hand.
      • Place a piece of wax paper in front of you. Using a vegetable peeler, peel the short end of the chocolate bar to make curls over the paper. The amount of pressure with which you peel will determine the size of the curls.
      • Mix them together.
      • The white chocolate will make the best curls and the milk chocolate after that. The dark chocolate is more difficult due to the rigidity of the chocolate. They may end up in shards but that is fine,

      Assembly

      • Freeze the cake for 30 to 40 minutes to make it easier to cut. Place a piece of parchment over the top of the cake and turn it out onto a cake board.
      • Turn the cake with the long side facing you. Cut 3 - 5" wide rectangles from top to bottom. There will be a small piece left over. That's the bakers reward.
      • Place one layer on a cake board. Spread the cold chocolate mousse evenly over the layer. Top with a second layer of cake.
      • Spread the white chocolate mousse over this layer. Place the top layer over the mousse. Wrap well in plastic wrap and chill overnight or freeze. If the cake has been frozen, thaw it overnight in the refrigerator to finish it.

      Dark Satin Ganache

      • Combine the cream, corn syrup and butter in a small saucepan. Heat until the butter melts and the mixture is steamy but do not let it come to a boil.
      • Submerge the chocolate under the hot cream and let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes. Stir until it is smooth, making sure to get into the corners. It should be thick enough to use immediately. If it is hot cool it to lukewarm. Do not let it get completely cold or it will be too set.
      • Pour about ⅔ to ¾ of the ganache over the cake. Using a large offset spatula, smooth the top and let the remainder go over the sides and top and bottom of the cake. Smooth them out. If they aren't covered right away, the extra ganache can be used when it is cold and set up to finish them.
      • Immediately, after covering the top of the cake, use a spoon to distribute the chocolate curls down the center of the cake. Press them in lightly. Collect the ganache that has dripped off the cake and return it to the unused portion. Refrigerate the cake to set the ganache.
      • Use the remainder of the ganache to finish the sides if necessary.
      • Transfer the cake to a serving dish or a cake board if freezing. The easiest way to do this is to go under the cake with a metal spatula so make sure it is free. Use two pancake turners, on on each short end to lift it up. If you are unsure, freeze the cake first and then release it.
      • At this point the cake can be frozen. Freeze it all the way through. Carefully cover it in foil and freeze up to a month. To thaw, leave the wrapping in place and thaw in the refrigerator overnight or the day before. Carefully remove the wrapping before cutting and serving.
      • By leaving the cake wrapped, any condensation that normally happens when thawing will go to the top of the foil and not the top of the cake.
      • Store the cake in the refrigerator.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
      __________________________________________________
      To keep the chocolate cake from rising in the middle during baking, no matter if you prepared the cake pan properly or not, it is crucial to beat it at every stage on low. We found this out in the bakery as this was our base chocolate cake.
      When removing the paper from the bottom of any cake, keep the paper being removed close to the cake to prevent tearing some of the cake away. 
      To keep the Dark Satin Ganache from becoming dull, it is important to just let the liquid heat until it is very steamy but not boiling. If the chocolate becomes overly hot when added to the liquid it will lose its sheen. 
      Stir the chocolate into the ganache. Do not use a whisk as it can make air bubbles making a smooth ganache difficult. 
      When folding the cream into the chocolates for the mousses, use a whisk and a folding motion - down, up and over, turning the bowl a quarter turn each time. It goes faster than using a spatula, deflating the cream less.
      Any good quality semisweet chocolate is fine. My preference is Callebaut Semisweet callets #811. Although they look like chocolate chips they are pure chocolate.
      Instant coffee of your choice can be used. Espresso should be cut in half. The coffee is used to enhance the chocolate and not as a discernible flavor.
      Heavy cream is necessary for not only the taste but for the thickness to which it can be whipped. 
      The Bailey's Liqueur is used as a flavoring with the white chocolate. Small ¼ cup bottles can be found at liqueur and grocery stores. It is just enough for this recipe. 
      Real white chocolate, not compounds, should be used. If the ingredients on the label list cocoa butter it is real white chocolate. If there isn't it won't taste or act as will white chocolate.
       
       
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 970kcalCarbohydrates: 99gProtein: 10gFat: 62gSaturated Fat: 33gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 17gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 116mgSodium: 386mgPotassium: 566mgFiber: 7gSugar: 73gVitamin A: 1063IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 168mgIron: 6mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      Modified: Nov 5, 2025 · Published: Sep 2, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 12 Comments

      Three Apple Caramel Handpies on a white plate.

      These Apple Caramel Hand Pies feature my Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe that mimics puff pastry without all the fuss. There are no butter blocks to contend with, no butter breaking through and not worries. With apple season just around the corner, what could be better than caramels and apples enclosed in a flaky pastry?

      Three Apple Caramel Handpies on a white plate.

      Hand Pies have been around as long as people have been cooking.  Anything enclosed in bread or pastry that can be eaten out of hand qualifies.  It can be a turnover, English pasty, a calzone, or Russian pierogis.  Every culture has a hand pie no matter what they call it.

      Another recipe using this pastry is the Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe. If your looking for another easy pastry see my Easier "Danish Pastry Recipe", Pithiviers Made with Blitz Puff Pastry, Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries, and the Chocolate Raspberry Pop Tarts.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      About the Amazing Pastry Dough

      It is important when making the pastry to make sure the butter stays in pea size piece as in a pie crust.  The pastry should not come together in the mixer.  It should be removed as soon as it clumps together.  It is pushed together into a cohesive dough on the work surface and rolled into a rectangle.  I fold mine into what is called a book fold as has more layers than the traditional three fold laminated pastry.

      It is best to make the pastry at least the day or up to three days ahead.  It rolls out easily.  When making pastry for a hand pie, do not roll it out too thick, especially as this will rise as does puff pastry but not as dramatically.

      Let's Talk Caramel

      This recipe calls for the use of a bought caramel, Werther's Original soft and chewy caramels.  But my caramel would make an even better version.  Just use about 1 tablespoon per hand pie and place it on the bottom of the hand pie with the apple filling over it.

      A salted version can be made by sprinkling coarse sea salt lightly over the caramel.

      Or, if you wish, omit the caramel and just use the apple filling.  This filling is a great basic apple filling for anything made with apples.

      Potato or Cornstarch?

      A word about the potato starch.  I have recently switched from cornstarch to potato starch for a couple of reasons.  The first is anything thickened with potato starch can be frozen and thawed with no harm.  Cornstarch will break down if frozen and thawed.  Secondly, potato starch can be heated to a higher temperature than cornstarch.  If you have ever cooked something with cornstarch in it and it has lost its thickness, it was cooked too long or at too  high a heat.  The potato starch, like cornstarch, is clear when cooked.

      This Apple Caramel Hand Pie can be frozen before baking without the egg wash.  It is best to bring it to room temperature, egg wash it and then bake it.  Hand Pies are great to have in the freezer when you want a quick dessert or treat.

      List of Ingredients

      Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe

      The pastry dough ingredients for the Apple Caramel Hand Pies are baking powder, sour cream, salt, unsalted butter and all-purpose flour.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, Baking Powder

      MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted Butter

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, sour cream

      Filling Ingredients 1

      Ingredients for the apple filling include apples, granulated sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg, water, lemon juice, and potato starch.

      CLOCKWISE FROM THE TOP: Apples, water, potato starch, cinnamon, nutmeg, granulated sugar, lemon juice in the middle

      Filling Ingredients 2

      The second set of filling ingredients includes Werther soft caramels, cooked apple filling and the pastry.

      FRONT ROW: Amazing pastry dough

      BACK ROW: Werther Soft Caramels, cooked apple filling

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients &instructions.

      STEP BY STEP INSTRUCTIONS

      Amazing Pastry Dough

      If at any point the dough begins to soften, chill it in the refrigerator or freezer before moving on 

      The first collages shows the butter cut, dry ingredients in the mixing bowl, butter added and the butter cut in.

      Step 1. Cut the very cold butter in about 8 pieces per stick. If prepping the remainder of the recipe, refrigerate the butter.  Step 2. Place the dry ingredients in the bowl of a mixer.  Step 3. Add the cold butter.  Step 4.  With the mixer set on low, but the butter in leaving large pieces. 

      Sour cream is added to the mixing bowl, large pieces of butter  are seen, the dough is poured onto the counter, and finally pushed together to make a cohesive dough.

      Step 5. Add the sour cream to the mixer. Step 6. Add 2 tablespoons of water and beat on low to form a large crumbly dough. Step 7. Pour the dough onto a work area. Step 8. Push it together to form a cohesive block of dough.

      The dough is spread out, rolled out, the top and bottom brought to the center and finally folded over.

      Step 9.  To make rolling out easier, flatten the dough in about 3 or 4 places with the rolling pin.  Step 10.  Roll the dough out to about 16" x8". Step 11. Fold the top and bottom to the center, leaving about a ½" gap. Step 12.  Fold the top down to make a neat package.

      This collage shows the pastry turned 90°, rolled out into a large square, a 6" cake round used as a guide, 4 6" rounds cut out.

      Step 13. Turn the pastry 90° with the open side to the right and repeat the rolling and folding above one more time.  Step 14.  Roll the dough into a 12 ½"x 18 ½" rectangle. Step 15. Using a 6" circle cut 6 rounds out of the dough.  Step 16.  Four of the cut rounds. The photos above are representative.

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      This collages shows the ingredients for the apple filling in a bowl, then cooked, the caramels on a round of dough the apples on top of the caramels and the pastry being wet on the edge.

      Step 1. Peel the apples and cut into about ½ inch dice. You should have about 4 cups. Combine the apples with the sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg and water. Step 2. Place in a medium saucepan and simmer until the apples are tender. When the apples are almost done, stir the potato starch into the lemon juice and add to the apple mixture. Bring to a boil and cook several minutes until thickened. Cool completely.  Step 3. Line 4 caramels along the bottom of the rounds, leaving a ½ inch border. Sprinkle with a little sea salt if using. Step 4. Place ⅙ of the filling (scant ⅓ cup) over the caramels. Wet the border with water.

      This collages shows the top of the cicle of dough covering the filling making a half moon, the edges are crimped with a for, a slit is cut in the top and the hand pie is brushed with an egg wash.

      Step 5. bring the top down over the apples matching the edges. Press together. Step 6. Seal with the tines of a fork. Refrigerate the hand pies until completely cold before cutting the vents to make a cleaner looking pastry. Step 7. Cut a slit in the top of the hand pie. Step 8. Brush with the egg wash. Double pan and bake as directed.

      Recipe FAQS

      Are all hand pies shaped the same?

      No not at all. They can be half moons, triangles, whole circles with two pieces of dough instead of one.

      Are turnovers the same as hand pies?

      Although some say they are different, I say they are the same. The pastry might be different but a hand pie is meant to be eaten out of your hand as is a turnover so I don't see any difference.

      Are hand pies always sweet?

      No. The Cornish hand pie which was often sent to the mine with the workers were substantially filled with meat, vegetables and a sturdy crust. Tiddly in naval slang means 'proper', a common adjective and adverb used

      What is a Tiddly Oggie

      According to the History of Tiddly Oggies, Tiddly in naval slang means 'proper', a common adjective and adverb used by Cornish people, and oggie was the term for a pastie in cornwall, so “tiddly oggie” meant proper pasty. Cornish rugby supporters later adopted the chant “Oggie, oggie, oggie, oi, oi, oi!” when cheering on their team.

      Storage and Freezing

      This Apple Caramel Hand Pie can be frozen before baking without the egg wash.  It is best to bring it to room temperature, egg wash it and then bake it.  Hand Pies are great to have in the freezer when you want a quick dessert or treat.

      They can be kept at room temperature for several days. Warming them slightly enhances their flavor.

      Expert Tips

      • Cold and clean are two of the most important points when making laminated doughs. If the butter softens at any time, refrigerate or freeze briefly to get it cold again. Make sure if any dough sticks to the rolling pin, to clean it off with a paper towel immediately. If you continue to roll, more pastry will stick to the pin and the pastry can tear.
      • Refrigerate the filled pastries before cutting the vents on top and egg washing. This will make cleaner cuts for a better looking pastry. This should be done just before baking.
      • These keep well at room temperature, uncovered for a day or two.
      • The pastry can be made in its entirety and frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight to use. Warm in a 350° oven for 10 to 15 minutes if cold, less if room temperature.
      • The completed pastries can also be frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months without the egg wash. Egg wash them just before baking. Either thaw them overnight and bake cold or bake them from the freezer adding additional time.
      • Mixing a Granny Smith with Gala apples is a great combo for these hand pies. Cutting the apples in about ½" dice is a good size.
      • If using cornstarch instead of potato starch these should not be frozen or they may leak after thawing and heating. Cornstarch breaks down in the freezer.
      Three golden half moon hand pies with slits showing the apple filling sit on an Irish decorated platter.

      More Delicious Apple Treats

      • A caramel topped scoop of ice cream with roasted apples around it.
        Apple Pie ala Mode with Salted Caramel
      • A single Apple Muffin covered with a crunchy sugar topping.
        Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe
      • Apple Cake Doughnuts on a plate with a napkin in the background.
        Apple Cake Doughnuts
      • Honey Thyme Apple Tart
        Honey Thyme Apple Tart

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      Three Apple Caramel Handpies on a white plate.

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      Helen S. Fletcher
      These Apple Caramel Hand Pies feature my Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe that mimics puff pastry without all the fuss. With apple season just around the corner, what could be better than caramels and apples enclosed in a flaky pastry?
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 45 minutes mins
      Total Time 2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 Hand pies
      Calories 569 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Amazing Pastry Dough

      • 1 ¾ cup all-purpose flour (245 grams)
      • ¾ teaspoon salt
      • ½ teaspoon baking powder
      • 1 cup unsalted butter, (225 grams or 2 sticks)
      • ½ cup sour cream, cold (114 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons water

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      • 1 large Granny Smith apple
      • 2 Gala apples
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
      • ¼ teaspoon nutmeg
      • ¼ cup water
      • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
      • 1 tablespoon potato starch or cornstarch
      • 2 5 oz. bags Werther's Original Chewy Caramels
      • Coarse Sea Salt, optional
      • 1 egg, beaten

      Instructions
       

      Amazing Pastry Dough

      • Cut the very cold butter in about ¾" pieces per stick. If prepping the remainder of the recipe, refrigerate the butter until needed..
      • Place the flour, salt and baking powder in the bowl of a mixer. Mix briefly to combine.
      • Place the butter over the flour and mix on low to medium  to break up the butter but keep it in large pieces.
      • Add the sour cream and mix to bring it together. Add the water and mix to form large crumbs. It should not ball up or come together completely.
      • Pour it out onto a work surface and push together to form a rectangular block of dough. Knead it 3 or 4 times to smooth it out, keeping the butter in large pieces.
      • Press a rolling pin into the dough about 3 or4 times several inches apart from the top to the bottom. These "hills and valleys" will help roll out the dough more evenly.
      • Sprinkle the surface lightly with flour. Roll the dough to a 16" x 8" rectangle. If the pastry begins to soften, chill it until firm.
      • Brush off any flour and fold the top and bottom to the center of the pastry, leaving a ½" channel in the middle.
      • Brush off any flour and fold the top and bottom to the center of the pastry, leaving a ½" channel in the middle.
      • Fold the top over the bottom, creating a book like pstry. Turn the pastry 90° with the fold to left.
      • Lightly sprinkle the surface with flour and repeat the rolling and folding. Wrap in plastic wrap and chill until cold throughout, overnight or up to 3 days. It can also be placed in a freezer bag and frozen for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight before using.
      • Keep the dough refrigerated while preparing the filling.

      Apple Caramel Hand Pies

      • Peel the apples and cut into about ½ inch dice. You should have about 4 cups. 
      • Combine the apples with the sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg and water. Place them in a medium saucepan and simmer until the apples are tender. 
      • When the apples are almost done, stir the potato starch into the lemon juice and add it to the apple mixture. Bring to a boil and cook several minutes until thickened. Cool completely. 

      Assembly

      • If at any point the pastry becomes soft, refrigerate or freeze to firm it up. The butter needs to be kept in pieces for the highest rise. Lightly flour the surface.
      • Preheat the oven to 425°F. Line a ½ sheet with parchment. Set aside.
      • Roll the pastry into a 12 ½" x 18 ½" inch rectangle. With a 6" round cutter (a saucer or cake round is fine) cut 6 rounds out of the pastry. Refrigerate if soft.
      • Line 4 caramels along the bottom of the rounds, leaving a ½ inch border on the bottom and sides. Sprinkle with a little sea salt if using. Place ⅙ of the filling (scant ⅓ cup) over the caramels. 
      • Wet the bottom border with water, bring the top down over the apples matching the edges. Press together. Seal with the tines of a fork. Refrigerate until cold.
      • Brush with egg wash. Cut a vent in the top.
      • Double pan and bake for 18 to 22 minutes until medium golden brown.  Cool.  Serve slightly warm.
      • These will keep up to 2 days at room temperature or they can be frozen either baked or unbaked without the egg wash. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, brush with egg wash and bake as called for. If baking from the freezer, brush with egg wash and add extra time baking to a medium golden brown.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­                                                                                                                                   
      Cold and clean are two of the most important points when making laminated doughs. If the butter softens at any time, refrigerate or freeze briefly to get it cold again. Make sure if any dough sticks to the rolling pin, to clean it off with a paper towel immediately. If you continue to roll, more pastry will stick to the pin and the pastry can tear.
      Refrigerate the filled pastries before cutting the vents on top and egg washing. This will make cleaner cuts for a better looking pastry. This should be done just before baking.
      The pastry can be made in its entirety and frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight to use. Warm in a 350° oven for 10 to 15 minutes if cold, less if room temperature. 
      The completed pastries can also be frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months without the egg wash. Egg wash them just before baking. Either thaw them overnight and bake cold or bake them from the freezer adding additional time.
      Mixing a Granny Smith with Gala apples is a great combo for these hand pies. Cutting the apples in about ½" dice is a good size.
      If using cornstarch instead of potato starch these should not be frozen or they may leak after thawing and heating. Cornstarch breaks down in the freezer.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6hand piesCalories: 569kcalCarbohydrates: 59gProtein: 6gFat: 36gSaturated Fat: 22gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 120mgSodium: 349mgPotassium: 191mgFiber: 3gSugar: 28gVitamin A: 1158IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 66mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      As

      Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe

      Modified: Aug 30, 2025 · Published: Aug 29, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 15 Comments

      The opening photo for Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe includes white, yellow, marble, 2 different chocolate layers and 3 citrus versions.

      This version of Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe is a makeover of the original post in 2017. It's a deep dive into baking this type of cake which I hope will get everyone ready for the upcoming season of baking.

      The most exciting part of this amazing recipe is that a single recipe can be used to make eight different flavored cake layers to fill and finish as you like. You may never need any other layer cake recipes.

      The opening photo for Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe includes white, yellow, marble, 2 different chocolate layers and 3 citrus versions.

      Many, many years ago when I first opened my bakery, the challenge was finding recipes for cake layers that worked and could be scaled up.  It seemed like all I did was test.

      Then I discovered, as did everyone, "The Cake Bible" by Rose Levy Beranbaum.  It was a game changer for anyone interested in baking and cakes.  The explanations of what was going on and why in each recipe helped us understand baking better.  At that point in time (1988)  there was not a lot of information on the science of baking, which made this book all the more valuable.

      I found the recipes in her book for cake layers to be the recipes I was looking for.  Although I used recipes from many sources, including those I came up with, "The Cake Bible" was always my back up.

      This recipe is a slight variation of her White Velvet Cake.  I have used it before in my Spirited Marble Cake.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Base Recipes

      What is a base recipe? It is a basic recipe professional bakers use that can be changed in different ways to make many different bakery items. In my post, The Importance of a Base Recipe in Baking it focuses on a base recipe for cookies but the idea is the same for cakes.

      You will see by looking at the recipes there will be additions or slight changes to the original recipe resulting in all of the different flavored layers.

      High Ratio Cakes

      This cake is a high ratio cake. High ratio cakes require the sugar to be equal to or exceed the amount of flour by weight not by volume. It's also the quickest way to make a butter cake. Not every cake can be mixed this way.

      Basically, part of the wet ingredients are held out and mixed together. Everything else is added to the mixing bowl. After about a 2 ½ minute mix the wet ingredients are added in thirds, mixed for 30 seconds each and that's it. Into the pans it goes. It just doesn't get any easier, faster or better.

      Butter Temperature is Important

      The one point that needs to be stressed in this cake recipe is the temperature of the butter - it needs to be soft.  As you will see, the recipe states softened.  Most recipes states room temperature butter. That can mean a lot of different things depending on if you're in Alaska or the southwest.  I have seen recommendations by several prominent authors that 68°F is the ideal temperature for butter when creaming. However, I find that is still too cold to blend or cream well with sugar.  I got a sandy texture but not one where I would call it creamed. Creaming introduces air into the mixture helping the batter to rise.

      The temperature of the butter I use for creaming or when calling for "softened butter" is 72°F or 74°F. At this temperature, it will mix together completely.  It is important in this recipe as the butter is being combined with a large amount of flour, sugar, and liquid all at once.  If you don't have an instant read thermometer (and you should) the best I can tell you is that it will feel soft when you press it in the package but not mushy.  In no case should it be liquid.  This happens a lot when butter is microwaved to soften it.  I usually remove butter the night before if I am baking in the morning. I also keep my house around 73°F in the summer.

      A Surprise When Making The Chocolate Cake Layers

      The chocolate cake test was really surprising.  I made one recipe of the white cake and split the batter in half by weight.  I added cocoa to one layer and melted and cooled chocolate to the other layer.  The two cake layers couldn't have been more different.  The one with the chocolate was much paler and had less of a chocolate taste.  It was more like a German Chocolate batter.  The cocoa layer was very dark and was intensely chocolate.  I am including both for your reference. I thought the one with chocolate would have tasted deeply of chocolate. Both are very good - just different.

      Buttercreams to Use with the layers and ganache

      • Raspberry Buttercream
      • Espresso Buttercream
      • Strawberry Buttercream
      • German and American Buttercreams
      • French Buttercream
      • Italian Buttercream
      • Chocolate Buttercream
      • Whipped Cream Frosting
      • Cream Cheese Frosting
      • Dobos Torte Chocolate Buttercream
      • Spirited Chocolate Buttercream
      • Strawberry Buttercream

      Cake Pan Prep

      I have an entire post on how I prepare my pans in order to get flat cake layers that aren't humpy and don't need to be trimmed. I show you below the basics but see Cake Pan Prep for more in depth information.

      Recipe Ingredients (for Base White Cake Only)

      Ingredients for the white base cake are ett whites, milk, cake flour, granulates sugar, baking powder, unsalted butter, vanilla and almond extracts.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, baking powder almond extract, unsalted butter

      MIDDLE ROW: Egg wites, vanilla exract

      BACK ROW: Cake Flour, granulated sugar and milk

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Cake Pan Prep

      This collage shows how to prepare the cake pans so the layers come out flat.  It show the pan, center only sprayed with a non-stick baking release, parchment paper linng the pan and the center of the paper sprayed.

      Step 1. The baking pans I use are from Parrish's magic pan line. Some of them are still from my bakery of 35 years ago. They are aluminum and are sturdy. Step 2. Spray the center only with a non-stick baking release. Do not spray or otherwise prepare the sides. This will help keep the paper flat when adding the batter to the pan. Step 3. Line the pan with a parchment paper circle. Step 4. Spray the center only with the baking spray. Again, Do not spray or otherwise prepare the sides.

      Base Recipe for White Cake From Which All Others Come.

      The base white cake collages shows the egg whites, some milk and extracts are mixed, and the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl and mixed.

      Step 5. Combine the egg whites, some of the milk and the extracts in a mall bowl. Step 6. Whisk to mix. Step 7. Place the dry ingredients in the bowl of a mixer. Step 8. Mix on low briefly to combie.

      This collages shows the butter added to the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl, the milk added, then mixed and last the egg white mixture added.

      Step 9. Add the butter to the dry ingredients. Step 10. Add the remaining milk to the mixing bowl. Step 11. Beat For 1 ½ minutes. Step 12. Add the egg white mixture by thirds, beating for 30 seconds each time. Divide among the 2 pans and bake as directed.

      Marble Layer

      The collage shows the marble layer being made by adding chocolate to half of the white base layer, alternating batters in the pan, swirling them and the baked layer.

      Step 13. Divide the white base layer in half. To one half add the melted and cooled chocolate. Step 14. Place a large spoon of the two batters alternately around the pan. Make a second row on top of the bottom one, placing the white batter on the chocolate one, and the chocolate on the white. Step 15. Swirl the batters together with a toothpick or skewer. Do not over swirl, there should be two different colors of batter visible. Step 16. The marble cake after baking.

      Variations on a Theme

      The last collage shows the white, yellow, chocolate and cocoa layers.

      Step 17. The white layer baked. Step 18. The yellow cake layer baked. 3 egg yolks are substituted for the egg whites. All the rest is the same. Step 19. Melted and cooled semisweet chocolate is added to the batter then baked. Step 20. Cocoa is replaces part of the cake flour for this chocolate cake which is the deepest and most chocolatey of the two chocolate cakes after baking. There are also 3 citrus versions on the recipe card.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why is cake flour used?

      Cake flour has the lowest amount of gluten of the common wheat flours. This makes for a softer layer which is usually more moist than if using other flours.

      Can 2% milk be used in this recipe?

      Yes, Either whole or 2% may be used. Do not use skimmed or less than 2%.

      What happens if I spray or grease the sides of the pans?

      You will most likely get a cake that rises more in the center and has to be trimmed. By not preparing the sides of the pan, the cake clings to the sides and can't slide back down while waiting for the middle of the cake to finish baking. See my post on Cake Pan Prep for in depth information.

      Expert Tips

      • Be sure to follow the specific times as listed in the recipe.
      • Do not beat above medium on a stand mixer to keep from developing gluten.
      • If the milk and butter are about the same temperature, batter curdling is less likely.
      • When using melted chocolate, cool it to room temperature before adding it to the white batter.
      • Use Dutch cocoa in the cocoa layer for more flavor and to be able to use the same leavening agent.
      • Prepare the pans as directed to obtain flat layers.
      The cut layers of the marble, yellow, white and two chocolate cakes are stacked on top of each other.

      From top to bottom: The cut layers are: Marble, yellow, chocolate cake with chocolate (that is slightly under baked), the white cake and the cocoa chocolate cake.

      More Recipes Using High Ratio Cake Batter

      • Slices of the Strawberry Cake sit on a marble plate with fresh strawberries.
        Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven
      • Spirited Marble Cake
      • Yellow Buttermilk Cake
      • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
        Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      The opening photo for Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe includes white, yellow, marble, 2 different chocolate layers and 3 citrus versions.

      Multiple Cake Layers from 1 Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      The most exciting part of this recipe is that a single recipe can be used to make eight different flavored cake layers to fill and finish as you like.
      4.88 from 8 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Cake, Cake Layers, Easy to make
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 330 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • 4 large egg whites (130 grams)
      • 1 cup milk, whole or 2%
      • 1 ½ teaspoon almond extract
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • 3 cups cake flour (300 grams)
      • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar (300 grams)
      • 1 tablespoon + 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • ¼ teaspoon salt
      • 12 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (170 grams or 1 ½ sticks)

      Instructions
       

      • Preheat oven to 350 degrees.Spray the center only of two 9x2 inch round cake pans a non-stick baking release. Line with parchment paper rounds and spray the center only of those. Set aside. . 
      • In a bowl, lightly combine the egg whites, ¼ cup milk, almond extract and vanilla.  
      • In a large mixing bowl combine the dry ingredients and mix on low speed for 30 seconds to blend.  Add the butter and remaining ¾ cup milk.  Mix on low speed until the dry ingredients are moistened.  Increase to medium and beat for 1 ½ minutes.  Gradually add the egg mixture in thirds, beating about 30 seconds each time.  
      • Gradually add the egg mixture in thirds, beating 30 seconds each time.  
      • Divide the dough between the two prepared pans (about 555 grams each). Bake for 18 to 22 minutes until a tester comes out clean.
      • For three layers, divide the dough into 3 prepared pans of about 370 grams or 13 ounces each.  Bake for 14 to 15 minutes or until very lightly colored.  

      Variations

      • Yellow - Substitute 3 egg yolks for the egg whites.  All the rest remains the same.
      • Marble - Divide the white batter in half.  Add 3 ounces of melted chocolate to one half.  Alternated white and chocolate dough in the pans. Top with a second layer of white and chocolate dough over the first layer. Place the chocolate on the white and the white on the chocolate. Swirl together with a toothpick or wooden skewer. Do not over swirl.
      • Chocolate Cake with Cocoa – This is the darkest and most intense of the two chocolate cakes.  It tastes the most chocolatey.  I used 60 grams (2 ounces) of dutched cocoa and 240 grams (8 ½ ounces) of cake flour in place of all flour.  Place in the mixing bowl with the remainder of the dry ingredients.  All the rest remains the same.  Bake for 24 to 26 minutes.
      • Chocolate Cake with Semisweet Chocolate - This cake is lightly flavored with chocolate and emulates a German Chocolate Layer.  
        For this cake you whisk in 6 ounces (170 grams) of melted bittersweet or semisweet chocolate into the finished batter.  The chocolate can be melted in a bowl over hot, but not boiling water or microwaved at half power for about 2 ½ minutes.  Stir and, if not melted, microwave briefly at half power in 15 second bursts.
        The layers for this cake will weigh about 1200 grams (42 ounces) total or 600 grams).
        Bake for 24 to 26 minutes.
      • Lemon Cake – Add the zest of 3 large or 4 medium lemons to the batter of the yellow cake using all vanilla in the batter.  Add it with the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl.    All the rest remains the same.
        Bake these layers for 18 to 22 minutes until the center springs back when lightly touched or a tester comes out clean.  
      • Orange Cake – Add the zest (orange part only, do not use the white pith below) of a large navel oranges to the white batter using all almond extract.  Add it with the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl.  All the rest remains the same.
        Bake for 18 to 22 minutes until the center springs back when lightly touched or a tester comes out clean.  
        Juice oranges will not provide enough zest because of their thin skin. 
      • Citrus Cake – Use the zest of 1 navel orange, 1 lemon and 2 limes.  Add them to the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl.  All the rest remains the same.
        Bake these layers for 18 to 22 minutes until the center springs back when lightly touched or a tester comes out clean.  

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­                                                                                                                                 
      Be sure to follow the specific times as listed in the recipe. 
      Be sure to follow the specific times as listed in the recipe. 
      Do not beat above medium on a stand mixer to keep from developing gluten.
      If the milk and butter are about the same temperature, batter curdling is less likely.
      When using melted chocolate, cool it to room temperature before adding it to the white batter.
      Use Dutch cocoa in the cocoa layer for more flavor and to be able to use the same leavening agent. 
      Prepare the pans as directed to obtain flat layers on a stand mixer to keep from developing gluten.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 330kcalCarbohydrates: 49gProtein: 6gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 33mgSodium: 183mgPotassium: 85mgFiber: 1gSugar: 26gVitamin A: 383IUCalcium: 93mgIron: 0.4mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      .SaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSaveSave

      Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch

      Modified: Aug 26, 2025 · Published: Aug 26, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

      A picture of a single Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch on a clear plate with a tray in the background,

      Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch is one last dessert with the fresh peaches of summer.  Cold and creamy with a cinnamon crunch topping, it goes with any meal from the fanciest to the most informal.  It sits obligingly in the fridge until it’s served.

      This is one of the easiest desserts you can make and dare I say, one of the best!

      A picture of a single Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch on a clear plate with a tray in  the background,

      Fruit mousses can be good but unexciting with mainly fruit puree and whipped cream. But to jazz it up I use Amaretto for the liquid and give it a crunchy topping - which by the way is not only easy to make, it's absolutely addictive!

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love This Recipe

      • It's super easy.
      • It has a lot of flavor due the addition of the liqueur.
      • The ingredients are simple and easy to get.
      • This needs to be made the day ahead.
      • The Cinnamon Crunch can be made a week ahead,
      • If you make nothing else, make the Cinnamon Crunch.

      Peeling the Peaches

      There are two ways to peel peaches and one has a definite advantage. They need to be peeled to remove the fuzzy peel which will ruin the texture of the mousse. In both cases the peaches must be ripe for the most flavor.

      The first is to use a vegetable peeler and remove the peel. The problem with this is that is also takes the flesh with it. Peaches have thin skins so losing some of the flesh is inevitable.

      The second is my preferred way and the one I use. It's actually easier than peeling them and not a bit of the flesh is wasted. Bring a pot of water to a boil. Add the peaches and boil for a minute or two. Test one by running it under cold water and simply slip the skin off. I'll show you below. And once the water boils, the peaches can be peeled faster than with a vegetable peeler. See the photos below. For more in depth information on peaches see my post, All About Peaches.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Cinnamon Crunch

      The ingredients for the Cinnamon Crunch include, brown sugar, granulated sugar, vanilla, unsalted butter and cinnamon

      FRONT ROW: Vanilla Extract, unsalted butter, cinnamon

      BACK ROW: Dark brown sugar, granulated sugar

      Ingredients for the Peach Mousse are fresh peaches, heavy cream, amaaretto, granulated sugar and gelatin.

      FRONT ROW: Amaretto, granulated sugar, gelatin

      BACK ROW: Peeled peached, heavy cream

      Important Ingredients

      • Dark brown sugar yields the most taste.
      • Heavy Cream is used for it's stability and thickness.
      • Amaretto liqueur adds flavor to the mousse.
      • Gelatin is used to set the mousse.
      • Korintje cinnamon is my cinnamon of choice.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Cinnamon Crunch

      The cinnamon crunch collage shows the two brown and granulated sugar with the cinnamon in a bowl, mixed together, the melted butter and vanilla in a bowl and then added to the dry ingredients.

      Step 1. Combine the brown and granulated sugars along with the cinnamon in a bowl. Step 2. Mix throughly. Step 3. Stir the melted butter and vanilla together. Step 4. Pour over the dry ingredients and mix with a fork to make a paste.

      This collages shows the cinnamon crunch on a tray, spread out, baked and crushed into crumbles.

      Step 5. Pour the paste onto a parchment lined quarter sheet or 9x13"pan. Step 6. Spread out evenly. Step 7. Bake as directed. I got a bit over enthusiastic and started eating it as soon as it was cool. See if you can do better. Step 8. Break it up into crumbs. If making ahead, store in an airtight container.

      Peeling the Peaches

      This collage of the peaches being peeled for the Peach Mousse include the peaches in boiling water, the skin being removed, the peaches being cut on their equator and the broken open.

      Step 1. Bring a pot of water to a boil. Add the peaches. Step 2. Immediately run cold water on the peaches to stop the cooking. Simply remove the skin from the peaches. It will slip off easily. Step 3. Cut the peach on it's equator. Step 4. Separate the halves of the peach and remove the stone.

      Step 1. Combine the brown and granulated sugars along with the cinnamon in a bowl. Step 2. Mix throughly. Step 3. Stir the melted butter and vanilla together. Step 4. Pour over the dry ingredients and mix with a fork to make a paste.

      Step 5. Pour the paste onto a parchment lined quarter sheet or 9x13"pan. Step 6. Spread out evenly. Step 7. Bake as directed. I got a bit over enthusiastic and started eating it as soon as it was cool. See if you can do better. Step 8. Break it up into crumbs. If making ahead, store in an airtight container.

      Peach Mousse

      The first collage for the Peach Mousse includes the peeled peaches in the processor, processed, the amaretto and gelatin then mixed.

      Step 1. Place the peeled peached in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process until smooth. Scrape down as necessary and process until completely smooth. Step 3. The amaretto and gelatin waiting to be Step 4. Combined. Let sit until bloomed.

      This collages shows the cream whipped to soft peaks, the bowl of puree partially set, the cream added to the puree and then folded in.

      Step 5. Pour the puree into a medium size bowl. Place the bloomed gelatin in the microwave for about 8 seconds or so until liquid and slightly warm. Stir it into the puree. Refrigerate the puree until it starts to set. This can take a couple of hours depending upon your refrigerator. Step 6. When the puree is partially set, whip the cream to medium peaks. Do not let it get stiff or it won't fold well into the puree. Step 7. Add the cream to the puree. Step 8. Fold it incompletely. Pour it into serving glasses and refrigerate. Top it with the cinnamon crunch just before serving.

      Recipe FAQS

      Are there different types of mousse?

      Yes. The most known is chocolate mousse which is of the thick and creamy type. Fruit mousses are generally lighter.

      Why are fruit mousses lighter?

      Fruit purees such as strawberry, peach, etc. are generally lighter than chocolate. A fruit mousse base is the pureed fruit and whipped cream making a lighter, more airy mousse.

      Are mousse and pudding the same?

      No they are two different desserts. A mousse is not cooked and has a lighter texture often resulting in a more intense flavor than pudding which is heavier, cooked and thickened with cornstarch or another starch.

      Expert Tips

      • Peaches don't have a really strong profile so it is important that they are well ripened.
      • I reduced the amount of cream normally used to help intensify the peaches.
      • If you are concerned about the alcohol in the amaretto liqueur, boil it for a minute to burn off the alcohol making it just a flavoring. If you still don't want to use it, substitute water plus 1 teaspoon almond extract.
      • To avoid buying a large bottle of amaretto, just use the small individual bottles that are used on airlines. They are available in some grocery stores as well as liquor stores. One small bottle equals ¼ cup.
      • You will have cinnamon crunch left over it can be used over ice cream, it's great on a cream cheese topped bagel, or make my Cinnamon Crunch Rolls where I first used this topping.
      A tray of Peach Mousse on a gold rimmed tray with peaches in the middle.

      More Fruit Forward Treats

      • A slice of the Orange Almond Tea Cake sits on a white plate with 2 strawberries and the rest of the cut cake is behind it.
        Orange Almond Tea Cake
      • Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .
        Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe
      • Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp
        Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp
      • A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.
        (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      A picture of a single Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch on a clear plate with a tray in the background,

      Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch

      Helen S. Fletcher
      Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch is one last dessert with the fresh peaches of summer.  Cold and creamy with a cinnamon crunch topping, it goes with any meal from the fanciest to the most informal.
      5 from 2 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 40 minutes mins
      Chilling Time 3 hours hrs
      Total Time 3 hours hrs 40 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 servings
      Calories 437 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Cinnamon Crunch

      • ½ cup dark brown sugar (100 grams)
      • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
      • 1 tablespoon cinnamon
      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (58 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

      Peach Mousse

      • ¼ cup amaretto liqueur*
      • 1 tablespoon gelatin
      • 2 pounds ripe peaches (910 grams)
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • ¾ cup heavy cream
      • *water may be substituted + 1 teaspoon almond extract

      Instructions
       

      Cinnamon Crunch

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F.   Line a quarter sheet pan or a 9x13” pan with parchment paper.  Spray with a non-stick baking release.  Set aside.
      • Combine the brown and granulated sugar with the cinnamon, mixing well.
      • Add the vanilla to the melted butter (rewarm if it has solidified) pour over the cinnamon-sugar mixture and blend together. This will not be crumbs. It is more of a thick paste. Spread it evenly over the parchment paper.
      • Bake for about 15 to 20 minutes until the center looks dull and is set. Do not over bake.
      • Cool completely.  Break into crumbs.  

      Peach Mousse

      • Combine the amaretto or water plus almond extract and the gelatin, stirring to mix. Set aside to bloom.
      • Peel the peaches either with a vegetable peeler or my preferred method of adding them to boiling water for 1 to 2 minutes. Plunge into cold water. Remove skins, split the peach along the equator and remove the stone. In either case, break the peach into several pieces and place in the processor.
      • Process until pureed, scraping down as necessary until smooth. Remove to a medium size bowl and stir in the sugar.
      • Microwave the gelatin for about 8 seconds or until liquified and warm. Immediately, stir into the pureed peaches. Refrigerate for several hours until the mixture begins to thicken. Stir the peaches from time to time to make sure they are thickening evenly.
      • At this point, whip the cream until medium peaks form. Do not over whip or it will be difficult to fold the cream into the peaches.
      • Fold the cream into the puree. Divide among the glasses or ramekins. I used 6- 6 ounce servings. Refrigerate to set at least 6 hours or overnight.
      • These can be served as is or add the cinnamon crunch just before serving. These can be held in the refrigerator for 3 days.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­                                                                                                                     
      Peaches don't have a strong profile so it is important that they are well ripened.
      I reduced the amount of cream normally used to help intensify the peaches. 
      If you are concerned about the alcohol in the amaretto liqueur, boil it for a minute to burn off the alcohol making it just a flavoring. If you still don't want to use it, substitute water plus 1 teaspoon almond extract.
      To avoid buying a large bottle of amaretto, just use the small individual bottles that are used on airlines. They are available in some grocery stores as well as liquor stores. 
      You will have cinnamon crunch left over it can be used over ice cream, it's great on a cream cheese topped bagel, or make my Cinnamon Crunch Rolls where I first used this topping. Or just eat it like I do!
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6servingsCalories: 437kcalCarbohydrates: 63gProtein: 3gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 54mgSodium: 37mgPotassium: 250mgFiber: 3gSugar: 60gVitamin A: 1167IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 58mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse

      Modified: Aug 22, 2025 · Published: Aug 22, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 14 Comments

      Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.

      Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse is an amazing combination of three nutted meringue discs filled with a raspberry mousse that is enhanced with mascarpone. Made into individual desserts (who doesn't like their own dessert?) these stunning offerings are easy to make and easier to eat.

      Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.

      The Raspberry Mascarpone Mousse is a recipe I designed for the restaurant one year for Valentine's Day.  While I could buy raspberry puree for the restaurant, I have not found one I like that is offered to the public.  Using seedless red raspberry jam which has been smoothed out in a processor makes an intensely raspberry flavor even with the addition of whipping cream and mascarpone.  

      Be sure to check out some other fruit desserts including: Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp, Strawberry Verrines, Banana Bread Pudding, and Apple Pie ala Mode with Salted Caramel.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Memo on Meringues

      Meringues are basically egg whites and sugar beaten to various consistencies depending upon what they are going to be used for.

      From there they can vary in many ways.  Extracts, oils, and powders can be used for flavoring.  Any nut can be added for flavoring.  Italian, French and Swiss meringues are all put together differently with the end result being a stiff mixture that can be piped, dropped or spread into cookies, cake layers or for piping onto pies such as lemon meringue and of course Baked Alaska.  

      Coming from Europe the most used nuts are hazelnuts, almonds and pistachios. For some reason, walnuts, although abundant in Europe are not use

      Dacquoise is a type of meringue that has finely ground nuts folded into it. It is also the name of a dessert. Broyage, Japonaise, and Nutted Meringues are all the same thing. Broyage is the Swiss name for nutted meringue and Japonaise is the French word for Japan – I have no idea how this came about.  What I do know is they are all delicious.

      Room Temperature or Cold Egg Whites

      There is some controversy over whether egg whites should be room temperature or cold when whipping. Either way works but there are differences.

      Room temperature egg whites whip up a bit faster but with bigger air bubbles which can break more easily when folding in ingredients. If the egg whites are cold, the air bubbles are smaller making for a firmer meringue in which the air bubbles stay intact better, everything else being equal. At the bakery and for home cooking, I am in the beat them cold camp.

      Tips for Adding the Sugar

      Conventional wisdom has always been to add the sugar slowly to egg whites beaten to the soft peak stage. However, while it may take a couple of minutes longer, I add the sugar to the egg whites all at once. I find no discernible difference and I don't have to stand around slowly adding it.

      The second tip is to use Baker's sugar which is simply more finely ground granulated sugar so it dissolves more easily, completely, and quickly into the whites which is key to how high they whip. Baker's sugar can be easily made at home and kept in an airtight container. See my post on Three Easy Sugar Fixes.

      Low and Slow

      The one caveat is to make any meringue, nutted or not, is to make it on a dry day. Sugar is hydroscopic which means it attracts water and is difficult to dry out if there is high humidity. To help ensure the meringues dry well, cornstarch is sometimes added to the mixture.

      Because meringues are basically dried out, not baked, they should be done so in low heat so as not to brown them. In culinary school you are often graded on how white the meringue is while being dried throughout. I wouldn't get too worried about that - a little color is not a problem. You just don't want then really browned.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Hazelnut Meringues

      The hazelnut meringues include granulated sugar, egg whites, cornstarch, vanilla extract and hazelnuts .

      FRONT ROW: Toasted Hazelnuts, cornstarch, vanilla extract

      BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, egg whites

      Raspberry Mousse

      The ingredients for the raspberry mousse include:  seedlesss red raspberry jam, heavy cream, mascarpone, powdered sugar, gelatin and lemon juice.

      FRONT ROW: Gelatin, red food coloring is not shown and is optional but makes the mousse look more appealing.

      MIDDLE ROW: Mascarpone, powdered sugar

      BACK ROW: Heavy Cream, seedless red raspberry jam, lemon juice

      Important Ingredients

      • Important Ingredients
      • Baker's sugar is best for meringues. See information above.
      • My preference is to use cold egg whites
      • Always toast the nuts for the most flavor
      • Seedless red raspberry jam is perfect for the flaovring
      • The lemon juice adds a bit of tang to the moussse
      • Mascarpone is a very smooth, creamy cheese often used in desserts such as tiramasu. It adds body as well as flavor. It can be expensive depending upon where you buy it. I find Trader Joe's has the best price.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Hazelnut Meringues

      The first collage shows the nuts and powdered sguar n the processor, then ground finely, the egg whites, sugar and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer and the egg whites beaten stiffly.

      Step 1. Toast the hazelnuts in a 350°F oven for 7 to 10 minutes. To remove the skins easily see my post Hazelnut Gianduja. After the nuts have been cooled, place them in the processor bowl with the cornstarch. Step 2. Process until the nuts are finely ground. Step 3. Place the egg whites, vanilla and baker's sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Step 4. Whip until the meringue is very stiff.

      This collage shows the ground nuts being folded into the meringue, the discs piped and baked.

      Step 5. Add the nut/cornstarch mixture to the meringue. Step 6. Fold the nut mixture into the meringue gently so as not to deflate the meringue. Do not over fold. The meringue should remain firm. Step 7. Using a cookie cutter or pastry circle, draw nine 3 ½" circles, equally spaced, on a piece of parchment the size of the pan. Place a second piece of parchment on top.  Fit a pastry bag with a number 3 or 4 open tip.

      Holding the tip about ½ inch above the template, pipe the batter in the circles starting in the middle and moving out to the edges.  Alternatively, measure a heaping tablespoon of meringue for each circle and spread it within the circle with a small offset spatula.  Remove the template, place it on a second half sheet pan and top it with another plain piece of parchment paper.  Repeat filling the circles with the meringue.  Remove the template before baking. Step 8. Bake for about 1 hour until they are completely dry.  Place the parchment on racks to cool completely.  They should come off by just lifting them.  When completely cooled, place in airtight containers where they can be held for weeks.

      This collage shows the steps for making the raspberry mousse including blooming the gelatin, whipping the cream, ten the mascarpone and powdered sugar then the mascarpone and raspberry jam.

      Raspberry Mousse

      Step 9. Dissolve the gelatin in the lemon juice.  Set aside. Step 10. Whip the cream until soft peaks form.  Remove to another bowl and set aside. Step 11. Have the mascarpone at room temperature. Without cleaning the bowl, add the mascarpone.  Whisk until soft.  If it is too cold, it may look a bit curdled.  That's fine. Step 12. Add the raspberry jam a third at a time.

      The last colllage shows the base for the raspberry mousse made, the whipped cream added, then piped onto th e meringues and the finished Hazelnut Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse.

      Step 13.  Microwave the gelatin for about 8 to 10 seconds until liquid.  Pour into the mascarpone/raspberry mixture and whisk to incorporated.  It may look slightly curdled but that will be taken care of in the next step. Step 14. Fold in the cream.  It will look rather purplish and not too appetizing at this point.  Add red food coloring a few drops at a time until a pleasant color is achieved.  Refrigerate until almost set up.  It will depend upon how cold your refrigerator is but it took mine about 2 ½  hours.  Step 15. Fit a piping bag with an #8 or 9 open star tip.  Fill the piping bag about ⅔ full and holding the bag about ½ inch from the disc, pipe the mousse in a circle to within about ¼ inch of the edge.  Fill the middle by piping the mousse into it.  Pipe 12 circles in this manner.  Step 16.  Stack 2 of  them on top of each other.  Top with the 3rd plain meringue disc. Do not press down too hard or the meringue will break. Refrigerate.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why do meringues weep?

      Weeping refers to beads of unincorporated sugar rising to the top of the meringues when dried. To avoid this, use Baker's sugar and make sure the sugar is dissolved in the egg whites by taking a bit of the whipped meringue between your fingers. If it is gritty it needs to be whipped more. Baker's sugar can be made at home simply. See my post Three Easy Sugar Fixes to make it.

      How many types of meringues are there?

      The three most common are French, Swiss and Italian.

      Which meringue is the most commonly made?

      The French meringue is the most common, he lightest and the least stable but also the easiest. It is simply egg whites, sugar, and possibly cream of tartar and a flavoring. This mixture can be beaten to differing stiffnesses and used for cookies, to fold into other ingredients, as a topping for cakes and pies and is the base for marshmallows.

      Expert Tips

      • Don't over beat the cream for the mousse. If it is too stiff the air will be diminished when folding into the other ingredients resulting in a heavy mousse.
      • The use of food coloring enhances the looks of the mousse which will naturally be purplish.
      • It is important to have the mascarpone at room temperature to prevent curdling when whipping it.
      • Make the template for the meringue discs so they are all the same size and will stack nicely.
      • The discs can be made days ahead and stored in an airtight container.
      • Toast the nuts for the most intense flavor.
      Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.

      Love Individual Desserts - Here's More!

      • This Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae sits in a clear glass with a container with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a cherry on top.
        Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae
      • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
        Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
      • An Individual Italian Tiramisu sits on a cream colored plate and dark beige and silver trim with a cup of tea and a plater of tiramisu in the background,
        Individual Italian Tiramisu
      • Individual Meringue
        Meringue Shells

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it.  

      Three meringue discs are filled with raspberry mousse and sit on a pink edged plate.

      Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse

      Helen S. Fletcher
      Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse is an amazing combination of three nutted meringue discs filled with a raspberry mousse that is enhanced with mascarpone.
      5 from 3 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 55 minutes mins
      Drying & Chilling Time 4 hours hrs
      Total Time 4 hours hrs 55 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 servings
      Calories 747 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Hazelnut Meringues

      • 2 ounces hazelnuts or almonds or half and half (60 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons cornstarch (15 grams)
      • 1 cup + 2 tablespoons baker's or granulated sugar (225 grams)
      • ½ cup egg whites (about 4 from large eggs)
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

      Raspberry Mousse

      • 1 cup seedless red raspberry jam (285 grams)
      • 2 teaspoons gelatin
      • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
      • 1 cup heavy cream
      • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (45 grams)
      • 8 ounces mascarpone (225 grams)
      • Red food coloring, optional, as needed

      Instructions
       

      Hazelnut Meringues

      • Line two half sheets with parchment paper.  Place one rack in the oven on the bottom and the second on the middle rung.
      • Using a cookie cutter or pastry circle, draw nine 3 ½" circles, equally spaced, on a piece of parchment the size of the pan.  This is your template.  Set aside.
      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place the hazelnuts or almonds or half and half on a sheet pan and toast for 7 to 10 minutes until fragrant and medium brown. To remove the skins easily, see my post Hazelnut Gianduja. Cool completely.
      • Reduce the oven temperature to 250°F.
      • Combine the cooled hazelnuts and cornstarch in the bowl of a processor.  Process until the hazelnuts are finely ground.  Set aside.
      • Whip the egg whites, sugar and vanilla until very stiff, about 8 to 10 minutes depending upon the machine.  Fold the hazelnut/cornstarch mixture in by hand.  Do not over fold and break the mixture down.  It should remain firm.
      • Place the template on a half sheet pan.  Place another sheet of parchment over it.  Fit a pastry bag with a number 3 or 4 plain tip. Holding the tip about ½ inch above the template, pipe the batter in the circles starting in the middle and moving out to the edges.  
        Alternatively, measure a heaping tablespoon of meringue for each circle and spread it within the circle with a small offset spatula.  
      • Remove the template, place it on a second half sheet pan and top it with another plain piece of parchment paper.  Repeat filling the circles with the meringue.  
      • Bake for about 1 hour until they are completely dry.  Place the parchment with the meringues on racks to cool completely.  They should come off by just lifting them.  When completely cooled, place in airtight containers where they can be held for weeks.

      Raspberry Mousse

      • Place the raspberry jam in the processor bowl.  Process until smooth.  
      • Dissolve the gelatin in the lemon juice.  Set aside.
      • Whip the cream and powdered sugar until soft peaks form.  Remove to another bowl and set aside.
      • Without cleaning the bowl, add the room temperature mascarpone.  Whisk until soft.  Add the raspberry jam a third at a time.  
      • Microwave the gelatin for about 8 to 10 seconds until liquid.  Pour into the mascarpone/raspberry mixture and whisk to incorporated.  
      • Fold in the cream.  It will look rather purplish and not too appetizing at this point.  Add red food coloring a few drops at a time until a pleasant color is achieved.  
      • Refrigerate until almost set up.  It will depend upon how cold your refrigerator is but it took mine about 2 ½  hours
      • Fit a piping bag with an #8 or 9 open star tip.  Fill the piping bag about ⅔ full and holding the bag about ½ inch from the disc, pipe the mousse in a circle to within about ¼ inch of the edge.  Fill the middle by piping the mousse into it.  Pipe 12 circles in this manner
      • Stack 2 meringue discs with mousse on top of each other. Place the plain hazelnut meringue on top. Do not press down too hard or the meringue will break.

      Finishing

      • I had left over ganache from another project so I used a smaller tip and piped a bit in the center of the meringue disc.  I finished with a whole hazelnut.
      • Alternatively, if you don't have any ganache, melt a bit of chocolate and drizzle it from side to side or simply sprinkle with powdered sugar just before serving.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­                                                                                                                                   
      Baker's sugar is best for meringues. See information above.
      My preference is to use cold egg whites.
      Baker's sugar is best for meringues. See information above.
      Always toast the nuts for the most flavor.  All hazelnuts, all almonds or half and half can be used.
      Seedless red raspberry jam is perfect for the flavoring.
      The lemon juice adds a bit of tang to the mousse.
      Mascarpone is a very smooth, creamy cheese often used in desserts such as tiramasu. It adds body as well as flavor. It can be expensive depending upon where you buy it. I find Trader Joe's has the best price.
      Heavy cream is used for its ability to whip up tighter and higher.
      Don't over beat the cream for the mousse. If it is too stiff the air will be diminished when folding into the other ingredients resulting in a heavy mousse.
      The use of food coloring enhances the looks of the mousse which will naturally be purplish.
      It is important to have the mascarpone at room temperature to prevent curdling when whipping it.
      Make the template for the meringue discs so they are all the same size and will stack nicely. 
      The discs can be made days ahead and stored in an airtight container. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6servingsCalories: 747kcalCarbohydrates: 96gProtein: 9gFat: 37gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gCholesterol: 83mgSodium: 87mgPotassium: 186mgFiber: 2gSugar: 80gVitamin A: 1114IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 104mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake

      Modified: Oct 24, 2025 · Published: Aug 15, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 19 Comments

      A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.

      Ummmmm cheesecake! This very Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake will become everyone's favorite! Cheesecakes have an unwarranted reputation of being difficult to make. Do you use a water bath or not? How do you prevent it from cracking? What temperature is best to bake it? And on and on it goes. What if you could make a great cheesecake without any baking involved? Of course you would!

      Well look no further because this Rocky Road Cheesecake is as easy as it gets.

      A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.

      While it looks complex it is actually very easy. Peanuts, chocolate and mini- marshmallows are stirred into a chocolate cheese cake made with cream cheese, condensed milk and a bit of whipped cream - all in the processor. And as to the complements you get? Bask in their glory and share the recipe!

      Other summer desserts include: Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp, Hello Dolly Cookies, Dutch Peach Pie, Almost No Bake Strawberry Pie, and the unusual dessert of Chilled Peach Soup.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      The processor or mixer for mixing cheesecakes

      Several years ago I found a better way to mix cheesecakes.....the processor. It was quite accidental. I was making them for the restaurant and I had something in the bowl of the mixer. The particular cheesecake I was making takes a long time to bake and cool in the oven so I made it in the processor. When the owner of the restaurant tasted the newly made cheesecakes he said, "I don't know what you did, they were always good but these are outstanding".

      But why are they better? When mixed in a mixer, air is whipped into the cream cheese mixer even when using the paddle attachment. This makes for a fluffier cheesecake. For the ultimate smooth, creamy cheesecake using a processor which doesn't add air to the mixture is the answer. They are simply better this way whether they are baked or a no bake cheesecake. While some of my older posts still use the mixer (at least till I get to updating them) I make all my cheesecake in the processor now. See if you can't see a difference.

      Cheesecake Pan or Springform Pans

      When I had my bakery we used Cheesecake pans for cheesecakes as well as to assemble cakes with soft fillings that could slide before setting up.

      A Cheesecake pan has a solid outer ring and a flat bottom that fits in it. On the other hand the springform pans have an outer ring that opens and closes with a spring. The bottom also usually has a lip on it to fit within the ring when it is closed. The problem with that is two fold. Over time or sooner depending upon how it is stored, the spring no longer closes tightly.

      While the cheesecake in the cheesecake pan can be easily released by dropping the side and then using a metal spatula to go between the crust and the bottom plate it is easily released and moved to a serving plate or cake board. We did this thousands of times at the bakery.

      With the springform pan the lip on the bottom makes it much more difficult to release cleanly as it is more difficult to get the spatula under the crust. The cheesecake pan is also a snap to wash and dry. Not so much the springform pan.

      Why You'll Love this Recipe

      • It's super easy to make using only the processor.
      • The cheesecake uses simple ingredients easy to obtain.
      • There is absolutely no baking involved.
      • It freezes like a dream so can be made ahead.
      • Let the kids stir in the peanuts and chocolate so they can say they made a cheesecake.
      • This cheesecake requires absolutely no baking.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

      Ingredients fr the chocolate crust include graham crackers, powdered sugar, cocoa, and unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Cocoa powder, unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: Graham Crackers, powdered sugar

      Rocky Road Cheesecake

      Ingredients for the Rocky Road Cheesecake include : salted, roasted peanuts, semisweet chocoate, heavy cream, cream cheese, condensed milk, vanilla, and  mini-marshmallows.

      FRONT ROW: Roasted, salted peanuts, vanilla extract

      MIDDLE ROW: Mini-marshmallows, semisweet chocolate

      BACK ROW: Sweetened Condensed milk, cream cheese and heavy cream

      Gravel Top (optional)

      The ingredients for the optional gravel top are semisweet chocolate and dry roasted and salted peanuts.

      Semisweet chocoalte, dry roasted and salted peanuts. (Not shown homemade or purchased caramel Ice cream Sauce. )

      Important Ingredients

      • Different brands of Graham Crackers take differing amounts of melted butter because of their formulas. It is best to start with a given amount and then add another tablespoon or two to get the consistency of wet sand.
      • Either Natural or Dutch cocoa powder can be used in this recipe because there is no leavening agent being used.
      • Be sure to use sweetened condensed milk and not evaporated milk. They are two different products. Both milks are evaporated milks, using different techniques. All condensed milk is sweetened. Evaporated milk is not.
      • Any dry roasted, salted peanuts can be used, even those with honey.
      • While I used my go to pure chocolate Callebaut #811 callets, this recipe can even use chocolate chips if that is what you have on hand.
      • Full fat or ⅓ less fat cream cheese can be used here. It should be softened before processing by leaving it at room temperature or microwaving it briefly. Do not melt it.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

      This collages for the Rocky Road Cheesecake shows the graham crackers, cocoa and powdered sugar in the processor, processed with the melted butter in a bowl, then combined and finally pressed into the bottom of the cheesecake pan.

      Step 1. Combine the broken graham crackers, cocoa powder and powdered sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Process to make fine crumbs. Step 2. Transfer the crumbs to a bowl and add the melted butter. Step 3. Use a fork to mix the crumbs. The texture should be that of lightly wet sand. Step 4. Spray a cheesecake or springform pan with a non-stick baking release. Press the crumbs evenly into the bottom of the pan. Set aside.

      This collages shows the peanuts and chocolate being processed into finer chunks for the gravel on top of the cheesecake as well as inside, the whipped cream processed until firm and then transferred to a bowl.

      Step 5. To make the peanuts and chocolate for both the inside of the cheesecake and the gravel top this can be done in one step and divided or twice as desired. Place them in the bowl of the processor (no need to clean it). Step 6. Pulse the processor to make large crumbs. Step 7. Wipe out the processor bowl with a paper towel. Add the heavy cream and process until very stiff around the edge of the bowl. The cream in the middle will remain liquid. Step 8. Place in a bowl, along with the unwhipped cream and mix them together. This should result in a medium stiff cream. Set aside.

      This collage shows the cream cheese nthe processor bowl, processed, the chocolate, condensed milk and vanilla added and the mixure processed.

      Step 9. Without cleaning the bowl, break up the softened cream cheese and add it to the bowl. Step 10. Process until it is creamy. Step 11. Add the condensed milk, melted chocolate and vanilla. Step 12. Process until completely combined, scraping the sides as necessary.

      In this collage the whipped cream is added to the cheesecake batter, the peanuts, chocolate and marshamallows are added to the batter and the cheesecake is poured into the pan and topped with the gravel.

      Step 13. Add the reserved whipped cream to the cheesecake mixture. Step 14. Stir in the peanuts and chocolate. Step 15. Stir in the marshmallows. Step 16. Pour the mixture into the prepared pan and top with the gravel. Freeze until hard. This can also be refrigerated overnight for a softer texture.

      To release the cheesecake, go around the outside of the pan with a hair dryer on high. Place the cheesecake on a wide can such as a 28 ounce can of tomatoes. Slide down the side. Place a metal spatula between the crust and the base of the pan. Go around the bottom to loosen it. Using two pancake turners, transfer the cheesecake to serving plate or a 10" cake round.

      Removing the last of the batter

      One of the most frustrating things about the food processor is getting the last of the mixture out of the bowl. Here is the easy way to do it.

      The last collages shows the last of the batter being removed from the processor bowl by pulsing the machine to throw off the batter on the blade, removing the blade and scraping out the rest of the batter.

      Step 17. In this photo, I got as much of the cheesecake out of the bowl as I could with the plastic spatula. Do not use a rubber spatula in this step and it can be easily cut by the blade. Step 18. Replace the top on the processor and pulse it 2 or 3 times. The cheesecake batter will be slung off the blade, essentially cleaning it. Step 19. Remove the blade. Step 20. Using a rubber spatula for this step, remove the remaining batter from the bowl.

      Recipe FAQS

      Who originated the cheesecake?

      Somewhere in the 5th century BC, the Greeks on the island of Samos created the first known cheesecake. It wasn't the dessert it is today. The original cheesecakes were made with fresh cheese that was pounded smooth with flour and honey then baked and reportedly served to the athletes during the first Olympic Games in 776 BC.

      Who came up with today's cheesecakes?

      According to multiple food history sites, the modern New York-style cheesecake, with its signature creamy texture, is largely credited to Arnold Reuben, a well-known restaurateur, who is said to have experimented with a classic cheesecake recipe by adding cream cheese turning it into one of the most popular desserts today.

      How is a cheesecake classified?

      Despite it being called a cake it is actually classified as a custard or pie, as it uses eggs and cream cheese to form a custard-like consistency. Some even argue that it’s closer to a tart because of its crust.

      Expert Tips

      • Different condensed milks are more or less thick. I generally use Eagle Brand as my go to for its consistency.
      • Either natural or Dutch cocoa can be used in this recipe as there is no leavening agent used.
      • Different graham cracker brands can take more or less butter to bind the crust. Start with the given amount and add more to achieve a lightly wet sand texture.
      • Either full fat or ⅓ less cream cheese can be used.
      • While I normally don't use chocolate chips, it is fine in this recipe.
      A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.

      Looking for More Cheesecakes?

      • A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.
        Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake
      • Unbelievable Cheesecake
        Unbelievable Cheesecake Update!
      • A slice of Triple Chocolate Cheesecake with the cheesecake in the background.
        Triple Chocolate Cheesecake
      • Carrot Cake Cheesecake slice
        Carrot Cake Cheesecake

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it. 

      A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.

      Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake

      Helen S. Fletcher
      While it looks complex it is actually very easy. Peanuts, chocolate and mini- marshmallows are stirred into a chocolate cheese cake made with cream cheese, condensed milk and a bit of whipped cream - all in the processor
      4.84 from 6 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Freezing time 8 hours hrs
      Total Time 8 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
      Course Cheesecake
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 servings
      Calories 419 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9x3 cheesecake or springform pan
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

      • 1 ⅓ cups graham crackers or graham cracker crumbs (170 grams)
      • ¼ cup cocoa (25 grams)
      • ½ cup powdered sugar (65 grams)
      • 8 to 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (114 to 150 grams)

      Rocky Road Cheesecake

      • 1 cup semisweet chocolate or chocolate chips, divided (185 grams)
      • ½ cup dry roasted and salted peanuts (58 grams)
      • 1 cup heavy cream, cold
      • 2 8 ounce cream cheese, sofened (454 grams)
      • 1 14 ounce can sweetened condensed milk
      • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
      • 1 cup mini-marshmallows (45 grams)

      Gravel

      • ½ cup semisweet chocolate or chocolate chips (90 grams)
      • ½ cup dry roasted and salted peanuts (58 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Chocolate Graham Crumb Crust

      • Spray a 9x3 cheesecake or springform pan with a non-stick baking release. Melt the butter and set aside.
      • Break the graham crackers up and place them in the bowl of a processor along with the cocoa and powdered sugar. Process to form fine crumbs.
      • Empty them into a medium size bowl. Pour 8 tablespoons (½ cup) of butter over the crumbs and toss them with a fork until all the crumbs are coated and the mixture looks like lightly wet sand. If it is still a bit dry, add the other 2 tablespoons, 1 tablespoon at a time.
      • Pour the crumbs into the prepared pan and press them evenly and firmly into the bottom of the pan. Set aside.

      Make the Gravel

      • Place the peanuts and chocolate in the bowl of the processor (no need to clean it). Pulse to coarsely chop them up so they look like gravel. Set aside.

      Rocky Road Cheesecake

      • Melt ⅔ of the chocolate (125 grams) over a double boiler on half power until about a scant half is shiny and looks melty,. Stir to melt the rest. This may also be done in a double boiler. Set aside.
      • Using the remaining chocolate and peanuts for the inside of the cheesecake, repeat as for making the gravel. Set aside.
      • Wipe the bowl of the processor out with a paper towel. Add the heavy cream and process until it is very stiff around the edges of the bowl. There will be some cream in the middle that is not incorporated. Place all of the cream, including the unincorporated in a bowl and stir together. It should be medium firm after combining the two. Set side.
      • Without wiping out the bowl, add the softened cream cheese. Process until smooth. Add the melted chocolate, condensed milk and vanilla. Process until completely smooth, scraping down as necessary. Transfer to a medium size bowl.
      • To remove all of the mixture from the bowl, place it back on the machine. Pulse it 2 or 3 times to sling the batter off the blade. Remove the blade and use a rubber spatula to clean the bowl.
      • Stir in the coarsely chopped peanuts and chocolate followed by the marshmallows. Pour over the crust and smooth it out so it is even.
      • Sprinkle the gravel over the top. Place in the freezer for about 8 hours or overnight.
      • To release the cheesecake from the cheesecake pan, go around the outer rim of the pan with a hair dryer on high. Place the pan on a wide can such as a 28 ounce can of tomatoes. Pull down the sides. Place the cake flat on a table and run a metal spatula between the crust and the bottom of the pan. Using 2 pancake turners, lift the cake off the metal bottom and transfer it to a serving plate or a 10" cake round.
      • Room temperature the cheesecake for about 20 to 30 minutes to make cutting it easier. Serve with homemade or purchased caramel sauce.
      • This can also be refrigerated overnight for a softer texture. Refrigerate or freeze leftovers.
      • In any case, the entire cake can be made, frozen and thawed in the refrigerator for serving.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      __________________________________________________
      Different brands of Graham Crackers take differing amounts of melted butter because of their formulas. It is best to start with a given amount and then add another tablespoon or two to get the consistency of wet sand.
      Either Natural or Dutch cocoa powder can be used in this recipe because there is no leavening agent being used.
      Be sure to use sweetened condensed milk and not evaporated milk. They are two different products. Both milks are evaporated milks, using different techniques. All condensed milk is sweetened. Evaporated milk is not.
      Any dry roasted, salted peanuts can be used, even those with honey.
      While I used my go to pure chocolate Callebaut #811 callets, this recipe can even use chocolate chips if that is what you have on hand. 
      Full fat or ⅓ less fat cream cheese can be used here. It should be softened before processing by leaving it at room temperature or microwaving it briefly. Do not melt it.  Be sure to unwrap the cream cheese and place it on a microwave plate before placing it in the microwave. 
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 419kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 6gFat: 31gSaturated Fat: 16gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 44mgSodium: 130mgPotassium: 273mgFiber: 4gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 538IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 47mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins

      Modified: Sep 16, 2025 · Published: Aug 12, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

      This is a close up of an open Peanut Butter and Jam Muffin with a riverlut of strawberry jam running through it.

      Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins are a year 'round favorite. You don't have to be a kid to love peanut butter and jelly.  No matter what your age, this satisfies that craving.  It is important to use jam in these muffins as jelly has a tendency in the heat of the oven to run out.  The thicker jams stay put.

      This is a close up of an open Peanut Butter and Jam Muffin with a riverlut of strawberry jam running through it.

      Any flavor of jam can be used. This is an easy recipe that can be whipped up in no time with simple ingredients that are probably in your pantry.

      Muffins and Quick Breads are among the fastest and easiest treats to put together. Here are a few more for you to consider: Date Nut Bread, Cranberry Muffins, Blueberry Crumb Muffins, Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones, and Heavenly French Toast with Blueberry Compote.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for the Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins include all-purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda salt, vegetable oil, brown sugar, egg, vanilla, peanut putter, buttermilk, and jam.

      FRONT ROW: Baking powder, vanilla, salt, baking soda

      MIDDLE ROW: Strawberry jam, peanut butter, egg

      BACK ROW: All-purpose Flour, oil, buttermilk, brown sugar

      Main Ingredients

      • Buttermilk can be whole or lowfat.
      • Dark Brown Sugar will yield a deeper taste than light brown.
      • While I prefer canola oil, any vegetable oil can be used.
      • Commercial peanut butter such as Jif, Skippy or Peter pan should be used for the best results.
      • Whatever jam or preserves are used, they should be thick. The thicker the better to prevent them from running out.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The first collage sows the liquid ingredients in a mixing bowl, mixed, the peanut butter added and mixed.

      Step 1. Combine the oil, brown sugar, egg, and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Beat until completely mixed. Step 3. Add the peanut butter. Step 4. Mix on medium to blend.

      The second collages show the first addition of flour, then mixed in, the first addition of buttermilk  and that being beaten in.

      Step 5. Add the first of 3 additions of flour. Step 6. Beat the flour in on medium. Step 7. Add the first of 2 additions of buttermilk. Step 8. Mix in to blend together.

      This collages show the last of the flour being beaten and and the finished batter, the bottom layer of batter in the muffin tins and the preserves in the middle of one of the muffin bottoms.

      Step 9. After adding the flour and buttermilk in order, add the last addition of flour. Step 10. Beat it in until the batter is completely mixed. Step 11. Spoon ⅓ of the batter into each of 6 jumbo muffin tins. If using regular size tins, use about 3 tablespoons of batter in each of 11 or cups. Step 12. Dollop 1 tablespoon of jam in the center of each cup.

      The last college shows the remaining batter being placed on top of the jam, a spoon is evening it out and pushing it to the sides, the baked muffins in the pan and on a cooing rack.

      Step 13. Top the jam with another ⅓ or 3 tablespoons of batter. Step. Since this is a rather sticky batter, wet a small the spoon, shake it off and push the batter to the side of the muffin wells, sealing it to the side to prevent the jam from coming out. Evening it out across the top. Step 15. Bake the muffins as called for. Step 16. Let them cool in the pans for about 15 minutes and the release them carefully and let them cool completely on a cooling rack.

      Recipe FAQS

      Who invented peanut butter?

      While George Washington Carver is often thought of as the inventor peanut butter, it was actually invented by the Aztec far before Carver's time. However, Carver was a prolific inventor and came up with over 100 ways to use peanut butter.

      When did the PBJ sandwich become so popular?

      Several factors helped this sandwich to soar in popularity. Peanut butter is inexpensive, nutritious and easily available. Add sliced bread and jelly and it was especially welcome during the depression and during wartime when food was rationed. It was easy to make a sandwich.

      What can you make with peanut butter?

      The better question might be what can't you make with peanut butter? Sandwiches of course, cakes, cookies, cupcakes, ice cream, and sauces. It can be used in sweet and savory cooking and baking. One of the popular treats is peanut butter cookies. See my Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies where peanuts are used two ways.

      Expert Tips

      • Use commercial peanut butter such as Jif, Peter Pan or Skippy. Homemade or natural don't work as well.
      • The flavor of the jam doesn't matter but the thickness does. The thicker the better to keep it from melting in the heat and running out,
      • Make sure the jam is put in the middle of the bottom layer, then press the edges together when the top is put on.
      This is a close up of an open Peanut Butter and Jam Muffin with a riverlut of strawberry jam running through it.

      Ready for More Marvelous Muffins?

      • A single Apple Muffin covered with a crunchy sugar topping.
        Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe
      • Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.
        A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix
      • Strawberry Muffins
        Best of All Strawberry Muffins
      • A cut open Double Chocolate Truffled Muffin sits on a plate with a teacup next to it and more muffins in the background.
        Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

      A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important. 

      This is a close up of an open Peanut Butter and Jam Muffin with a riverlut of strawberry jam running through it.

      Peanut Butter and Jam Muffins

      Helen S. Fletcher
      You don't have to be a kid to love these Peanut Butter and Jam Muffins.  No matter what your age, this satisfies that craving.  It is important to use jam or preserves in these muffins as jelly has a tendency in the heat of the oven to run out.  The thicker jams and preserves stay put.
      5 from 2 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Muffins
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 Jumbo muffins
      Calories 589 kcal

      Equipment

      • 6 cup jjumbo muffin pan OR 1- 12 cupmuffin pan.
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • ½ teaspoon baking soda
      • ½ teaspoon salt
      • ⅓ cup canola or vegetable oil
      • ¾ cup brown sugar (150 grams)
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla
      • ½ cup commercial peanut butter (114 grams)
      • 1 cup buttermilk*
      • 6 tablespoons thick strawberry jam
      • * *If you don't have buttermilk, measure 1 cup of whole or 2% milk and remove 1 tablespoon of it.  Add 1 tablespoon white or cider vinegar or lemon juice.  Let it sit for about 5 minutes at which point it will curdle and/or thicken.  That is fine. Use this  in place of the buttermilk. 

      Instructions
       

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F   Spray Texas muffin or regular muffin cups with a non-stick baking release well.  Set aside.
      • Whisk the flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt together.  Set aside.
      • In the bowl of an electric mixter, beat the oil, brown sugar, egg and vanilla to combine.  Add the peanut butter, mix well..
      • Add the flour in three parts, starting and ending with flour.  Add the buttermilk alternately in two parts.  
      • Spoon ⅓ cup of the muffin batter into each jumbo muffin cup.  Dollop 1 tablespoon jam in the center of each.  Top with another ⅓ cup of  batter.  With the back of a spoon make sure to seal the jam to the side of the cups by pressing the batter to the edge of the cups.  This is a rather sticky batter so wetting the spoon and shaking off the excess water helps to spread it. 
      • Bake for 25 minutes. They will rise over the top and be a beautiful medium golden brown.
      • If using regular size muffin cups, use a scant 3 tablespoon batter for the top and bottom. Use 1 ½ teaspoon jam in the center of the bottom of the muffin batter.
      • Bake for about 15 to 20 minutes.
      • 6 large muffins or 12 regular size muffins.  These freeze very well.  To thaw them, place them in a 350 degree oven for 15 minutes for jumbo, 10 for regular..  

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
       As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.

      Use commercial peanut butter such as Jif, Peter Pan or Skippy. Homemade or natural don't work as well.
      The flavor of the jam doesn't matter but the thickness does. The thicker the better to keep it from melting in the heat and running out,
      Make sure the jam is put in the middle of the bottom layer, then press the edges together when the top is put on.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6muffinsCalories: 589kcalCarbohydrates: 80gProtein: 12gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 14gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 35mgSodium: 517mgPotassium: 284mgFiber: 2gSugar: 41gVitamin A: 111IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 134mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!
      • 1
      • 2
      • 3
      • …
      • 14
      • Next Page »

      Hi, I'm Helen! Being a self-taught baker and owning a bakery for over 25 years, I found many ways to make baking more successful and less intimidating. Even busy people can bake as in many cases, recipes can be done over days. The goal is to make your baking life easier, more enjoyable, with great outcomes on a consistent basis.

      More about me →

      Subscribe to receive our free ebook

      SUBSCRIBE

      Thanksgiving

      • An individual Chocolate Caramel Tart on a white background with raspberries.
        No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts
      • The truffle filled shell is topped with fresh raspberries just before serving.
        No Bake Chocolate Raspberry Truffle Tarts
      • Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.
        Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies
      • Toasted coconut and macadamia nuts are the basis of these heart shaped shorbreads on a lattice plate over purple.
        Tropical Shortbread Cookies
      • Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart
        Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart

      Popular Recipes

      • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
        Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
      • A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
        Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
      • This picture shows a slice of the coffee cake on a white, lace edged plate on a marble counter.
        Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake
      • Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
        Langue de Chat
      • Angel food Cake
        Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake
      • Large nut pieces for Chopping Nuts
        Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way

      Available Now

      Available on Amazon, Barnes & Noble, Apple Books, as well as other sites and in book stores.
      AUTOGRAPHED COPIES ARE AVAILABLE
      Click here to purchase an autographed copy.

      Footer

      ↑ back to top

      About

      • About Helen
      • Privacy Policy

      Newsletter

      • Sign Up! for emails and updates

      Contact

      • Contact
      • Press
      • Facebook
      • Pinterest
      • Instagram
      • Threads
      • Bluesky

      COPYRIGHT © 2025 PASTRIES LIKE A PRO

      Rate This Recipe

      Your vote:




      A rating is required
      A name is required
      An email is required